404-0037ZD (SBC - 2000 - Family - User - Manual)

Cover
Preface, Table of Contents P

An Overview of Feeder Concepts 1
Connecting the SBC-2000 2
Communicating 3
Reading and Writing Parameter
Values
4
SBC-2000 Understanding Weigh Feeder
Functions
5
SBC-2000 DSP Selecting Parameters 6
SBC-2000 CM Advanced Controller Functions 7
Single Board Weigh Feeder Controllers
Refill Mode 8
B&W Graphics DSP Operation 9
Operating and Instruction Color Graphics DSP Operation 10
Manual, SBC-2000 Family Configuring SBC-2000 DSP/CM
Controllers
11
CM/DSP Program Versions to D21and C31
Will operate...Weight-Loss, 203 and 260 Weigh Belt, Calibration Data Parameters A
203B Weigh Auger, and 270 Rotary Weigh Feeders.
Parameter Codes and Status Bytes B
Quick Start Guides C
Ethernet/IP Interfacing D
Updating SBC-2000 DSP/CM
Controller Firmware
E
Alarms and Error Messages F
Motor Controller Settings G
Profibus DP Settings / Profinet H
(eManual) 404-0037/ZD/11-2013
P REFACE
ii
THE SBC-2000
Objective
This manual is intended to provide the general knowledge needed to implement
and operate Acrison's SBC-2000 Controller. The SBC-2000 is a unique product in
that it is designed specifically to communicate serially with a host or central
controller—no type of local user interface is supplied. Since standards vary widely
throughout the industry, this manual cannot supply exact instructions for
implementing the SBC-2000 within the user's specific application. Instead, the
manual focuses on giving the user the basic knowledge needed to overcome any
control issues that may come up during implementation of the product.
The manual is divided into eight chapters and two appendices that cover all the
general areas of knowledge needed to implement the product:
• Chapter 1: This chapter gives a basic overview of how an Acrison weigh

feeder functions. Included are the basic components of the feeder, and a
simple description of the controller features common to most Acrison feeder
controllers.
• Chapter 2: This chapter describes the different physical connections that must
be made to the SBC-2000.
• Chapter 3: This chapter provides a broad view of how the SBC-2000
Controller communicates with a PLC, DCS or host PC (software). In addition, a
brief description of the methodology for controlling multiple feeders is given.
• Chapter 4: This chapter discusses the general guidelines for reading and
writing parameter values to the different register addresses. Included are
explanations of remapping (parameters) and scaling (data).
• Chapter 5: This chapter provides a detailed explanation of the different
operating and control modes that the user must program into the SBC-2000.
These modes allow the user to tailor feeder operation according to their
application.
• Chapter 6: This chapter provides a summary look at all the available
pararmeters used by the SBC-2000 and correlates these parameters to the
control modes that use them.
• Chapter 7: This chapter describes some of the controller's advanced features
and how they are applied.
• Chapter 8: This chapter details how the Refill Mode works. In addition, a
troubleshooting guide is provided.
• Chapter 9: This chapter describes the operation of the Graphic Keyboard/
Display Unit (KDU) that is part of the SBC-2000 DSP Controller, or available as
an add-on for the SBC-2000 and SBC-2000 CM controllers.
The SBC-2000 iv
• Chapter 10: Describes the process of initially configuring the SBC-2000 CM or
DSP controllers.
• Appendix A: Provides a detailed description of each calibration parameter
used by the SBC-2000.
• Appendix B: Provides the Parameter Index Codes and Status bytes needed
for communicating serially with the controller.
• Appendix C: Contains copies of the Quick Start Guides for each of the SBC-
2000 controllers.
The user should review the general topics covered by each chapter and
concentrate on the chapters that are needed for their specific task. The overview
(Chapter 1) is intended for users that are not familiar with Acrison's products and
should be consulted if a general understanding of how the equipment works is
required.
Scope
This publication has been designed primarily for users (programmers and
engineers) that have been given the task of interfacing SBC-2000 controllers with
a host device. The manual is primarily a guide for those already familiar with
industrial automation and networking. The manual applies to any Acrison weigh
feeder using any of Acrison's SBC-2000 controllers.
This includes but is not limited to:
• SBC-2000/CM/DSP—plate mounted single controller
• SBC-2000/CM—multiple controller boards mounted in a rack (refer to the figure
below)
• LCS—optional enclosure package for the SBC-2000/CM/DSP.
Reference Materials
Additional documentation is recommended for use with this manual. These
documents may be supplied by or acquired from Acrison. These include:
• Weigh Feeder Operating and Instruction Manual—This manual is specific to

whatever model weigh feeder is supplied (supplied with equipment).
• Engineering Packet—Application specific engineering drawings and installation
information (supplied with equipment).
• Equipment Labels Manual—This manual shows all of the safety-related labels
used and where they are placed on the various equipment provided.
Users requiring information on any third-party software, equipment or software

protocols should reference the appropriate specification and/or vendor manual.
Product Specifications
This product is designed to be safe under these conditions
Usage Indoor use
Weight of a controller for 6 feeders is approximately 4 pounds for the

Weight DC powered unit and 7 pounds for the AC powered version (integral,
rack-mounted power supplies).
v SBC-2000
Product Specifications
This product is designed to be safe under these conditions
The DC-powered unit (external supplies) requires a logic +5 VDC
power supply capable of providing 110mA per control module, plus a
separate, isolated +5 VDC supply which can provide 25mA per
Power control module.
For the AC-powered unit, main supply voltage fluctuations up to +/-
10% of nominal. Main supply voltage normal level of transient
overvoltages is impulse withstand category II of IEC 60334-4-4-443.
Temperature
Range Operating temp: 0° to 50°C; Storage temp: -20° to +70°C
Altitude 2000m
Protection Degree of protection is IP66.
Humidity Maximum relative humidity 95% relative, non-condensing.
The SBC-2000 vi
vii SBC-2000
About this Manual…
This manual has been produced as a guide to the correct installation, operation and maintenance of
Acrison’s SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller. It has been created to provide concise, yet comprehensive
product information to enable the user to obtain maximum long-term benefits from the equipment. If there
are any details about this manual, the equipment, or any other activity of Acrison that require further
explanation, please do not hesitate to contact Acrison’s Service Department.
Safety
The product or products described in this

publication should only be installed or worked on
by qualified personnel. Good safety practices
must be followed at all times.
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified
by the manufacturer, the protection provided by
the equipment may be impaired.
Refer to the Caution/ Operator Safety notice.
Disclaimer
This manual contains technical data that is

subject to change. Acrison reserves the right to Notice
alter or change any information in this manual
without prior notice or approval. This manual contains certain information deemed
confidential and proprietary to Acrison and is
provided to the purchaser or user of Acrison
equipment with this stipulation. This document
must not be reproduced, copied, lent, transmitted
or otherwise disposed of either directly or
indirectly, in whole or in part, without the express
written consent of Acrison, Inc.
Acrison products are manufactured under the
protection of various patents both domestic and
foreign.
Trademarks
Acrison, SBC-2000, pKDU and MD-II are

registered trademarks of Acrison, Inc.
Palm OS, Graffiti and HotSync are registered
trademarks, and Palm and Palm Computing are
trademarks of Palm Computing, Inc., or its
subsidiaries.
All other company and product names may be the
trademarks of the respective companies with 20 Empire Blvd.
which they are associated. Moonachie, New Jersey 07074
Phone: 201-440-8300  Fax: 201-440-4939
E-mail: informail@acrison.com
Copyright Acrison, Inc. 2002–All rights reserved Website: www.acrison.com
Caution
OPERATOR SAFETY
The equipment this controller operates contains rotating components, and

therefore, must not be opened when operating. Always disconnect power to
the controller and/or equipment prior to performing any maintenance
whatsoever. Never permit operators or any personnel to place hands, feet,
apparel or any other object inside or near the inlet, outlet or any opening of
the machinery this controller operates while power is on.
The equipment this controller operates can be installed in a variety of
configurations predicated on the handling characteristics of the product(s)
being metered, the overall process design and the physical equipment
arrangement. It is the buyer's or user's sole responsibility to (1) define the
need for and to subsequently ensure that any safety device(s) or associated
safety device(s) other than those which are normally furnished by Acrison as
standard are provided in accordance with the specific installation parameters
of the equipment; (2) define the need for and assure compliance with all
applicable safety laws, rules and regulations.
If safety devices are not specifically included with the original equipment
(based on the specifics of a given installation), Acrison can, at the user's
expressed request only, provide whatever safety device(s) it deems
applicable. If Acrison is asked to make recommendations prior to operation
of the equipment, said recommendations are only advisory and do not
impose any obligation or liability upon Acrison unless Acrison is expressly
requested to provide the safety device(s) and does so.
It is the buyer's or user's sole responsibility to establish safety procedures
and operational instructions to safeguard the operator(s) during
maintenance, cleaning, or any use of the equipment (and controller)
whatsoever and to subsequently ensure that the equipment is operated in
conformance with all applicable safety procedures, laws, regulations and
instructions. It is also the buyer's or user's sole responsibility to enforce all
safety regulations and operational instructions and to maintain the equipment
in a safe condition (guards in place, warning, caution, and/or important labels
affixed, electrical boxes secure, interlocks operational, etc.). In particular, all
warning, caution, and/or important labels affixed to the equipment must be
maintained in a readable condition and, if necessary, replaced with new
labels.
Because the nature of the equipment this controller operates does not
always make it possible to prevent operator access to rotating components,
under no circumstances should maintenance or cleaning be performed on
the equipment and/or controller without first disconnecting all power.
Important The equipment this controller operates is supplied for the

specific duty for which it was originally sold and as stipulated on
the Acrison Machine Specification Sheet. It is not recommended
to use this equipment and/or controller for any other purpose
without the expressed written consent of Acrison.
Contents
Preface The SBC-2000

Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii-iv
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii-v
Reference Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii-v
Chapter 1 An Overview of Feeder Concepts

Theory of Operation—Volumetric and Gravimetric Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Acrison Weighing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Basic Components of the Different Model Acrison Weigh Feeders . . . . 1-4
Types of Weigh Feeders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Types of Weigh Feeder Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Motor Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Weigh Feeder Controller—Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Continuous and Batch Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Control Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Refill, Rezero and Fast Start Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Chapter 2 Connecting the SBC-2000

Controller/Host Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Direct Multi-drop Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Gateway Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Speed Considerations and Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Sharing a Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Baud Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Response Time of a Host or Central Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Data Scaling or Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Optimizing Serial Communications—Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Standard Physical Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Scale Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Motor Controller Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Host Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Types of Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Serial Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Contents i
Chapter 3 Communicating
Serial Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Protocol Summaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Interacting with the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
User Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Inputting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Control Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Developing the Software Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Chapter 4 Reading and Writing Parameter Values

Accessing Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Associating Parameters with Remap Register Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Considerations when Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Remapping Feeder Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Scaling Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Chapter 5 Understanding Weigh Feeder Functions

Selecting Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Single feeder (Continuous Operations). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Selecting Operating and Control Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Rezero and Refill Mode Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Calibration Data Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Fast Start Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Single Feeder (Batching) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Batch Mode-Set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Batch Mode-Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Internal Mode Operational Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
External Mode Operational Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Batching Mode Operational Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Chapter 6 Selecting Parameters

Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Types of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Status Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Associating Parameters with Operating and Control Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Using the Programmed Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Defining the Feeder and Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
ii SBC-2000
Defining the Method of Control (Standard or PID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Defining the Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Defining the Parameters Needed for Continuous Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Defining the Parameters Needed for Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Chapter Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Default Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Default 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Default 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Default 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Chapter 7 Advanced Controller Functions

Features that Improve Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Bumpless Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Feed Rate Set Point Universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Auto Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Feed Rate Control Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Features for Specialized Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Blending Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Password Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Recipe Load/Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Optional Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Network Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
IR Interface (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Local Graphic Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Chapter 8 Refill Mode

Understanding the Refill Cycle (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders) . . . . . . . 8-1
Initiating a Refill of the Supply Hopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Stopping the Refill Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Post Refill Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Multiple Product Changeovers (Dry Solids) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Troubleshooting the Refill Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Normal-Refill Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Partial-Refill or No-Refill Sequence: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Overfill Refill Sequence: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Chapter 9 B&W Graphics DSP Operation

Graphics Keyboard / Display Unit (KDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Power On-Off Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Membrane Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
SET POINTS Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Contents iii
COMMANDS Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
NEXT/LAST Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
SCROLL Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
RUN & STOP Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
CLR/ACK Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
ENTER Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Addressable Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Chapter 10 Color Graphics DSP Operation

Color Graphics Keyboard / Display Unit (KDU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Remote Mode Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Screen Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Chapter 11 Configuring SBC-2000 DSP/CM Controllers

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Establishing an Ethernet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Serial Channel Protocol + Baud Rate Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Controller Station Address Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Low Rate Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Using Legacy Comp Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Appendix A Calibration Data Parameters

Indexed List of Entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Calibration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Calibration Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Typical Calibration Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Appendix B Parameter Codes and Status Bytes

Parameter Index Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Controller Status Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Appendix C Quick Start Guides

Quick Start Guide SBC-2000 DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
iv SBC-2000
Quick Start Guide SBC-2000 CM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Quick Start Guide SBC-2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Appendix D Ethernet/IP to SBC-2000 Interfacing

CIP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
ControlLogix Message Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Appendix E Updating SBC-2000 CM / DSP Firmware

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-1
Flashloading the Controller Program via Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-2
Flashloading the Controller Program via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-6
Flashloading the Flashloader Program via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-11
Flashloading the Display Program via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-11
Appendix F Alarms and Error Messages

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-1
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-2
Appendix G Motor Controller Settings

PF40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
PF70 & PF700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
ABB 350/550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
Altivar 28 & 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
Altivar 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-9
Yaskawa F7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-10
Yaskawa V7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-11
Appendix H Profibus DP / Profinet Settings

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
Profinet Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-10
Index A-Z
Contents v
vi SBC-2000
CHAPTER
1
AN OVERVIEW OF FEEDER CONCEPTS
CHAPTER1
The SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller has been specifically developed for
applications that require serial or network interfacing to a central controller. For
this reason, the SBC-2000 is not equipped with any type of local keyboard or
graphic display, and has streamlined functionality that is designed for this type of
operation. Since the controller is not equipped with any type of graphic interface, it
is vital for anyone implementing the SBC-2000 to clearly understand both how the
controller functions, and how the controller interacts with other components that
comprise a weigh feeder. In order to provide a basic level of understanding, this
chapter will provide an overview of the fundamental concepts behind Acrison
weigh feeders, and answer three general questions:
1. What is an Acrison weigh feeder?
2. What are the physical components of a basic weigh feeder?

3. How does a weigh feeder controller function?
Theory of Operation—Volumetric and Gravimetric Feeders

Throughout various processing industries, the requirement to meter dry bulk
solids is a common and critical element of many manufacturing processes. In fact,
in most of these applications the quality of the end product is directly related to the
overall performance of the feeding equipment. Because of this, Acrison's product
line contains many different types of feeders that are designed to meter material
either volumetrically (by volume) or gravimetrically (by weight).
Volumetric feeders are devices that meter by volume; a true volumetric feeder
must encompass a positive means to accurately measure volume and then
discharge that measured volume. Auger type volumetric feeders are the most
widely used and specified because they are considered to be the most versatile
and precise, when properly designed.
An auger type volumetric feeder is designed to meter a specific volume of product
for each revolution of the metering auger. Most importantly, however, the key to a
viable volumetric feeder is the design of the mechanism that ensures that the
metering auger is positively, continuously and reliably filled with product. Acrison
manufactures a number of different auger type volumetric feeders, each designed
with different mechanical functionality to ensure accurate and dependable
metering performance in handling a countless assortment of dry solid materials. A
variety of different size metering augers are available to cover an extremely broad
feed range.
An Overview of Feeder Concepts 1-1

Figure 1-1 Weigh Feeders (possible configurations)
Platform Weighing System
(Split-Beam Type)
Platform Weighing System

(Single-Beam Type)
Models 402 and 404 Series; A405 and 406
Weigh Belt Weighing System
Model 407
Weigh Auger Weighing System
Model 203
Overhead Weighing System
Model 203B
403 Series and Model 270
1-2 SBC-2000
Generally, the metering auger of a volumetric feeder is powered by a variable
speed drive; and therefore, it is the size of the metering auger combined with the
minimum and maximum speed at which it will operate that determines the feed
range output, or volumetric displacement.
For Example If a given size metering auger is rated for a maximum volumetric output of 100
cubic feet per hour at its maximum designed speed, and the product it will meter
weighs 45 pounds per cubic foot, an output capacity (by weight) will be about
4500 pounds per hour. But product densities often vary and thus, the output of a
volumetric feeder will likewise vary based on the differences in product densities.
Because a volumetric feeder meters by volume, not weight, there are other factors
that will affect the output of such a feeder aside from the product bulk density (i.e.,
moisture content within the material, particle size, characteristics of the material
that cause it to adhere to the metering auger, etc.). Thus, the only method of
verifying the actual output of a volumetric feeder is physical sampling.
In contrast, weigh feeders meter by weight and therefore, offer many advantages
over volumetric metering, especially when accuracy is critical and/or when
information with respect to feeder operation/performance is required for process
or other purposes. However, a weigh feeder must also reliably “meter” the
material and therefore, must include a mechanism to accomplish this. Today, the
most widely specified type of weigh feeder is “weight-loss’, although other type
weigh feeders are also manufactured by Acrison (i.e., Weigh Belt, Weigh Auger
and In-line Rotary).
Acrison Weighing Systems

The key component in the overall design of any weigh feeder is its weighing
system. Acrison has five distinct weighing systems for use with its gravimetric
feeders. The mechanical portion of each Acrison weighing system is a frictionless,
mechanically counterbalanced, lever network that utilizes specially designed
stainless steel flexures for all pivoting connections. This "counterbalanced" design
means the weight of the entire metering mechanism is completely "tared-off" or
"balanced-out". In this way, only the net weight of product is measured. In
operation, movement of the lever network is precisely measured by Acrison’s
“Ratiometric Digital Weight Resolver” that converts this movement into an
extremely precise signal, directly proportional to weight.
Each of Acrison's various weighing systems are scales (independent of the weight
sensor) and contain distinct lever network configurations (refer to Figure 1-1).
When used in conjunction with the Digital Weight Resolver, all Acrison scale
mechanisms have an equivalent resolution of one (1) part in 1,048,576. They
have been specifically designed for industrial weighing applications, and in
particular, for “Weight-Loss” weigh feeding (Continuous or Batch). Depending on
the feeder model, five different configurations are possible:
• “Platform” Weighing (Split-Beam Type) System—A “split beam” lever

network used with the Model 402 and 404 Series; A405 and 406 “Weight-Loss-
Differential” Weigh Feeders.
• “Platform” Weighing (Single-Beam Type) System—A “single beam”
modified parallelogram type lever network used with Model 407 Weigh
Feeders.
• “Overhead” Weighing System—A modified parallelogram type lever network
used with Model 403 and 270 Series Weigh Feeders.
• “Weigh Belt” Weighing System—A single beam lever network used with
Model 203 and 210 Series Weigh Belt Feeders.
• “Weigh Auger” Weighing System—A single beam lever network used with
Model 203B Series Weigh Auger Feeders.

Figure 1-2 Ratiometric Digital Weight Resolver System (Sensor Arrangement)
Ratiometric Digital Weight Resolver

The Ratiometric Digital Weight Resolver (refer to Figure 1-2) is an electronic
displacement measuring device made up of two important components: (1) the
Ratiometric Digital Weight Resolver (Sensor), and (2) Ratiometric Computational
Module. Both components work together to measure and convert the precise
linear movement of the lever network (“scale”) into a binary coded data stream.
The sensor does not attach to the lever network and therefore, is non-contacting
and totally unaffected by shock, overload or typical in-plant vibration. In addition, it
does not require any sort of linearization, temperature compensation, calibration
or adjustment.
Note: The remainder of the discussion in this chapter will focus on the operation
of gravimetric feeders because these are the most complex. Volumetric feeders
do not utilize a scale, and are controlled strictly by varying the motor speed in
relation to the physical output of the metering mechanism.
Basic Components of the Different Model Acrison Weigh Feeders

In general, the basic components of an Acrison weigh feeder will vary depending
on the model.
All Model “Weight-Loss” Weigh Feeders

A ‘”Weight-Loss” type weigh feeder (refer to Figure 1-3) consists of a variable
speed metering mechanism mounted on the weigh system where the rate of
product feed is controlled on a “weight-loss” basis in relation to a feed rate
selection. The principle of operation associated with a “weight-loss” weigh feeder
is explained later in this Section.
1-4 SBC-2000
Figure 1-3 Acrison Weigh Feeder —Overview
Refill Device
Weigh Feeder
Assembly
Consists of: Scale

Metering Mechanism
Variable Speed Motor
Digital Weight Resolver
Computational Module
Scale signal
Sent as a data signal
from the Ratiometric
Motor controller
signal
4-wire 20mA
current loop
SCR/DC Drive
Feeder Controller
Controls variable
User specifies Set Points, Commands
speed DC motor
and Calibration Parameters
at Weigh Feeder
Assembly
Input and Output

Signals from Host
or Central Controller
“Weight-Loss” weigh feeders consist of the following basic components (refer to

Figure 1-3), all working in unison in a controlled loop configuration:
• Weighing Mechanism with Ratiometric Digital Weight Sensing System
• Metering Mechanism (mounted on the weighing system)
• Variable Speed Motor Controller for the Metering Mechanism
• Weigh Feeder Controller
Model 203 Weigh Belt, Model 203B Weigh Auger and the Model 270
In-line Rotary Weigh Feeders
These particular model weigh feeders operate in conjunction with a ‘prefeeder’,
which is a variable speed metering mechanism that modulates product feed onto
a Model 203 Weigh Belt or into a Model 203B Weigh Auger or Model 270 In-line
Rotary Weigh Feeder in relation to a feed rate selection. These weigh feeders are
“zero reference” devices and their principle of operation is explained later in this
Section.
The above model weigh feeders consist of the following basic components, all
working in unison in a closed loop configuration (refer to Figure 1-3):
• Weighing Mechanism with Ratiometric Digital Weight Sensing System
• Metering Mechanism (Prefeeder for the above model Weigh Feeders)

• Variable Speed Motor Controller for the Prefeeder
• Weigh Feeder Controller
Acrison’s various model weigh feeders are available in a variety of sizes and feed
output capacities. However, regardless of the size and output capability of a
particular model weigh feeder, the core components remain the same. The
following sections will describe them in more detail and how they interact with
each other.
Types of Weigh Feeders

Although Acrison weigh feeders are available in various models and sizes, they
can be divided into two basic categories, (1) “Weight-Loss-Differential” (weigh-
loss) and (2) zero-reference.
“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders
In operation, a “Weight-Loss-Differential” weigh feeder assembly (refer to Figure
1-4) meters material while transmitting a scale signal to the weigh feeder
controller. The entire assembly is comprised of a metering mechanism with a
variable speed drive and supply hopper, scale and Digital Weight Resolver. The
Digital Weight Resolver converts the mechanical movement of the scale into a
continuous data stream, directly proportional to weight, which is constantly
sampled by the weigh feeder controller (refer to “Ratiometric Digital Weight
Resolver” on page 1-4). This data is then processed by the controller as weight
measurement of the material as it is metered out of the weigh feeder (feed rate).
In turn, the speed of the metering mechanism is modulated accordingly so that its
output precisely matches the selected feed rate.
Since material is constantly being fed out of a “Weight-Loss-Differential” feeder, it
will eventually be emptied unless refilling occurs. Because the material in both the
feeder and feeder hopper are measured by the scale (refer to Refill Mode on
page 1-12), refill is normally a completely automatic function.
Figure 1-4 Acrison Typical “Weight-Loss-Differential” Weigh Feeder
Supply
Variable Speed Hopper
Motor
Ratiometric Digital
Weight Resolver Metering
Computational Mechanism
Module
Material Output
Scale
1-6 SBC-2000
Figure 1-5 Weigh Belt Feeder—Model 203
Variable Speed
Motor
Prefeeder
Ratiometric Digital Weigh Belt
Weight Resolver
Computational
Module
Scale
“Weight-Loss-Differential” feeders are mostly unaffected by environmental

conditions and/or product buildup. In addition, these types of feeders can meter
both liquids and dry solids. Typically, dry solid feeders can incorporate many
different types of auger designs. However, liquid systems will typically utilize a
positive displacement pump as their feeding mechanism.
Zero-Reference Feeders
Unlike “Weight-Loss-Differential” weigh feeders that do not require a “zero-
reference” as the basis for operation, Acrison Models 203, 203B and 270 Weigh
Feeders are “zero reference” devices and therefore, it is necessary that the scale
is “zero” when the weighing portion of these weigh feeders is empty.
However, if the “zero” of any of these weigh feeders were to shift for whatever the
reason, the feed rate output will be adversely affected (i.e., build up of dust on any
portion of the weighing mechanism will cause the “zero” to rise, causing the output
of the feeder to decrease). And for reasons as such, periodic rezeroing is
essential (refer to “Rezero Mode (Zero-Reference)” on page 5-4), as is the
cleanliness of the equipment.
Typically, there are four different Model weigh feeders in this category:
• Weigh Belt Feeders (see Figure 1-5): This Acrison weigh feeder type
(Model 203 and 210 Series) consists of a volumetric feeder (prefeeder) that
meters a dry solid product onto the weigh belt, which is turning at a fixed
speed. The weight of the material on the belt is sensed by the scale, and the
controller processes this signal into an actual feed rate. The controller then
modulates the variable speed drive of the volumetric prefeeder to match the
desired Feed Rate Set Point.
• Weigh Auger Feeders (see Figure 1-6): This Acrison weigh feeder type
(Model 203B) consists of a volumetric feeder that meters a dry solid product
into a weigh auger that is turning at a fixed speed. The weight of the material in
the auger is sensed by the scale and a signal is transmitted to the weigh feeder
controller. The controller processes the scale signal into a feed rate and
compares this feed rate with the Feed Rate Set Point. The controller then
modulates the variable speed drive of the prefeeder to match the desired Feed
Rate Set Point.

Figure 1-6 Weigh Auger Feeder—Model 203B
Variable Speed
Motor
Prefeeder
Weigh Auger
Ratiometric Digital
Weight Resolver
Computational
Module
Scale
Figure 1-7 Acrison In-Line Feeder—Model 270
Material Inlet
Scale (from prefeeder)

Computational Feed Chamber
Module (weigh Pockets)
Motor
(fixed speed)
Material Outlet
1-8 SBC-2000
• Model 270 In-line Feeder (see Figure 1-7): In operation, product is metered
into the top inlet of the Rotary feeder by a prefeeder (refer to Figure 1-7).
Usually, the prefeeder is either a rotary valve or screw type mechanism
equipped with a variable speed drive. Within the feeder, a weigh chamber that
is equipped with a series of pockets rotates on a central axis. As the pockets
rotate, they hold, weigh and then discharge their contents through the bottom
outlet of the weigh chamber housing. Weight measurement is performed by
Acrison’s Ratiometric Digital Weight Resolver. Any difference that exists
between the actual feed rate (as sensed) and the selected feed rate, initiates a
correction in the output of the prefeeder. In this way, the output of the weigh
feeder is regulated to precisely match the selected feed rate.
Types of Weigh Feeder Controllers

The weigh feeder controller is the “brain” of an Acrison weigh feeder. In operation,
the controller coordinates the functions of each component in the system, and
allows the user to interface with the system according to the needs of the specific
application. Acrison offers many different model weigh feeder controllers.
However, all of these different models fit into two basic categories, (1) Single
Feeder Controllers and (2) Multi-feeder Controllers (refer to Figure 1-8).
• Single Feeder Controllers: This type of controller is most commonly used

with single feeder systems only. However, multiple feeder configurations and
systems are accomplished in applications where the single feeder systems are
connected to some type of central or host controller. In these configurations,
the individual feeder controllers are coordinated by the host controller, which
ties them together as a system (may require different option modules). These
applications are typically limited to Master/Slave and Ratio/Proportioning
configurations. Currently, there are three different single feeder models in the
MD-II Family of Controllers: MD-II 2000, C-702, BC-702 and the SBC-2000.
• Multi-Feeder Controller: These are typically utilized in large system designs
and function mainly as host controllers. Multi-Feeder controllers have a parallel
processor architecture that can support up to 16 feeders (with expansion) from
a single control source. Currently, Acrison offers one Multi-Feeder Controller—
the MD-II-MFC.
Figure 1-8 Single and Multi-Feeder Controllers

Figure 1-9 Model 040 Controller with SAS-22 Module mounted
Motor Controllers
For a typical weigh feeder, the motor controller adjusts motor speed of a
prefeeder, metering mechanism or belt, based on the signal received from the
weigh feeder controller, and transmits motor speed data back to the weigh feeder
controller. This communication is usually accomplished via a proprietary serial
communications channel (for Acrison’s Model 060 Motor Controller), or via an RS-
422 Modbus channel for third party motor controllers. As an alternative to serial
interfacing, Acrison also offers analog interfacing.
The Model SAS-22 Converter Module is a stand-alone, microprocessor-based
circuit module specifically designed as a low cost interface between an Acrison
weigh feeder controller and its associated motor controller, or another device
which requires a 0-10 VDC input.
In operation, the SAS-22 Converter Module (see Figure 1-9) converts the serial
Motor Speed Set Point generated by the weigh feeder controller into an analog 0-
10 VDC set point for motor speed. In this way, the Model SAS-22 acts as a
transparent interface that adapts Acrison’s standard motor controller serial
transmission protocol to an analog signal for use with other devices.
Weigh Feeder Controller—Basic Functions

The key to understanding how the user will control the weigh feeder lies in
understanding how the weigh feeder controller’s different operational and control
modes function. Operation and control modes not only define the overall output of
the feeder, but they also determine how the feeder will react to any unforeseen
conditions that may arise. Operational and control modes fall into three
categories:
1. Modes used to determine the overall characteristics of the feeder—

Continuous and Batch
2. Modes used to determine how the feeder will meter product—Gravimetric
and Volumetric
1-10 SBC-2000
3. Modes that support basic feeder functions—Refill, Rezero and Fast start
Continuous and Batch Operations

The Continuous and Batch Modes of operation primarily define how the weigh
feeder will function. In Continuous Mode, the controller will maintain a constant
material output from the feeder based on the Feed Rate Set Point (i.e., LBS./
Hour). In this mode, the focus of the weigh feeder controller is to precisely match
whatever Feed Rate Set Point the user has specified. Conversely, the focus of the
controller during Batch Mode is not the Feed Rate Set Point, but the total batch
amount fed. In Batch Mode, the controller meters a specific amount of material
and then stops.
Control Modes
Control modes determine how the material will be metered during Continuous or
Batch operations. All control modes work in conjunction with the Batch or
Continuous Modes and specify the set point source (internal/external) as well as
the method of metering (gravimetric/volumetric). The following is a summary of all
five control modes:
• Internal Gravimetric Mode: The controller will operate the weigh feeder in
weight units per hour (e.g., LBS./Hr.) based on the input signal from the scale.
In operation, the target rate is determined by the Feed Rate Set Point entered
into the controller (by the user). The controller calculates the actual feed rate
(based upon the weight signal from the scale), compares it to the desired feed
rate, and adjusts the feeder’s motor speed as needed to keep the two values
equal.
• Internal Volumetric Mode: In this mode, the controller maintains the feed
rate using the feeder’s specified motor speed and ignores the weight signal
being received from the scale. During operation, the user specifies the feed
rate by inputting a Motor Speed Set Point that is entered as a percentage of
maximum motor speed measured from 0-100% (refer to “Theory of
Operation—Volumetric and Gravimetric Feeders” on page 1-1).
• External Gravimetric Mode: This mode functions identically to the Internal
Gravimetric Mode, but is used when a single common signal (external) is being
applied to control one or more gravimetric feeders.
• External Volumetric Mode: This mode functions identically to the Internal
Volumetric Mode, but is used when a single common signal (external) is being
applied to control one or more volumetric feeders.
• External Fast Start: This mode places the controller in a constant Fast Start
state, usually where one or more volumetric feeders is being controlled using
the same (common) signal from an external source..
Note: Batching applications primarily use the volumetric control modes, since
the main concern is the batch amount and not feed rate.
Refill, Rezero and Fast Start Modes

The Refill, Rezero and Fast Start Modes are support modes that perform different
functions depending on the type of feeder, and how the controller is being used.
While the three modes are not used together in any application, each is vital for
those applications where they do apply.

Refill Mode (“Weight-Loss-Differential” only)
The Refill Mode governs how a “Weight-Loss-Differential” feeder will act while its
supply hopper or tank is being refilled with material. Because the weigh feeder
controller calculates the weight of material directly from the scale signal, any
addition of material during normal operation would completely disrupt the
metering process. In order to eliminate this, the “Weight-Loss-Differential” feeder
automatically switches to Volumetric Mode, and the motor speed is secured
during a normal Refill Cycle. Once the Refill Cycle is over, the controller switches
the feeder back to normal gravimetric mode without affecting the actual feed rate.
The Refill Mode is exclusive to “Weight-Loss-Differential” feeders because these
are the only type feeders that must be periodically refilled. Setup of the Refill
Mode can be somewhat complex due to all the different variables caused by
diverse refill methods. However, proper setup of the Refill Mode is critical to
achieving optimum performance (refer to Chapter 8 for details).
Rezero Mode (Zero-Reference Feeders Only)

The Rezero Mode is used exclusively with zero-reference type weigh feeders.
And periodically, such feeders must be rezeroed to ensure optimum metering
performance. This is accomplished by providing the weigh feeder with a “rezero”
function that allows the user to specify when the rezero will occur. During a
Rezero Cycle, the integral volumetric feeder is stopped, and the belt, auger or
rotary pockets are allowed to empty. Once this is complete, the controller will read
this empty scale value as the “zero” point and the system can be restarted. In this
way, the reference point for the scale is maintained accurate.
Fast Start Mode

The Fast Start feature is designed to enable any “Weight-Loss” weigh feeder
operating in gravimetric mode to quickly startup at its designated Feed Rate Set
Point. Normally, there is an undesirable ramping period during the startup of a
feeder that occurs as the controller is sampling data from the scale, and trying to
get the feeder “on rate”. The Fast Start feature eliminates this by running the
feeder at a motor speed as close as possible to the desired feed rate. Once the
scale readings are normal, the controller automatically switches back its normal
operating mode without disturbing the actual feed rate.
1-12 SBC-2000
CHAPTER
2
CONNECTING THE SBC-2000
CHAPTER2
The broad term "interfacing" is usually applied to describe how devices interact
with each other within a specific framework or boundary. In spite of this,
understanding how to properly interface an SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller
into a system requires a definition of all the controller interconnections. This is
especially true as it applies to items like the overall control configuration, the
actual physical connections (hardware protocols), the types of signals used (input/
output signals), and the wiring requirements.
Normally, these interconnections encompass both those required for the
fundamental operation of the controller, and those used to connect the controller
for added functions such as system operation, monitoring or networking. The
remainder of this chapter will provide a general description of the proper
interconnections required to configure the SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller
with the user’s network or serial communications network.
Controller/Host Connections
The standard SBC-2000 is equipped with two serial channels dedicated to the
weigh feeder scale and motor controller, plus two standard “host” communication
channels. In operation, the dedicated scale and motor controller channels provide
the necessary functionality to support other system components, while the host
communication channels enable the user to input set points and parameter values
to the SBC-2000 via a central or host controller. This design not only allows for
implementation of Ratio/Proportioning and Master/Slave configurations, but also
enables use of the controller with some of Acrison's more advanced interfacing
options such as Profibus Gateway, Ethernet Gateway, and Modem Module (dial-
up networking).
Direct Multi-drop Connections

A basic serial connection (multi-drop) will require a common hardware protocol
(e.g., RS-232 or RS-422) and programming for whatever interface the user has
designed at the central or “host” controller. Conversely, more complex networking
options (e.g., Profibus-DP and Ethernet) may have special configuration
requirements that involve ancillary components such as Gateways. Figure 2-1
shows the four basic connection options available for the SBC-2000. These
encompass both standard serial connections as well as advanced networking
options.
• Direct Connection • Direct Multi-drop Connection

• Internal Gateway Connection • External Gateway Connection
Connecting the SBC-2000 2-1

Gateway Connections
In addition to a direct or multi-drop connection to the host, the SBC-2000 can be
used with a selection of “Bridge” type devices. Some of these devices are Acrison
products while others are available from third party manufacturers. These bridges
are connected between a communication network and the SBC-2000 to perform
one or more of the following functions:
1. Connection to a proprietary network for which Acrison does not offer a separate
communication module (e.g., a BM85000 Bridge Mux for connection to a
Modbus Plus network).
2. Connection of multiple Acrison controllers to a single user communication port
where the protocol does not include provisions for multi-drop addressing (e.g.,
Acrison Gateway in conjunction with a single Allen Bradley 1770 KF2 module
to allow communication with up to 32 Acrison controllers).
3. A lower cost alternative for equipping each Acrison controller with a separate
communication module. An example is the use of Acrison's Network Gateway
to connect multiple controllers to a Profibus-DP network.
Acrison presently manufactures three gateway devices for use with the SBC-
2000: the Acrison Gateway (for expanding addressability to 32 controllers), the
Network Gateway (Profibus-DP) and the Ethernet Gateway (third party gateway).
Speed Considerations and Optimization

When configuring an SBC-2000 with a network or serial communications network,
one of the most important concerns is the frequency of screen updates. That is,
how fresh is the data that is being presented to the user.
Many factors can affect data freshness. A few of the most significant are:
• Number of devices sharing a gateway
• Baud rates
• Traffic volume
• Response time or loop time of the host device
• Response time of controller
• Data conversion requirements
• Data scaling requirements
Some of these are discussed in more detail below.
Sharing a Gateway
Acrison Gateways provide a very economical means for host devices to access
multiple controllers by means of multi-drop connections. A single gateway, for
example, can access as many as 32 SBC-2000 Controllers. Unfortunately, this
economy must be weighed against the time penalty, which a Gateway imposes
due to the one-at-a-time nature of the communications through it. Each
communication must wait until the previous communication has been completed.
When a significant number of controllers is involved, the overall delay may be
unacceptable.
One method for minimizing gateway delays is to assign only a limited number of
controls to any single gateway, and to use more than one. This still provides
attractive economies compared to a network designed to use a single gateway
per controller, but will decrease the delay in getting data to the screen.
2-2 SBC-2000
Figure 2-1 Controller Connections
Host PC, PLC

Direct Connection
or DCS
A direct connection between individual SBC-2000 control
Single Board Controller modules and a host. Each control module is communicating
RS-422 with the "host" via one of the two independent serial channels.
Requires a direct connection by the user using RS-422/485.
Single board controllers can be plate mounted in an enclosure,
shipped loose for mounting by the user, or included as part of a
local enclosure package (LCS).
LCS-Enclosure Package
Host PC, PLC
or DCS Multi-Drop Connection
RS-422
Multiple SBC-2000 Controller boards are wired by the user
acrison
in a standard multi-drop configuration using RS-422/485.
Each controller is communicating with the "host" via one of
LCS-Enclosure Package the two independent serial channels. Each controller board
is assigned an address. Can be provided in an enclosure
package (LCS) or shipped loose for customer mounting.
acrison
SBC-2000
Multi-Drop (Internal)
Host PC, PLC
or DCS
Multi-Feeder Rack
(with integrated
Connection
Converter Module)
Multiple SBC-2000 Controller boards are mounted in a
RS-232 SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
multi-feeder rack and wired (by the user) into a multi-drop
(RS-422) configuration. User connects host to rack using
ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON
optional Converter Module (RS-232).
SBC-2000
Host PC, PLC
Network Gateway Connection
Multi-Feeder Rack
(with Integrated Network or DCS
Gateway) Multiple controller boards are wired (by the user) in a
multi-drop configuration (RS-422), and mounted in a multi-
feeder rack. Multi-Drop is configured with the integral
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
GATEWAY
MODULE Protocol Specific Network Gateway Module. The user provides connection
from Network Gateway Module to host (e.g., DB-9 or RJ-45).
All controllers share a single network address. Configuration
of Gateway Module is required.
ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON
Host PC, PLC

SBC-2000
Multi-Feeder Rack
or DCS External Gateway Connection
Protocol Specific
Multiple controller boards are wired (by the user) in a
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
RS-422 multi-drop configuration (RS-422), and mounted in a multi-
feeder rack. Rack is connected to External Network Gateway.
ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON
Network Gateway acts as a "protocol converter." All controllers
share a single network address. User connects host to External
Gateway.
External
Network Gateway

Baud Rates
Serial communication response will usually be affected by the baud rate chosen
for communicating. The faster the baud rate, the quicker the communication.
However, the fact that a communication occurs quickly does not necessarily mean
that the data is being updated at that rate. For example, Acrison controllers
operate on a fixed ¼ second time base. All computations and motor speed
updates occur once every ¼ second. If an Ethernet network were to request a
time varying parameter, such as hopper level, at a rate of 50 communications per
second, the hopper level value being returned by the controller will only change
twice during that period. Therefore, only two communications out of fifty will show
changed data from the previous one. In a case like this, there is no appreciable
advantage to communications that are more frequent than four times per second.
In fact, there is a disadvantage in that the amount of traffic on the network is
higher than it needs to be, which can adversely affect communications with other
devices on the same network.
Response Time of a Host or Central Controller

No device can respond to a communication instantly. At a minimum, there is
typically a requirement to determine the addressee of the communication and the
identity of the data, whether incoming or outgoing. In many cases, the format of
the data must be changed from the format native to the device, to a format
appropriate to the communication protocol, or vice versa. In some cases, data
must be scaled according to some pre-established criteria before being processed
for display or use. Each of these actions requires a finite period of time to
complete, and can vary dramatically from one device to another.
Each of the actions described above will result in a time delay of some duration
between the arrival of a communication, and the action expected. This latency
period is an important consideration in evaluating or selecting network
communications.
Host devices can exhibit very large "apparent" latencies, especially when using
PLCs. In PLCs, this can happen when loop times are long and the loop contains a
communication that is executed once per loop. New data would only be
processed to a display once per loop, regardless of how quickly it was obtained
from the controller, making the controller's response time unimportant.
Acrison controllers connected in non-gateway configurations typically exhibit data
latency of 1 to 10 milliseconds depending on the particular controller,
communication module in use and the protocol. Modules such as the MD-II 2000
Data Link Module or the SBC-2000 running Modbus protocol will average 1-2
milliseconds before a response is begun following receipt of a communication
requesting data.
Data Scaling or Conversion

One of the most important speed factors to consider is actually the protocol being
used. Protocols such as Modbus RTU, which are limited to 16 bit values
(maximum value=65,636), present the user with the need to provide value scaling
if numbers in excess of 65,536, or numbers having a decimal component, are
used. Scaling usually means multiplying or dividing the received or transmitted
values by a known constant. This can be a very time consuming process in two
ways. First, it may be necessary to transmit a scale value (divider or multiplier)
before each communication, doubling the time required to communicate a value.
Second, the device doing the scaling will require time to perform the scaling
operation before the data can be processed. Protocols which support floating
point numbers do not require scaling of values and do not exact a time penalty on
communications. Among these protocols are Modbus 984 and Allen Bradley DF-1
(DH or DHP).
2-4 SBC-2000
Acrison highly recommends the use of protocols supporting floating point values
wherever possible because values in Acrison controllers can range from 0.001 to
eight significant digits.
In a similar way, if data conversion is required from one format to another, extra
time will be required. The most desirable communication method uses data
formats native to both ends of the communication so that data conversion isn't
needed.
Optimizing Serial Communications—Summary

The rate at which new data from a feeder controller appears on a PC screen
running a data acquisition software package is dependent on many factors.
At the host:
1. The screen refresh rate (PC), which is often user configurable
2. The poll rate (also user configurable)
3. Data conversion rate (based on speed of the host)
4. Data base transfers (If OPC server will be used as an intermediate data base
with its own scan rate)
Communication between the PC and the Interface/conversion box:

1. Baud rate
2. Protocol efficiency—length of headers, multi parameter reads etc
3. Data volume
At the interface/conversion box(es):

1. Data conversion—protocol dependent, some algorithms are quite elaborate
2. Data scaling—protocol dependent.
3. Data volume—amount of data per feeder and number of feeders per system
At the motor controller:

1. Turn around time (stop and fetch)
2. Update time—how often data is updated in the controller.
Although all of the above factors affect data latency, some are fixed while others
are defined by the system. In addition, some are controlled at the host PC/PLC
(e.g., refresh time). Those most often defined by the system designer are: (1)
protocol selection (often not an option due to existing hardware), (2) amount of
data required (data that will require constant updates), and (3) number of
Interface/conversion boxes (cost/performance consideration). In most cases, the
communication link requires that the data requested by the PC be handled
sequentially. However, with network protocols like Ethernet, multiple requests can
be run in parallel, dividing total response time by the number of interface/
conversion boxes.
Standard Physical Connections

Four devices are typically connected to an SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller for
normal gravimetric operation: a power supply, a scale, a motor controller and a
serial connection to a host or central controller (device for entering set points). All

of these components are interconnected with the controller to form the core of a
basic single feeder. Figure 2-2 illustrates the basic layout and connections for a
single feeder connected to an SBC-2000. The SBC-2000 can be supplied in a
variety of ways (as a single control board module or as multiple single modules
mounted in a rack). Although the illustration is simplified, the connections
explained in the sections below are the sole requirements for a single feeder
installation.
Power Supply Connection

As shown in Figure 2-3, each SBC Module requires an external logic +5VDC
power supply capable of providing 260mA, and a separate, isolated +5VDC that
can provide140mA.
On a system level, a separate AC supply is required for the scale's Ratiometric
Computational Module power supply on the feeder, and the external motor
controller (refer to the wiring diagrams in the engineering packet supplied with the
equipment).
Scale Connections
The scale is an integral part of the weigh feeder. The displacement sensor (Digital
Weight Resolver and Computational Module) requires an electrically isolated 2-
wire serial communication, using the RS-422 hardware protocol.
This connection automatically transmits a 20 binary bit value to the controller
approximately 16 times per second. A dedicated serial port SC (Figure 2-3) is
provided in the SBC-2000 Control Module for this signal.
Figure 2-2 Single Feeder Connection Illustration
("Weight-Loss-Differential" Feeder
for Dry Solids shown) Refill Supply
Automatic
Refill Valve
Flexible Sleeve
Variable speed
Motor
Weigh
Feeder
Feeding Mechanism
Weighed Output
Weigh Scale
Ratiometric TM
Digital Weight
Resolver
Microprocessor 20 mA current loop

Controlled
SRC-DC Drive
SBC-2000 Feeder Controller
MAN AUTO
Input
and
Output Power to
Signals controller
Power to from
SCR-DC Drive Host
2-6 SBC-2000
Figure 2-3 Wiring Diagram—SBC-2000 Single Board Pin-out
SBC
MODULE
S2R Serial Channel 2 (Receive)
2 + 5V DO2- 2 S2T Serial Channel 2 (Transmit)
LOGIC
4 - DO2+ 4 S1R Serial Channel 1 (Receive)
6 GND DO1- 6 S1T Serial Channel 1 (Transmit)
8 -S2R DO1+ 8
DO2 Digital Output 2
+S2R
DO1 Digital Output 1
10 10
DI2 Digital Input 2
12 -S2T DI2 12
DI1 Digital Input 1
14 +S2T 14
MCR Motor Control Channel (Receive)
16 GND DI1 16
MCT Motor Control Channel (Transmit)
18 -S1R GND 18
SC Scale Channel
20 +S1R MCR- 20
GND Ground
22 -S1T MCR+ 22
24 +S1T MCT- 24
22 MCT+ 26
24 SC- 28
30 -
5V
SC+ 30
IS
32 + GND 32
Motor Controller Connections

In most applications, a motor controller is used in conjunction with an SBC-2000
Weigh Feeder Controller. Nevertheless, the specifics of any application's interface
will depend upon both the type and size motor controller being used. Usually, the
motor controller resides in a separate enclosure—or is mounted with the SBC-
2000 within a common enclosure—and can be mounted remotely from the SBC-
2000 Controller chassis.
The SBC-2000 supports both SCR/DC and VF/AC drives. Either can be interfaced
via analogs or serially. Acrison’s Model 060 uses a proprietary Acrison protocol for
serial communication. In the case of VF/AC drives Acrison supports a number of
industry-standard drives using RS-422 Modbus interfacing at 19,200 baud.
If analogs are the preferred method of interfacing, Acrison provides an analog
converter called the SAS-22. The SAS-22 Module is an external device that
communicates on the motor serial channel, but generates an analog output. In
operation, the SAS-22 Converter Module converts the serial Motor Speed Set
Point generated by the weigh feeder controller into an analog 0-10 VDC set point
for motor speed. In this way, the Model SAS-22 acts as a transparent interface
that adapts Acrison’s standard motor controller serial transmission protocol to an
analog signal for use with other devices.

Figure 2-4 Wiring Diagram—Multi-Drop Communications Configurations
9 PIN 'D'
RXD
3
RS-232 TXD
HOST
2
SGND UP TO
5
32
TOTAL
7 9 8 10 TB2 6 5 4 2 3
SBC #1 SBC #2 SBC #3
MODULE MODULE MODULE
ACRISON
TB1 RS-232 TO RS-422
115VAC 1 H
CONVERTER
SUPPLY 2 L
3
8 -S2R 8 -S2R 8 -S2R
+S2R 10 +S2R 10 +S2R

10
12 -S2T 12 -S2T 12 -S2T
+S2T 14 +S2T 14 +S2T

14
30 GND 30 GND 30 GND
RXD -
7
RXD +
UP TO
2
RS-422 8 TXD - 32
HOST 4
TXD +
TOTAL
3
RS-485
9-PIN 'D' SBC #1 SBC #2 SBC #3
MODULE MODULE MODULE
8 -S2R 8 -S2R 8 -S2R
+S2R 10 +S2R 10 +S2R

10
12 -S2T 12 -S2T 12 -S2T
+S2T 14 +S2T 14 +S2T

14
GND 30 GND
30 30 GND
Host Connections
The SBC-2000 is equipped with two user serial communications channels (Serial
Channel 1 and Serial Channel 2). These channels (refer to Figure 2-5) can be
connected to any type of device that communicates using standard protocols such
as Modbus, or Allen Bradley PLC-5 (DF-1). The channels are normally used in
serial communication between an SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller and a PLC
(programmable logic controller) or host computer.
Connections to the individual controllers are made using the RS-422/485
hardware protocol in a multi-drop configuration (refer to Figure 2-4). This permits
the controllers to be up to 4,000 feet away from the host device, and requires the
use of only 2 twisted-shielded wire pairs. The use of the RS-485 hardware
protocol allows up to 32 SBC-2000 Controllers to be connected on a single
channel. Please note that rack mounted versions may require wiring of the control
and/or option modules by the user (refer to Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6).
Note: When the controllers are placed in a multi-drop configuration, the last
controller in-line (physically) should have the Termination Resistor DIP-switches
set to “ON.” In addition, converters must be used when integrating the controllers
with systems using the RS-232 protocol.
2-8 SBC-2000
+
5V
-
LOGIC
+
5V
-
IS
Figure 2-5
+T
-T
SERIAL
+R TO ADDITIONAL
#1
DAISY CHAINNED
-R
SBC CONTROL
MODULES
+T
-T
SERIAL
+R #2
-R
PS1 5V PS2 5V
LOGIC SUPPLY ISO SUPPLY SBC-2000 #1 SBC-2000 #2
(NOTE 8) (NOTE 8) CONTROL MODULE CONTROL MODULE
+ 4 + 4 2 + 5V DO2- 2 2 + 5V DO2- 2
LOGIC TO RELAY LOGIC TO RELAY
6 + 6 + 4 - DO2+ 4 4 - DO2+ 4
MODULE RACK MODULE RACK
8 8 6 G DO1- 6 OPTION 6 G DO1- 6 OPTION
(NOTE 5) (NOTE 5)
10 10 8 -S2R DO1+ 8 8 -S2R DO1+ 8
- 12 - 12 10 +S2R 10 10 +S2R 10
DIGITAL INPUTS DIGITAL INPUTS
14 - 14 - 12 -S2T DI2 12 OPTIONAL (NOTE 7) 12 -S2T DI2 12 OPTIONAL (NOTE 7)
- -
14 +S2T 14 5V 14 +S2T 14 5V
+ IS + IS
16 G DI1 16 16 G DI1 16
18 -S1R G 18 18 -S1R G 18
20 +S1R MCR- 20 20 +S1R MCR- 20

MCR+ TO 060 OR MCR+ TO 060 OR
22 -S1T 22 22 -S1T 22
SAS-22 SAS-22
24 +S1T MCT- 24 MODULE 24 +S1T MCT- 24 MODULE
(NOTE 5) (NOTE 5)
MCT+ 26 MCT+ 26
L 28 L 28 SC- 28 SC- 28
Wiring Diagram—SBC-2000 Control Module
TO TO
SCALE SCALE
30 N 30 N 30 - 5V SC+ 30 30 - 5V SC+ 30
(NOTE 5) (NOTE 5)
IS IS
G 32 G 32 32 + G 32 32 + G 32
AC L
SUPPLY TYPICAL FOR UP TO 32
G SBC-2000 CONTROL MODULES
+T -T +R -R +T -T +R -R
NOTES:
1. ALL WIRING IS 22AWG, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
SERIAL PORT SERIAL PORT 2. ALL DAISY CHAINED WIRING IS DONE BY INSERTING TWO
#1 #2 WIRES IN EACH CONNECTOR CRIMP CONTACT.
(NOTES 3,4,5) (NOTES 3,4,5) 3. SERIAL PORTS ARE RS-422 HARDWARE PROTOCOL.
SOFTWARE PROTOCOLS INSTALLED IN EACH CONTROL MODULE
ARE DEPENDENT ON THE CUSTOMERS HOST DEVICE OR THE
OPTION MODULE THEY ARE COMMUNICATING WITH.
4. SERIAL PORT WIRES SHOWN WITH +/-T GO TO THE +/-R
TERMINALS ON THE HOST DEVICE OR OPTION MODULE.
5. FOR SBC-2000 OPTION MODULE WIRING DIAGRAM SEE 403-4-8880.
6. SEE SBC-2000 MANUAL FOR CONTROL MODULE SERIAL PORT
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS.
7. IF DIGITAL INPUTS ARE BEING UTILIZED, DRY, POTENTIAL-FREE
CONTACTS, WILL BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS. SEE MANUAL FOR
PARAMETER SETINGS.
8. WHEN THE REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY OPTION IS BEING USED, THE
Connecting the SBC-2000

"5V LOGIC" AND "5V ISO" WILL BE PROVIDED AS SHOWN ON
THE OPTION MODULE WIRING DIAGRAM.
2-9
2-10
5V 5V
LOGIC IS
Figure 2-6
-
-
- + - +
PS1 5V PS2 5V PS3 5V PS4 5V SBC-2000 SBC-2000 SBC-2000 SBS-2000
SBC-2000
REDUNDANT REDUNDANT REDUNDANT REDUNDANT PROTOCOL CONVERTER INFRARED BLUETOOTH NETWORK
LOGIC SUPPLY LOGIC SUPPLY ISO SUPPLY ISO SUPPLY OPTION MODULE OPTION MODULE OPTION MODULE OPTION MODULE
+ + + + +
4 4 4 4 TO 5V LOGIC 2 + 5V
- LOGIC
6 + 6 + 6 + (NOTE 3) - -
6 + 4
8 1D 8 2D 8 3D 8 4D KEY G G
6 6
-R KEY -R KEY -R KEY
10 10 10 10 TO SBC CONTROL 8 -T 8 -T 8 -T
TO SBC CONTROL TO SBC CONTROL
- - MODULES SERIAL +R TO SBC CONTROL +R +R +R
- 12 12 - 12 12 10 +T 10 +T MODULES SERIAL 10 +T MODULES SERIAL 10 +T
PORT #1 OR #2 MODULES SERIAL PORT #1 OR #2 PORT #1 OR #2
(NOTE 3) -T -T -T
14 - 14 - 14 - 14 - 12 -R PORT #1 OR #2 (NOTE 3) 12 -R (NOTE 3) 12 -R
+T (NOTE 3) +T +T +T
N/C 16 16 N/C 16 16 14 +R 14 +R 14 +R 14 +R
N/C N/C
L 28 L 28 L 28 L 28
30 N 30 N 30 N 30 N - - - -
TO 5V ISO 30 - 5V TO 5V ISO 30 - 5V TO 5V ISO 30 - 5V TO 5VDC ISO 30 - 5V
(NOTE 3) + IS (NOTE 3) + IS (NOTE 3) + IS (NOTE 3) + IS
G 32 G 32 G 32 G 32 - 32 + - 32 + - 32 + - 32 +
L
AC
SUPPLY G
Wiring Diagram—SBC-2000 Option Module
REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY

OPTION CONNECTIONS
(NOTE 6)
RELAY MODULE
RACK
SBC
CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL POWER
+
060 MOTOR CONTROL SBC 1
TO 5V
SERIAL MODULE CONTROL MODULE -
ISO - 2
18
MCR- 20 4 DO2- 2 6 4
NOTE 5
MCR+ 22 3 DO2+ 5 5
4
MCT- 24 2 DO1- 6 4 2
NOTE 5
MCT+ 26 1 DO1+ 8 3 3
TYPICAL SBC TO 060 TYPICAL SBC TO RELAY MODULE

MOTOR CONTROL CONNECTIONS RACK CONNECTIONS
(NOTE 4) (NOTE 4)
NOTES:
SBC 1. ALL WIRING IS 22AWG, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. SHIELDED WIRIING
CONTROL MODULE
SAS-22 ANALOG IS 100% SHIELDED ALPHA OR EQUIVALENT.
CONVERTER MODULE 2. ALL DAISY CHAINED WIRING IS DONE BY INSERTING TWO
SBC
18 WIRES IN EACH CONNECTOR CRIMP CONTACT.
CONTROL MODULE
SCALE 3. FOR SBC-2000 CONTROL MODULE AND POWER SUPPLY WIRING DIAGRAM
MCR- 20 6 COMPUTATIONAL MODULE SEE 403-4-8879.
MCR+ 22 5 G 18 4. TYPICAL WIRING CONNECTIONS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. THEY
SHOW THE ULTIMATE CONNECTION POINTS BETWEEN DEVICES.
MCT- 24 4 SC- 28 1
SCALE IN THERE MAY BE ADDTIONAL TERMINAL BLOCK POINTS IN BETWEEN.
MCT+ 26 3 SC+ 30 2 5. DIGITAL OUTPUTS ARE USER PROGRAMMABLE, SOLID STATE
RATED 3.5A @ 280VAC. SEE SBC-2000 MANUAL FOR PARAMETER
SETTINGS.
TYPICAL SBC TO SAS-22 TYPICAL SBC TO SCALE
CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS
6. WHEN REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY OPTION IS BEING USED, THE
(NOTE 4) (NOTE 4) "5V LOGIC" AND "5V ISO" REQUIREMENTS TO ALL OF THE MODULES WILL
COME FROM PS1 AND PS3, AS SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING.
Types of Signals
All communication between the host and the SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller
is accomplished using the two serial channels provided. However, the SBC-2000
is also equipped with digital inputs and outputs that can be programmed to
perform a variety of control functions and status indications. The following
Sections will provide a general explanation of the types of signals the SBC-2000
will accept.
Digital Inputs
The SBC-2000 is standard with two optically isolated digital inputs (four for SBC-
2000 CM or DSP Controllers) that are operated from an external dry contact
closure. The two digital inputs are programmable, and can be assigned to
different functions using calibration entries within the controller. Further, digital
inputs are usually connected to switches, relays or other devices, and used to
initiate a refill or as a remote run contact. A list of available digital input selections
is provided in Appendix A on page A-19. Selections are saved in non-volatile
memory.
Note: Digital inputs are “self powered” using the isolated +5VDC supply, and
should be actuated only by dry contact closures.
For Example The permissive run function will cause the SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller to
be permitted to run if the input contact is closed, or upon receipt of a run
command. If the contact is open when a run command is received by the
controller, the error message "PERMISSIVE RUN IS OPEN" will be generated,
and the controller will not run. If the contact is opened at any time whenever the
controller is operating, the controller will stop, and the same message shown
above will appear. Closing the contact will not automatically restart the
controller—a new run command must be sent.
Digital Outputs
The SBC-2000 Controller is designed with two open-collector digital outputs that
are rated for 20VDC@0.002A maximum. SBC-2000 CM and DSP Controllers
have four digital outputs rated to 30VDC@0.125A. Status conditions such as
“Feeder Running,” “Refilling in Progress,” or alarms are communicated to external
equipment by providing dual switched outputs that are dedicated to the condition
they represent. The outputs are programmable and can be assigned to many
different conditions by calibration entries within the SBC-2000. Once assigned,
the selection is maintained in non-volatile memory and will not be lost in case of a
power failure. A list of available digital outputs is provided in Appendix A on page
A-18.
Note: Because the digital outputs are low power, they cannot be used to operate
relays directly.

Figure 2-7 Illustration—SBC-2000 Module (front view)
SBC-2000
CONTROL
MODULE
LED D2
LED D1
ACRISON
Note: Because the SBC-2000 is designed primarily for serial communications,

Acrison strongly recommends that any digital inputs and outputs be provided by
the host device. Usage of the SBC-2000 digital inputs will entail the use of
additional equipment and higher cost.
Device Address, Baud Rate and Termination Resistors

Since multi-drop places all of the
Baud
Rate } OFF=LOW
ON=HIGH } Actual Baud Rates
vary by protocol
SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controllers
Resistor
Settings
in a parallel-wired configuration, a
means is required to differentiate one
Binary Values 1 2 4 8 16
}
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
controller from another in the
network. The device address and
baud rate for each serial channel is
OFF set via DIP-Switches SW2 (Serial
Switch is set for Station #5 Channel 1) and SW1 (Serial Channel
(SW2=Serial Channel 1) 2) located on the module. Switch
positions 1-5 are used to set the
device address from 0-31, and
Baud
Rate } OFF=LOW
ON=HIGH } Actual Baud Rates
vary by protocol position 6 is used to select the
Resistor appropriate baud rate (depending on
Binary Values 1 2 4 8 16
Settings
protocol).
}
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Swithes 7 & 8 Set to "ON" Switch positions 7 & 8 are the
position if controller is physically
"last" in Multi-drop configuration. Termination resistor settings and
Otherwise, they should be set to
"OFF".
should be placed in the “ON” Position
OFF
if the controller board is placed
Switch is set for Station #15 physically “last” in the multi-drop
(SW1=Serial Channel 2) configuration.
2-12 SBC-2000
Serial Signals
While the hardware protocol to the serial channels is standard IEEE RS-485/RS-
422, there are many different software protocols in use throughout industry. This
means that proper connection will require both the host and controller to use the
same protocol.
For this reason, Acrison offers many different communications protocols for the
SBC-2000. In order for the user to properly integrate the controller to a PLC, DCS
or “host” PC, the protocol must be one of the following:
• An industry standard software protocol (i.e., Modbus, Siemens 3964R, etc.).

• Software protocol written by the user to match others that are available from
Acrison (e.g., ASCII DB).
All operating values, set points and commands are available in all protocols.
There is no protocol, which is more or less capable than any other.
Supported Portocols
Table 2-1 is a partial list of the standard industry protocols that can be used with
the SBC-2000:(NOTE: SBC-2000 CM and DSP Controller’s protocols may differ.)
Table 2-1 Protocols available from Acrison.
Modbus RTU Modbus ASCII Modbus RTU 32

Modbus 984 Honeywell APM/SI (C) Honeywell PLCG/DH (C)
Allen Bradley DA Allen Bradley 1771-DB Allen Bradley PLC-5 (DF-1)
Fisher EIC (C) ASCII Siemens 9634R
Profibus-DP Modbus TCP
Note: Each of the protocols supported by Acrison is capable of accessing all

calibration parameters, set points, commands and status information within the
controller. However, limitations on access may be imposed by the specific
implementation of host equipment manufacturers, or by suppliers of third party
software.
LED Indicators
The SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller is equipped with two LEDs that indicate
the status of communication for each of the controller’s serial communications
channels. LED D2 shows the status for Serial 1, and LED D1 shows the status for
Serial 2. The LEDs each flash green to show that communication is taking place
on the appropriate channel (refer to Figure 2-7).

2-14 SBC-2000
CHAPTER
3
COMMUNICATING
CHAPTER3
The previous chapter described all the different hardware connections that must
be made in order to configure the SBC-2000 into the user's network or serial
communications network. However, once all the proper connections are made,
and communication is physically possible, the user's focus must shift to the
software aspect of implementation. Determining the exact steps to take for
establishing communication between a host and the SBC-2000 will require an
understanding on the part of the user in several areas:
• The exact requirements and limitations of the software protocol being used.
• The different types of data that are transmitted or received between the feeder
controller and the host.
• The control methodology available for controlling a system of feeders
• The general principles needed to properly develop the software interface.
This chapter describes details regarding communication between the SBC-2000

and a host or central controller. Prior familiarity with serial communication theory
and standards is assumed.
Note: This information is intended for use as a basic guide to aid in the initial
setup of Acrison's SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller. The information does not
include any in-depth descriptions regarding programming of any specific third-
party software.
Serial Protocols
The SBC-2000 can be equipped for use with different communications protocols
interfacing with a PLC, PC, DCS or other external equipment. The mode of
transmission is usually half-duplex without echo for most protocols, and the serial
transmission is asynchronous. The type of transmission for all protocols is block
(single frame) with one stop bit.
Protocol Summaries
Each of the protocols described in the following sections is capable of accessing
all calibration parameters, set points, commands and status information within the
controller, for both reading and writing. However, limitations on access may be
imposed by the specific implementation of host equipment manufacturers, or by
Communicating 3-1
suppliers of third party software. For more information, consult the actual vendor
standards for each protocol.
DB Protocol
Acrison's DB Protocol is a general-purpose protocol developed for general
communication with Allen-Bradley's 1771-DB BASIC Module, personal computer
based software and other ASCII communications. It includes error checking, and
supports the transmission of the full range of number values and text data without
the need for scaling. Available versions include: 57,600 E,7,1 and 57,600 N,8,1.
Hardware Parameters
Message Size Physical Link Bits/ byte Format Error Detection
Interface per Query
Variable (27 Bytes Multi-Drop (32 RS-232, 422/ Block Check (2's
7 ASCII 1
Max) Units Max) 485 compl.)
Additional Scaling Modbus Exception

Parity Data Precision ASCII Text
Equipment Factors Functions Responses
3 decimal place, F.
Even point None N/A N/A N/A Yes
Modbus RTU Protocol

Acrison's Modbus RTU Protocol is one of the most popular, supporting most
applications requiring standard Modbus Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) operation
with a 16 bit data word.
Hardware Parameters
Interface per Query
Variable (68 Bytes Multi-Drop (32 RS-232, 422/
8 Binary 32 Cyclic Redundancy
Max) Units Max) 485

16-bit with scaling
Odd factors None Yes 1, 3, 5, 6 1, 2, 3 No
Siemens 3964R Protocol

Acrison's 3964R Protocol was designed for use with systems that use the
Siemens 3964R Protocol for programmable logic controllers.
Hardware Parameters
Interface per Query
Block check
Variable (68 Bytes Multi-Drop (32 RS-232, 422/ 8 Binary 32 Max. character (2's
Max) Units Max) 485
compl.)

16-bit with scaling
Even factors None Yes N/A N/A N/A
3-2 SBC-2000
Fisher EIC Protocol
This Modbus RTU variant was designed for use with Fisher's External Interface
Card (E.I.C.) Module (in standard point-to-point, or in optional multi-drop
configurations) and certified by Fisher Controls in 1991. If all parameters
supported by the protocol are required, then a maximum of six controllers may
communicate with each Fisher E.I.C. Module
.
Hardware Parameters
Interface per Query
Variable (68 Bytes Multi-Drop (32 RS-232, 422/ 8 Binary 32 Cyclic Redundancy
Max) Units Max) 485

Odd 32-bit None No 3, 16 1, 2, 3 No
Modbus RTU/32 Protocol

An Acrison variation of the standard RTU Protocol, the Modbus RTU/32 Protocol
uses a 32-bit data word, instead of a 16-bit word. This permits data values from 0
to 2,147,483,648. In this protocol, all values transmitted or received are 1,000
times their actual value, in order to eliminate decimal places and scaling.
Hardware Parameters
Interface per Query
Variable (68 Bytes Multi-Drop (32 RS-232, 422/ 8 Binary 32 Max. Cyclic Redundancy
Max) Units Max) 485

Odd 16-bit with scaling None No 1, 3, 5, 16 1, 2, 3 No

factors
Modbus PLCG/DHP Protocol

The PLCG/DHP version of Modbus RTU was developed specifically for use with
the Honeywell TDC-3000. It was subsequently certified by Honeywell in 1991
through Honeywell's Multi-Vendor Interface Program.
Hardware Parameters
Interface per Query
8 Binary 32 Cyclic Redundancy
Max) Units Max) 485

16-bit with scaling
Odd factors None Yes 1, 3, 5, 6, 8 1, 2, 3 No
Communicating 3-3
Allen-Bradley DH/DHP Protocol
Acrison's Allen-Bradley Data Highway/Data Highway Plus (DH/DHP) protocol (for
the PLC-5) permits the SBC-2000 to communicate on an Allen-Bradley Data
Highway or Data Highway Plus via an Allen-Bradley 1770-KF2 Module.
Only standard PLC-5 Message Instructions are required in the PLC-5 ladder logic,
thereby providing standard data formats, and rapid communications.
Hardware Parameters
Interface per Query
Variable (51 Bytes Multi-Drop to KF2 8 READ Max. Block check

RS-232 Binary 16 character (2's
Max) (32 Units Max) 5 WRITE Max. compl.)

Network
Even IEEE Floating Gateway and A- N/A N/A N/A N/A
Point
B 1770-KF@
Description CMD Code FNC Code (Hex)

Read-Modify-Write 0F 26
Word-Range-Write 0F 00
Word-Range-Read 0F 01
Type-Write 0F 67
Type-Read 0F 68
Remote STS Error Codes - 10, F0
EXT STS Codes - 6, A, 11
Note: Requires a Network Gateway module to connect controllers to KF2 unit.
MB 984 Protocol
This Modbus RTU variant was designed for use with the Modicon 984 Family of
Programmable Logic Controllers or any other Modicon or host device capable of
operating on Modicon's Modbus Plus network.
Hardware Parameters
Interface per Query
Variable (68 Bytes Multi-Drop TO BM RS-232, 422/
Max) 85 (32 Units Max) 485 8 Binary 32 Cyclic Redundancy

BM85 Bridge
Odd IEEE Floating Multiplexer for No 1, 3, 5, 8, 16 1, 2, 3 Yes
Point
Modbus Plus
3-4 SBC-2000
DF1 (Full Duplex) Protocol
Acrison's DF1 Full Duplex protocol permits the SBC-2000 to communicate on an
Ethernet/IP network via an Allen-Bradley 1761 NET-ENI Module. Only standard
PLC-5 Message Instructions are required, thereby providing standard data
formats, and rapid communications.
Hardware Parameters
Interface per Query
Variable (51 Bytes Ethernet to NET- RS-232 8 Binary 16 Cyclic Redundancy
Max) ENI

IEEE Floating A-B 1761 NET-
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Point ENI
Description CMD Code FNC Code (Hex)

Read-Modify-Write 0F 26
Word-Range-Write 0F 00
Word-Range-Read 0F 01
Type-Write 0F 67
Type-Read 0F 68
Remote STS Error Codes - 10, F0
EXT STS Codes - 6, A, 11
Note: Requires a Network Gateway module to connect controllers to NET-ENI.
Modbus APMSI Protocol

The Advanced Process Manager Serial Interface version of Modbus was
developed specifically for use with the Honeywell TDC-3000. It was subsequently
certified by Honeywell in 1992 through Honeywell's Multi-Vendor Interface
Program.
Hardware Parameters
Interface per Query
Max) Units Max) 485 8 Binary 32 Max. Cyclic Redundancy

Odd IEEE Floating APMSI No 1, 3, 5, 8, 16 1, 2, 3 Yes

Point
Communicating 3-5
Interacting with the Controller
From the user’s standpoint, the most important aspects of interfacing with the
SBC-2000 can be summarized by discussing two important topics:
1. How the user will interface with the controller.
2. What kind of data must be entered into the controller by the user.
User Interfaces
Ordinarily, users can interface with the SBC-2000 in one of two ways, (1) using
some type of local keyboard/display, or (2) remotely using a central controller or
“host” computer. Both these methods offer advantages and disadvantages.
However, some important differences should be examined when trying to
understand each type of interface.
• Local Keyboard Display Unit (optional): This type of interface is the simplest
to understand because it speaks directly with the controller CPU. Although the
user is limited to the capabilities supplied, the entire interface is pre-defined.
Items such as the range of values for data, units of measurement for each
entry, and password protection are already programmed into the unit. There is
no setup involved other than entering the correct values. Acrison offers various
KDU models including: color touchscreens, graphic keyboards and handheld
interfaces (wireless). [See Chapter 6]
• Central controller/host computer (standard): This type of interface is more
involved. The user is not limited to whatever functionality is supplied by the
local interface. However, implementation is more difficult, and requires more
knowledge on the part of the user. Everything about the controller must be
defined at the host. This includes items like the range of values for data, units
of measurement for each entry, and password protection. In addition, users
must be familiar with the host computer HMI software or PLC programming
software that will allow them to interact with the weigh feeder.
Inputting Data
Regardless of whether it is accomplished via local user keyboard or a central
controller, a user must input three types of data when interfacing with the Acrison
weigh feeders:
1. Set points
2. Commands
3. Calibration Data parameter values
Set points
Set points are the user-designated parameters that delineate how the weigh
feeder system will perform, and what the specific output must be for all its
functions. Set points include items like Feed Rate, Motor Speed, Dribble Speed
and Number of Batches. Although many set points have default values, most must
be entered by the user.
Commands
Commands are user inputs that cause the weigh feeder to perform a specific
action. These commands allow the user to change operating and/or control
modes, initiate special sequences, and abort batching operations. A partial list of
commands includes:
• “RUN/STOP Feeder”
3-6 SBC-2000
• “Start a Refill”
• “Stop a Refill”
• Control mode selection (Internal Volumetric, Internal Gravimetric, External
gravimetric and External Volumetric)
Calibration Data (Operational Data Entries)

The controller’s program incorporates data tables that contain the values needed
to perform its control algorithms. Calibration Data parameter entries are nothing
more than the individual values that make up these data tables. The Calibration
Data parameters are setup with parameter names, and require values that must
be entered in order to initiate the desired function. Calibration Data parameter
entries include:
• Entries that tailor batching operations—Batch-Lok Set Point, Batch Timer,
Batch Delay, Batch Settle Delay, etc.
• Entries that affect weighing functions—Scale Full, Scale Empty, Chamber Size
and Hopper Size.
• Entries that enable advanced features—Automatic Compensation and
Bumpless Transfer.
Control Methodology
Once communication has been established between the SBC-2000 and the host,
an actual method of controlling the feeder will have to be developed. This involves
understanding both the capabilities of the controller and the different functions
that the feeder can perform.
Feeders can be used in many types of applications. Some simply require a single
feeder to independently feed a specified amount of product per hour. Other
applications use more than one feeder which, operating together, produce a
product which is the sum of the individual feeder outputs. Food products and
pharmaceuticals are often created using multiple feeders in a "recipe" where each
ingredient is added in a specific ratio, or percentage of the total.
Multiple feeder applications of this type can present the user with additional
control requirements in comparison to the simple, single feeder application. This
is particularly true in applications where volumetric feeders are mixed with
gravimetric feeders. For the purpose of discussion, the control methods will be
divided into two categories: simple and ratio.
Simple Control Method

The most basic central, or host control scheme for any combination of multiple
feeders is simply to run them simultaneously as independent feeders (refer to
Figure 3-1). If product X is to be made as the sum of the outputs of feeders A, B
and C, simply running feeders A, B and C together, at the appropriate feed rates,
and combining the outputs, will create the desired product.
From a host controller's perspective, the requirement is to determine the Feed
Rate Set Point (or Motor Speed Set Point for volumetric feeders), which is
required for each feeder's controller and send those set points to each controller.
Once this is done, sending a “Start Feeder” command to each will start the
process. Since the host computer is capable of sending the Start Feeder
commands to all of the controllers in a fraction of a second, it will appear as
though all feeders started simultaneously.
If the amount of the final product being made is to be increased or decreased, the
host computer would need to compute new set points for the feeders, and then
send them to each controller. Again, the speed of the serial communication will
allow all of them to appear to change simultaneously.
Communicating 3-7
Figure 3-1 Illustration—Simple Control Method
Host Controller Host polls each feeder in sequence

and provides set points for desired
output to each feeder individually.
FRSP= 5,000 FRSP= 35,000 FRSP= 15,000
SBC-2000 SBC-2000 SBC-2000 SBC-2000

CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE
ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON
FRSP= 5,000 FRSP= 15,000
FRSP= 35,000
A B C
Op. Mode: Continuous Op. Mode: Continuous Op. Mode: Continuous

Cont. Mode: Int. Gravimetric Cont. Mode: Int. Gravimetric Cont. Mode: Int. Gravimetric
Refill Mode: Automatic Refill Mode: Automatic Refill Mode: Manual
Feed Rate SP= 5,000 Lbs/Hr Feed Rate SP= 35,000 Lbs/Hr Feed Rate SP= 15,000 Lbs/Hr
Figure 3-2 Illustration—Ratio Control Method
Host Controller Host sends one Total Throughput SP

value to all the controllers.
Total Throughput SP= 1,000 LBS/Hr
SBC-2000 SBC-2000 SBC-2000 SBC-2000

CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
MODULE MODULE MODULE MODULE
ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON ACRISON
Feed Rate SP 380 Lbs/Hr

A B C
Op. Mode: Continuous Op. Mode: Continuous Op. Mode: Continuous

Cont. Mode: Ext. Gravimetric Cont. Mode: Ext. Gravimetric Cont. Mode: Ext. Fast Start
Ratio ST PT: 38.0 (38%) Ratio ST PT: 60.0 (60%) Ratio ST PT: 2.0 (2%)
Feed Rate SP= 380 Lbs/Hr Feed Rate SP= 600 Lbs/Hr Motor Speed SP= 40%
3-8 SBC-2000
Ratio Control Method
An alternate method eliminates the need for the host controller to compute the
individual feeder's Feed Rate Set Points (refer to Figure 3-2). The computation is
actually performed by the controllers themselves. For gravimetric controllers, this
is accomplished by setting them to External Mode and using the Ratio Set Point
(instead of the Feed Rate Set Point) in conjunction with the Total Throughput Set
Point as follows.
A controller's Ratio Set Point is the percentage of the total amount of product
being made that is contributed by this feeder. This allows the host computer to
specify and send to a controller, just once, the percentage that feeder will
contribute. Then, the Total Throughput Set Point—representing the desired
amount of final product in weight units per hour—is sent to each of the controllers.
Each controller multiplies its Ratio Set Point times the common Total Throughput
Set Point to get the set point to which it will control.
In this control scenario, volumetric feeder controllers are set to External Fast Start
Mode and the Ratio Set Point and Total Throughput set points are used as
described above. The External Fast Start Mode forces the controller to always
compute its set point as a Motor Speed Set Point even though the host computer
will be sending it a gravimetric set point.
For Example If a volumetric feeder is expected to contribute 2% of the total 1,000 pounds of
product being made, it will have its Ratio Set Point set to 2.0 and it will receive the
Total Throughput Set Point of 1,000 pounds per hour. Internally, the controller will
compute that it is being requested to feed 20 pounds per hour, by multiplying the
two together. However, this controller is in permanent Fast Start. This means that
the controller is in Volumetric Mode and therefore, must estimate the proper motor
speed at which to run the feeder based upon its Max Feed Rate value. If its Max
Feed Rate is, for example, 50 pounds per hour, then the controller will compute
that the requested 20 pounds per hour is 40% of the Max Feed Rate. It will then
run the feeder at a motor speed of 40%. Therefore, a single Total Throughput Set
Point can be used to control mixed systems comprised of both gravimetric and
volumetric feeders.
This approach takes maximum advantage of the features of the controller and off-
loads computations from the host computer. The host need only specify the total
amount of product desired, with the same value being sent to all of the controllers,
further simplifying host operations. Changing the amount of product being made is
just a matter of sending a new Total Throughput Set Point to each controller. The
change becomes effective immediately without having to stop the feeders.
Developing the Software Interface

Overall, implementation of the SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller is composed
of two parts—hardware setup and software configuration. The hardware portion of
the implementation involves wiring and setting up the controller according to the
information provided in the engineering package supplied by Acrison (refer to
Chapter 2).
The second part involves developing the software interface that allows
communication between the host and the SBC-2000 to occur. In most cases, the
user will be communicating with some type of PLC, DCS or PC host. PLC and
DCS masters will most likely require some programming, while PC hosts may
utilize one of the many HMI software packages available on the market today.
Unfortunately, because of the sheer number of different variations, Acrison cannot
provide exact instructions on how to develop this software interface. However, a
flowchart (Figure 3-3) is provided, as a generic example of the programming logic
required for communicating with the SBC-2000.
Communicating 3-9
Figure 3-3 Flow Chart—Generic Logic Diagram
3-10 SBC-2000
Units of Measurement
The SBC-2000 Controller is designed in such a way that it is effectively “dimensionless,” with no
inherent units of measurement for any of the data being collected or transmitted. Units of
measurement labels can be chosen to match those used by the operator using the “Select English/
Metric units” calibration entry. However, because the controller does not convert values, changing
the units of measurement may cause invalid readings. Any changes in the units of measurement
(i.e., English to Metric) must be applied globally by the user to all the appropriate set points and
values. For example, if the English system will be used, it is imperative that the entry for Max Scale
Weight be in pounds, the Chamber and Hopper Size entries be in cubic feet and the Internal Feed
Rate Set Point be in pounds per hour. If the Metric system is used, Max Scale Weight should be in
kilograms, the Chamber and Hopper Size entries should be in liters and the Internal Feed Rate Set
Point should be in kilograms per hour. As a side benefit from the dimensionless design, it is actually
possible to use any measurement system—as long as all values are consistent. Labels are only
available for the English and Metric systems.
General Considerations
The SBC-2000 can provide highly reliable error checking plus the ability of the
host to communicate at speeds from 9,600 to 56K baud, depending on the
communications protocol in use. Communication with the controller operates on
an interrupt basis with response latency averaging about 3 milliseconds from
receipt of a communication. Serial communication can be accomplished via
Channel #1 or Channel #2 (or both simultaneously).
For Example In advanced applications, a system could use one channel for communication
with a host PLC that has responsibility for control of the entire process. Normally,
this PLC would poll the SBC-2000 for alarm status, feed rate and motor speed
information. Meanwhile, the second channel could be connected to a PC with an
Industry standard SCADA package that would provide functions such as recipe
storage, SPC reporting, real-time graphs and alarm logging functions.
Although the manner of connecting the devices may vary between applications,
the host is always the master. The SBC-2000 will always function as a slave in the
communication network, and will never initiate communications on its own. Since
the “host” controller will always initiate communication, the following items will
have to be defined regardless of the protocol used:
• Operating Values and • Data Types • Baud Rate

Data Ranges
Operating Values and Data Ranges

Labels for the numerical values are neither sent nor accepted. The host device is
expected to know the units of measurement for the data being communicated. For
example, the Feed Rate Set Point data is communicated as a numerical value
(e.g., 1250). The host must know whether this represents pounds per hour,
kilograms per hour, pounds per minute, etc.
The host device must also be aware of the range of values which can be
accepted, or which will be supplied, as well as the format of the returned or
supplied data.
For Example A Motor Speed Set Point entry can be in the range of 0 to 100.0%. The SBC-2000
Weigh Feeder Controller will not accept an entry above 100%. Similarly, if the
SBC-2000 has been set to provide RPM (by calibration entry, instead of motor
Communicating 3-11
speed in percent) when a motor speed value is requested, the returned value
depends upon the maximum RPM calibration entry. In this way, if 3000 RPM has
been selected, the returned value can be 0-3000. If 1800 RPM has been selected,
the returned value will be 0-1800.
Data Types
All the data that will be communicated between a host and the SBC-2000 can be
divided into five types. These five types account for the entire register of read-
only, write-only or read/write parameters used by the controller. The following is a
brief description of each type:
• Text data: This type of data consists of alphanumerics and can be up to 22

ASCII characters long. Text data is used in fields such as Feeder ID.
• Floating Point: This data contains numerical values with fractional
components. Floating point parameters become fixed point parameters when
used with scaling.
• Binary/Integer: The data type contains values that range from 0 through
65535 (0-9999 for Modbus RTU, PLCG/DHP protocol).
• Commands: These types are essentially single coil writes that allow the host to
initiate actions such as operations or changes in mode.
• Status: This data is sent in a format of 4-byte blocks and is comprised of alarm
and mode reporting information (e.g., feeder on). Several different status
requests can be made depending on what information is required.
In most cases, the values that will be manipulated are either integer (binary) or
floating point. This can be determined from the Table B-1, “Parameter Index
Codes (Register Addresses)” on page 2 in Appendix B, which provides a code
adjacent to each parameter that indicates what type of data it is, and whether it
can be read from— or written to—the controller. Data that is sent to the controller
must be in the proper format or it will not be accepted. Floating point values will
always be provided to an accuracy of three decimal places (e.g., 1000.000 = one
thousand).
Baud Rate
It is critical that the transmissions between the host and the SBC-2000 Weigh
Feeder Controller be exactly matched with respect to their speed (baud rate). If
the SBC-2000 is set for 19,200 baud, then the host must also be set to that speed.
In addition, the number of data bits, stop bits and parity must match in order for
the devices to communicate. Slight differences exist between protocols as to
available baud rates and other factors. These are further described in this
Chapter.
3-12 SBC-2000
CHAPTER
4
READING AND WRITING PARAMETER VALUES
CHAPTER4
Chapters 2 and 3 discussed both the hardware and software requirements for
communicating with the SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller. In order to expand
on this knowledge, Chapter 4 will describe some of the fundamental precepts that
must be considered when actually reading and writing parameter values to an
Acrison controller. This Chapter is a general discussion and encompasses all
Acrison controllers capable of serial communication.
Note: The examples in this discussion will be based on the Modbus 984
protocol, but the discussion is applicable to all protocols. Refer to the Appendix
for specific register addresses applicable to other protocols.
The particulars for reading and writing values to the controller depend on both the
different types of data being transmitted (refer to “Data Types” on page 3-12) and
the protocol being used. However, there are general principles that must be
applied when accessing both single and multiple parameters. This is especially
true when discussing two important features available to Acrison controllers;
remapping and scaling. The remainder of the Chapter will focus on how values
are read and written to the controller from a host device. In addition, a complete
description will be provided for both remapping and scaling.
Accessing Parameter Values

Acrison's controllers can contain a significant number of Calibration Data
parameters, set points and data values, depending on the number of installed
options. Each of these parameters is assigned a register address (Acrison calls
these Parameter Index Codes) so that it may be selectively read or written over a
serial communication channel. The communication channel can exist between the
controller and a local keyboard, a host computer, a PLC or a variety of other
devices which need to have access to parameter values within the controller in
order to perform their functions.
Accessing Individual Parameters

Accessing the parameter values can be very straightforward. In the simplest case,
a single parameter's value would be read each time a communication occurs. The
communication message itself would be structured to include the desired register
address, bit size and “read this register” as the desired function. A “write” of a new
value would be accomplished by simply changing the function; the register
address would remain the same. Figure 4-1 is an example of a Modbus 984
message requesting Total Fed #2 at register address 40080.
Reading and Writing Parameter Values 4-1

Figure 4-1 Single message format example—Modbus 984
Request Format
Number
Device Function Data Register Data Register CRC-16
of 16-bit Quiet Time
Address Code High Order Low Order Error Check
Registers
01 03 00 38 00 02 A0 30 T1 T2 T3
01 03 00 38 00 02 A0 30 Actual Message
(in Hex)
Device Address: Unique station # of desired controller.

Function Code: Modbus function code (i.e., code 03-read holding registers).
Data Register-High/Low: Starting address of the first register to be accessed in the request
(using the Acrison Parameter Index Code).
Number of 16-bit registers: Each Parameter comprises two 16-bit registers (32-bits total).
CRC-16 Error check: The cyclic redundancy check error checking code.
Quiet Time: The elapsed time between receipt of characters. When approximately three
character times elapse without a new character or complettion of the frame,
an end-frame is assumed.
Figure 4-2 Multiple message format example—Modbus 984
Request Format
Number
Device Function Data Register Data Register CRC-16
of 16-bit Quiet Time
Address Code High Order Low Order Error Check
Registers
01 03 00 66 00 10 A1 2F T1 T2 T3
01 03 00 66 00 10 A1 2F Actual Message
(in Hex)
Device Address: Unique station # of desired controller.

Function Code: Modbus function code (i.e., code 03-read holding registers).
Data Register-High/Low: Starting address of the first register to be accessed in the request.
Number of 16-bit registers: Each Parameter comprises two 16-bit registers (32-bits total).
CRC-16 Error check: The cyclic redundancy check error checking code.
Quiet Time: The elapsed time between receipt of characters. When approximately three
character times elapse without a new character or complettion of the frame,
an end-frame is assumed.
4-2 SBC-2000
As can be seen in the illustration, the register address specified in the message is
the hexidecimal form of the Acrison Parameter Index Code, not the Modbus 984
register address (40080). This point is very important because it highlights the fact
that any message must be addressed to the desired Acrison Parameter Index
Code and not the equivalent address (protocol specific).
For Example Requesting the current Feed Rate would require the message being sent to
specify the register address as 99 (Parameter Index Code). The Modbus 984
equivalent address of 40166 is only significant to the Modbus host and would not
be recognized by the Acrison controller.
Accessing Multiple Parameters

The simple approach just described is quite satisfactory when just a few
parameters are being accessed, because the number of communications is few.
However, if the communicating device requires a large number of parameters,
accessing just one at a time can be very time consuming and can cause other
undesirable effects. Ideally, a number of parameters could be requested with a
single "read" communication.
Fortunately, protocols are available that provide this functionality. Modbus,
Modbus Plus, Allen Bradley DF-1 and others include provisions for reading or
writing many registers in a single message. This is accomplished in the message
by specifying the first register address required and the number of numerically
sequential registers to be read. That is, if it is desired to read registers 40100
through 40115 (16 registers), the message would specify the starting register
address as 40100 followed by the number 16. The important thing to recognize
here is that the register addresses being read are numerically sequential. Figure
4-2 is a typical Modbus 984 message which will read 16 parameters in register
addresses 40100-40115.
There can be as many as 120 parameters which may need to be accessed in an
Acrison controller. Obviously, they cannot all be specified for reading or writing in
a single message and Acrison controllers limit the number to 16 at a time. Indeed,
it may not even be possible to specify two parameters to be read in a single
message. This is because parameter register addresses accessed in a single
message must be numerically sequential. If the register addresses differ by more
than 16, they cannot be accessed in the same message.
So how can parameters with register addresses differing by more than 16 be
included in a single message? By changing a parameter's apparent register
address in a process called "remapping."
Remapping
The typical register address associated with a parameter in an Acrison controller
simply contains a value. Reading or writing to that register address reads or writes
the value. This association between the parameter and its register address is
permanent and never changes. A parameter can always be accessed at this
register address.
As described above, a communication message will typically specify the starting
register address and the number of registers to read or write. So in order to
access widely dispersed register addresses, they must appear to be numerically
sequential and within a range of 16. In order to accomplish this, Acrison
controllers include a special set of 16 sequential register addresses (68 to 83),
called the Remap Register Addresses, which can be read and written.
In the remapping process, an additional register address is associated with each
parameter selected, and this additional register address will lie in the Remap
Register Address range just described, thereby allowing it to be part of a multiple
read or write. Up to 16 parameters can be selected to be remapped into the
Remap Register Addresses, as indicated above. The newly-assigned remap

values are saved in non-volatile memory and will remain active until changed
(refer to Figure 4-3).
Defaults
In order to provide an easy approach to remapping for the majority of users,
Acrison has set default parameters for the Remap Register Addresses (see Table
4-1). The default parameters were chosen based on typical user requirements.
They may be changed as required, but may be all that are required for many
users, thus avoiding the additional steps necessary to associate parameters with
the Remap Register Addresses. The default parameters are as follows:
Table 4-1 Default Remap Values

Register Addresses
Remap Default Parameter Parameter Parameter
Register Index Code
Address 400 / 200 Series 400 Series 200
68 99 Feed Rate
69 100 Total Fed #1
70 101 Motor Speed
71 102 Motor Current
72 154 / 165 Hopper Level Belt Pulley Speed
73 155 Scale Weight (%)
74 163 / 156 Bulk Density Scale Weight (Wt)
75 115 Max Feed Rate
76 34 Standard Deviation (Feed Rate)1
77 110 Proportional
78 220 Integral
79 92 Feed Rate Set Point—Int Grav.
80 93 Feed Rate Set Point—Ext Grav.
81 94 Motor Speed Set Point—Int.
82 95 Motor Speed Set Point—Ext.
83 152 Feeder Status Request
Note: Remapping is associated with a physical serial channel in an Acrison

controller. Acrison controllers that have more than one serial channel have
separate configurable Remap Register Addresses for each serial channel. The
register addresses used to access remapped parameters are the same for either
channel.
Associating Parameters with Remap Register Addresses

For most Acrison controllers, the process of associating parameters with Remap
Register Addresses can be performed through the local Keyboard/Display Unit
(KDU), and through the serial communication channel. See the following table for
specific controller limitations (refer to Table 4-2).
Acrison's remapping process is accomplished by associating each register
address in the 68 - 83 (Parameter Index Code) range with a parameter. This
association uses a parameter's permanent register address as its identifier. For
example, the Total Fed #1 parameter has a permanent register address of 100, so
100 is its identifier.
All remapping is accomplished in a special programming mode called Remap
Mode.
4-4 SBC-2000
Table 4-2 Remapping availability for Acrison Controllers
Controller Remapping Available
MD-II 2000 KDU YES
MD-II 2000 Data Link YES
MD-II 2000 Aux Data Link YES
MD-II 2000 Remote via KeyCom YES
MD-II MFC CTS NO
MD-II MFC 2nd CTS NO
MD-II MFC Host Com Module YES
MD-II MFC Aux Data Link YES
C/BC-702 KDU NO
C/BC-702 Ser Com Module NO
SBC-2000 Ser Channels YES
060 Ser Com Module NO
Programming values in Remap Mode

When accomplishing remapping via the keyboard, entering Remap Mode is
simply a matter of accessing the appropriate calibration data screen, scrolling
down the list of calibration parameters, and entering the desired parameter index
codes. However, when entering via serial communication, Remap Mode is
entered by writing a “1” to the appropriate register address (Parameter Index
Code). While in Remap Mode, reading or writing the Remap Register Addresses
will be accessing the parameter's identifier, not its value.
To program in the Remap Mode, do the following (see Table 4-3):
1 Send the “Enter Parameter Remap Mode” command (Parameter Index Code
#248) to the SBC-2000 Controller. Once enabled, all polling of the remapped
area will return its current Parameter Index Code value for that remapped
address location.
2 Enter a substitute Parameter Index Code value into any of the sixteen available
remapped address locations.
3 Send the “Exit Parameter Remap Mode” command (Parameter Index Code
#249) to the SBC-2000 Controller. The controller will thereafter respond with
the remapped parameters assigned to the user-remappable area (Parameter
Index Codes #68 through #83) until cleared by the user.
Note: Only use the Parameter Remap Mode during controller initialization. Do
not remap parameters while the feeder(s) is (are) operating.
Considerations when Remapping

There are several things to be careful of when using the remap function. First,
many devices and programs require that all the data being requested or sent as a
part of a multiple parameter read or write, be of the same data type (e.g, integer,
floating point, text). Some devices malfunction with mixed types, while others are
more forgiving. It is generally a good idea to avoid mixing data types if possible.
Some devices or programs that can be used to communicate serially will
automatically make decisions about parameter grouping. Some go so far as to
automatically configure a multiple parameter message when they see multiple
individual requests to the same address, without concern for data type. Again, this
can cause misoperation.

While performing remap functions, it is important to understand that when the
controller is in the Remap Mode, reads and writes to the Remap Register
Addresses will be reading and writing the identifier, not the parameter value. This
is particularly important if a controller is communicating with more than one serial
channel simultaneously. Since these communications can arrive mixed at the
controller itself, it is conceivable that a second controller's message could appear
in between the setting of the Remap Mode and the exit from it. Thus, any of the
remapped parameters could inadvertently be changed by the second channel. It
is strongly recommended that serial communication to a controller be limited to a
single channel during the remapping process.
When remapping parameters, it is the responsibility of the user to keep track of
what parameters have been included in the Remap Register Addresses
Remapping Feeder Status

Normally, a request to Feeder Status 1 or Feeder Status 2 will return a response
in the form of a character string that is interpreted as binary for use at the host.
Figure 4-3 Remapping Parameters Illustration
Accessed when
not in Remap
Mode
Accessed only
in Remap Mode
4 4
4-6 SBC-2000
This is the standard format for both Feeder Status Request 1 and Status 2 when
polled directly (refer to Figures B-1 thru B-10). Unfortunately, this response format
can cause problems with certain protocols that require all data in the same
transmission to be of the same type. In order to resolve this, the controller allows
the user to remap Status Request 1. In this process, remapping Status 1 converts
the normal format into a special “Remapped Status Request” format. Once the
“Remapped Status Request” is programmed, any request for status information
will return a response in the form of a 16-bit integer (0-65535). This feeder status
information follows a different bit format that can then be decoded for monitoring
by the host device (refer to Figure B-11).
For Example The 285.000 value shown in the data field “Remappable Parameter 0”, in Step 3
of Table 4-3, corresponds to the following conditions:
High Level (256) + Gravimetric Mode (16) + Internal Mode (8) + Auto Refill Mode
(4) + Run Mode (1) = 285
Table 4-3 Parameter Remapping—Example of procedure

Normal Mode Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
Name of parameter at Enter Received

Param Remap set point
Feeder Remap Index address before Mode— Enter new New Remapped after exit of
Parameter entering Remap Mode identifiers parameter names
Code (Defaults) Identifier Remap
returned Mode
Remap. Parameter 0 68 Feed Rate 99 152 Feeder Status 285
Feed Rate Set Point

Remap. Parameter 1 69 Total Fed 100 92 2500.000
(int. Grav.)
Remap. Parameter 2 70 Motor Speed 101 99 Feed Rate 2501.002
Remap. Parameter 3 71 Motor Current 102 100 Total Fed 10034.997
Scaling Mode
In some protocols, numerical data must be within a certain range of values (e.g.,
0-65,535) and cannot contain a fractional component (floating point). In order to
enable compatibility with these types of protocols, Acrison has designed a means
for increasing the accuracy of small numerical (fixed-point) values (e.g., 36.25), or
for values larger than the upper range limit. This “Scaling Mode” provides three
multipliers that can be used to scale the values of Floating-Point data as it is
“read” from or “written” to the controller. Acrison refers to these multipliers as
Scale Factors #1, #2 and #3.
The value of each of the global Scale Factors #1 and #2 is specified by entering a
number from 0-7 into the appropriate address. The multiplier associated with the
entered number is shown in the table below:
Enter Selects Scaling Enter Selects Scaling

0 X1 4 X.1
1 X10 5 X.01
2 X100 6 X.001
3 X1000 7 (Disables Scale Factor #2)

Scaling Factors #1 and #2
Scale Factors #1 and #2 are global factors. They affect all values that are sent to
or received by the controller. While scaling is enabled, any values which are sent
by the SBC-2000 Controller to a host device are multiplied by Scale Factor #1
before being sent. Conversely, any values that are received by the SBC-2000
Controller are multiplied by Scale Factor #2 before being entered.
For Example If a parameter value of 36.25 were requested (a “Read”) by the host, the value
actually transmitted by the SBC-2000 Controller would be 36 (the .25 would be
dropped).
To improve the accuracy, scaling could be enabled, and Scale Factor #1 set to 2
(X100). This will cause the SBC-2000 Controller to shift the decimal place 2
positions to the right of any data sent to the controller. Thus, the same data
(36.25) would now be sent as a value of 3625 with an implied decimal point
between the “6” and the “2.” Likewise, a value of 123,456 would produce a value
of 65536 (maximum value which can be sent) if there is no scaling. However,
setting Scaling Factor #1 to X.1 would cause the SBC-2000 Controller to send
12345 instead.
Another Example Scaling Factor #2 was previously set to 0 (X1). If a parameter value of 3625 were
(Scaling Factor #2) sent (a “Write”) by the host, the value actually received by the SBC-2000
Controller would be 3625.
To improve the accuracy, set Scale Factor #2 to 6 (X.001). Subsequently, this

scaling factor will shift the decimal place 3 positions to the left. In this way, the
value that will now be received by the SBC-2000 Controller is 3625 with an
implied decimal point between the “3” and the “6.”
Note: Entering a value of 7 for Scale Factor #2 will disable Scale Factor #2 and
allow Scale Factor #1 to “scale” both functions (“reads” and “writes”).
Scale Factor 3
A separate Scale Factor #3 is available for each of the parameters that can
contain a decimal point, and affects only that associated parameter. The use of
Scale Factor #3 is entirely different from Scale Factors #1 and #2. When Scale
Factor #3 is used, the index codes are followed by the desired scale factor value,
instead of the value of the parameter. For example, writing to Parameter Index
Code 92 normally specifies that the following data is a new internal gravimetric set
point. However, in the scaling factors mode, the value would be interpreted to be
the new scale factor for the internal gravimetric set point.
Combining the Scale Factors

Scale Factors #1, #2 and #3 can be selected to work cumulatively, if desired.
Scale Factor #3 is used for both transmitted and received values. Therefore, in
the combined mode of use, a requested parameter's value is multiplied by its
Scale Factor #3, then by Scale Factor #1, before being sent to the requesting host
device. Similarly, a received value is first divided by that parameter's Scale Factor
#3, then multiplied by Scale Factor #2, before being saved. This approach permits
either global or individual scaling for each parameter.
NOTES:
1 -- Mid Feed Rate changed to Standard Deviation at program rev D-08
4-8 SBC-2000
CHAPTER
5
UNDERSTANDING WEIGH FEEDER FUNCTIONS
CHAPTER5
As previously stated (refer to Chapter 3), the key to fully utilizing all the
capabilities of the SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller lies in understanding how
to apply the different operating modes and parameters. This understanding is
equally important to both normal operation and the initial setup of communication
with a host. This Chapter will describe how the controller functions in the context
of a single feeder application while focusing on selecting the appropriate modes
for each type of operation desired. This will allow the user to understand which
commands, set points and parameters must be entered for their particular
application, and apply this to feeder control systems as needed (refer to “Control
Methodology” on page 3-6).
Selecting Operating Modes

The basic purpose of any weigh feeder is to accurately meter a measured amount
of material. However, this simple idea becomes complex because of all the
variables (e.g., number of feeders and applications) inherent in the actual
process. In order for the SBC-2000 to properly control the feeding device, four
important mode selections will have to be made. The particulars for each selection
will depend on factors such as the control method being used (simple or ratio),
type of operation (continuous or batch), and if the feeder will be controlled using
motor speed or feed rate (volumetric or gravimetric).
The flow diagram (refer to Figure 5-1) illustrates the process of programming the
controller with the various modes and parameters that must be selected. The
operating and control mode selections are made depending on the type of
operation desired and the control method (simple or ratio). Conversely, selecting
between the Refill and Rezero Modes depends on the type of scale supplied.
Once the choices are programmed, values must be entered for each of the Set
points and Calibration parameters that support whatever modes were selected.
For Example The settings for a typical “Weight-Loss” system might look like this:
Operating Mode—Continuous Control Mode—Internal Gravimetric

Refill Mode—Automatic
Set points and Calibration Data parameters—Gravimetric operation uses the
Feed Rate Set Point to control feeder output. In addition, setting the controller to
operate a “Weight-Loss” feeder in Internal Gravimetric Mode requires the user to
enter values for the Proportional, Scale Empty, Scale full, Max Scale Weight, Max
Feed Rate, and Minimum Feed Rate parameters. These values define the
variables needed for the controller to properly measure the hopper level and feed
rate using the signals from the scale.
Understanding Weigh Feeder Functions 5-1

Single feeder (Continuous Operations)
The overall setup for an SBC-2000 controlling a single feeder will largely be
determined by how the feeder is being used, and how the output of the feeder will
be controlled. In addition, the type of feeder being used will affect how the
controller behaves in certain modes. In order to setup the SBC-2000 for optimum
performance, the user will have to make mode and parameter selections (refer to
Figure 5-1) in four major areas:
• Select the overall type of operation (Continuous or Batch)-This
selection determines how the weigh feeder will be used. Both modes function
using the same basic control modes and parameters. However, the Batch
Mode has extra functions that tailor the weigh feeder for batching operations.
• Select how the feeder will be controlled (Volumetric or Gravimetric)-
These feed control modes determine how the material will be metered and
what the set point source will be (internal/external). They work in conjunction
with the set point source to determine an overall operating mode (i.e., Internal
Gravimetric, Internal Volumetric, External Gravimetric, External Volumetric or
External Fast Start Mode).
• Select a Refill or Rezero Mode-This mode selection depends on what type
of scale is provided with the feeding device being controlled. Refill Mode
applies only to “Weigh-Loss-Differential” systems. The setting is either
automatic or manual, and is determined by how the Refill Cycle will be initiated.
Rezero Mode applies only to zero-reference type scales. The mode is enabled
by a parameter entry, and can be set to automatically initiate whenever the
feeder is stopped.
• Enter the appropriate set points and calibration parameters-This
includes entering values for all the parameters that support the modes selected
(e.g., volumetric or gravimetric). In addition, defining parameters that enable
specific support functions that the feeder requires for optimum performance
(e.g., Fast Start and Refill Modes).
The sections below detail the preferred selections for single feeder operations.
However, because of the flexibility and power of the SBC-2000, many of the
control modes (internal/external) can be used interchangeably.
Selecting Operating and Control Modes

The user will be required to program the controller with the appropriate operating
and control mode selections by sending a command from the central or host
controller. The main mode selections are described in the sections below.
Continuous or Batch Modes

The Continuous and Batch Modes of operation primarily define the overall
function of the weigh feeder. In Continuous Mode, the controller maintains a
constant material output from the feeder. Simply put, the controller will operate the
feeder until a stop command is given. In contrast, the focus of the controller during
Batch Mode is to meter a specific amount of material and then stop. The accuracy
of the controller in either mode is solely a function of whatever control mode is
selected (e.g., Internal Gravimetric or Internal Volumetric). The SBC-2000 will
enter one of these modes upon receipt of a “Select Continuous Mode” or “Select
Batch Mode” command from the central or host controller.
Note: The Batch Mode is an extension of the Continuous Mode with extra
functions that relate specifically to batching processes (e.g., Number of Batches,
Batch thru Refill, Batch Size and Batch Deviation).
5-2 SBC-2000
Figure 5-1 Flow Diagram—Choosing Modes of Operation
Select Operating
Continuous Mode Mode Batch Mode
Batch or Continuous
Select F.R. Set Pt. Select F.R. Set Pt.

Source Source
Internal or Internal or
External External
Internal Modes External Modes Internal Modes External Modes

Internal Volumetric External Volumetric Internal Volumetric External Volumetric
Internal Gravimetric External Gravimetric Internal Gravimetric External Gravimetric
Fast Start External Fast Start Fast Start External Fast Start
Enter Parameters
Enter the Set Points,
Data Values and
Calibration Entries
for the Modes Enter Batch Mode
selected. specific parameters
Enter Parameters
Enter the Set Points,
Data Values and
Calibration Entries
for the Modes
selected.

Internal Gravimetric or Internal Volumetric Mode
The SBC-2000 offers two different control modes for use with an internal set point
source: Internal Volumetric and Internal Gravimetric. Internal Volumetric Control is
the least complicated of the SBC-2000 Controller's operating and control modes.
In this mode, the controller varies the feeder's motor speed regardless of the
scale's weight signal. The rate of feed is determined by the Motor Speed Set
Point, which is sent to the controller as a percentage of maximum speed (0-
100%). Usually, this mode is used when “manual” control of the feeder output is
desired, and is selected when the SBC-2000 receives a “Select Internal
Volumetric” command from the central or host controller.
In contrast, Internal Gravimetric Mode will operate to maintain the feeder's output
according to the value specified for the Feed Rate Set Point (in weight units per
hour). In operation, the controller converts the weight signal from the scale into a
feed rate, and adjusts the feeder's motor speed to match the specified rate. In this
mode, control is dependent on the input signal from the scale, and the user
specified Feed Rate Set Point. This is referred to as “gravimetric” operation. This
mode is initiated when the SBC-2000 receives a “Select Internal Gravimetric”
command from the central or host controller.
External Gravimetric or External Volumetric

The External Gravimetric and External Volumetric control modes are designed for
use in multiple feeder applications utilizing the ratio control method (refer to
“Control Methodology” on page 3-6). They are identical in operation to the internal
modes, but use a different set point source to control the output of the feeders.
When the feeder controller is in an external mode, the Total Throughput Set Point
is used instead of the Feed Rate or Motor Speed Set Point. This enables one
common signal to control multiple feeders by forcing each individual controller to
calculate its own Feed Rate or Motor Speed Set Point.
In operation, the controller takes the Total Throughput Set Point and multiplies
this value against whatever value has been entered as the Ratio Set Point. The
result of this calculation is then applied as the Feed Rate or Motor Speed Set
Point by the controller depending on which mode is selected (External Gravimetric
or External Volumetric).
Rezero and Refill Mode Selections

The Rezero and Refill Mode selections are determined by the type of scale
suppled with the system (“Weight-Loss-Differential” or Zero-Reference).
Rezero Mode (Zero-Reference)

Weigh Belt, Weigh Auger and Rotary feeders utilize a type of scale that requires
periodic calibration of the Scale Empty parameter to ensure optimum metering
performance. The SBC-2000 Controller accommodates this by providing a
Rezero Mode so that the controller can recalibrate itself. The Rezero Mode can be
programmed as either Manual or Automatic depending on the user's
requirements, and will cause the value of the Scale Empty parameter to be
recalibrated. The only difference between the two selections is how the Rezero is
initiated. All other functions are identical.
• Manual Rezero: A Manual Rezero can be initiated at any time by sending a
“Start Rezero” command from the host controller. The feeder will be stopped
for this function.
• Automatic Rezero: This selection causes the controller to initiate a Rezero
Cycle when the value written for the Rezero Timer parameter has expired, and
the feeder is stopped. If the feeder is running when the Rezero Timer expires,
the controller will wait until the feeder stops (part of the Rezero process) and a
Rezero Pending status generated.
5-4 SBC-2000
During a rezeroing cycle, the Weigh Belt, Weigh Auger or Rotary Feeder motor
will run longer than whatever value is entered for the Retention Time parameter.
This allows the feeder to run empty before the controller recalibrates the scale’s
zero reference point.
Refill Mode (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

The Refill Mode governs how a “Weight-Loss-Differential” feeder will act while its
supply hopper or tank is being refilled with material. This is especially critical
because Acrison's “Weight-Loss-Differential” Weigh Feeders determine the
volume of material in the feeder's integral supply hopper (or tank) by using the
scale weight readings directly—hopper level probes are not used. The controller
uses four parameters to calculate the Hopper Level (refer to Figure 5-2):
• Hopper size
• Feeder Chamber Size
• Scale Weight
• Bulk Density of the product
During a normal Refill Cycle, the “Weight-loss-Differential” feeder automatically
switches to a Volumetric Mode, and the motor speed secured to ensure that the
feeder remains on rate. Once the Refill Cycle is over, the controller switches the
feeder back to normal Gravimetric Mode without affecting the actual feed rate.
Refill Mode can be selected for operation in two ways: Manual or Automatic.
Figure 5-2 Illustration—Refill Mode
About the Refill Mode...

Hopper Level percentages are calculated by the controller based on scale weight. Calibration
parameters specify maximum scale weight, hopper size, feeder chamber size and bulk density
of the product to allow for conversion of weight to volume.
Overfill
Defined as equal
High Level Set Point
to 100% Scale
(Typically 80%)
Weight or 100%
In Automatic Refill Mode;
Hopper Level
turns off refill cycle.
or more.
Hopper
Low Level Set Point

(Typically 20%)
In Automatic Refill Mode,
turns on refill cycle. Empty Alarm
(Typically at 10%)
Feed
Chamber
Scale Mechanism

1. Manual Refill Mode: The user determines that the supply hopper (or tank) of a
“Weight-Loss-Differential” Weigh Feeder is low, either visually, from the
controller, or by means of additional equipment and must then initiate action to
begin the Refill Cycle. This can be accomplished by sending a “Refill On”
command over the serial communication channel.
2. Automatic Refill Mode: The Model SBC-2000 Controller detects that the
supply hopper (or tank) of a “Weight-Loss-Differential” Weigh Feeder has
reached the Low Level point—based on whatever value has been entered for
the Low Level Set Point parameter—and automatically begins the Refill Cycle.
The only difference between the two selections is how the Refill is initiated. All
other functions are identical. The commands that control the Refill Mode include
“Start a Refill”, “Stop a Refill”, “Auto Refill Mode” and “Man Refill Mode”.
Note: The SBC-2000 Controller is designed with an Auto Compensation feature

that can automatically adjust for variations during a refill. Auto Compensation will
apply corrections for things such as product bulk density changes and head
effect that can affect feed rate accuracy (refer to Table A-36, “Auto
Compensation” on page 13).
Calibration Data Parameters

Once an operating mode (Continuous or Batch) and a control mode (Gravimetric
or Volumetric) have been selected, the user must input the appropriate Calibration
parameters for all the selected modes. This is done by entering the proper values
for each of the calibration parameters as explained in Appendix A. Most of the
parameter values are one-time entries that only pertain to particular modes or
functions. Appendix A provides detailed descriptions for each parameter. Chapter
4 explains how the parameters are used and how they apply to each mode.
Fast Start Feature

Normally, there is a short interval during the startup of a "Weight-Loss-Differential"
Weigh Feeder when the controller has no scale samples to use in computing the
feed rate. This condition causes the feeder to slowly speed up as the controller
acquires and processes the samples needed tp get the feeder “on rate”. The Fast
Start feature was developed in order to provide a means to avoid this sometimes
slow “ramp up” and quickly get the feeder “on rate”. The Fast Start feature is
adjustable using the External Fast Start Threshold parameter.
Fast Start (Internal Modes)

Fast Start is an automatic feature (if enabled) that temporarily switches the feeder
to volumetric operation using a motor speed that is calculated to produce the
desired feed rate when operating in Internal Gravimetric Mode. In order to
accomplish this, the SBC-2000 references the Maximum Feed Rate parameter
and calculates that value against the current Feed Rate Set Point.
For Example If the Maximum Feed Rate (at maximum motor speed) is 10,000 pounds per hour,
and the desired Gravimetric Feed Rate Set Point is 5,000 pounds per hour; the
SBC-2000 would estimate the required motor speed to produce the 5,000 pounds
per hour to be:
5, 000
------------------- = 50% motor speed
10, 000
5-6 SBC-2000
When operating in Internal Gravimetric Mode, the Fast Start feature is either
enabled or disabled depending on the value written for the External Fast Start
Threshold (parameter). With a non-zero value entered, the controller will initiate
Fast Start Mode whenever:
1. A RUN command is sent to the controller.
2. A new value (that exceeds the threshold setting) for the Feed Rate Set Point is
sent to the controller while the weigh feeder is operating.
The weigh feeder will remain in Fast Start Mode until the end of the Start Band
Time. The Start Band Time is user selectable and must be properly set in order for
the Fast Start feature to work correctly.
Note: The SBC-2000 Controller assumes that a relatively linear relationship

exists between motor speed and feed rate.
External Fast Start Mode

The External Fast Start mode is primarily for use in multiple feeder systems using
a ratio control method (refer to “Ratio Control Method” on page 3-9). Unlike the
Fast Start feature (Internal Gravimetric Mode), External Fast Start is an actual
control mode. In this mode the controller always remains in a Fast Start condition.
This enables the host to supply one common Total Throughput Set Point, and
forces the controller to calculate its own equivalent Motor Speed Set Point. The
External Fast Start Mode is used primarily with volumetric feeders in multiple
feeder systems where a mix of gravimetric and volumetric feeders is required.
Single Feeder (Batching)

The SBC-2000 is equipped with a series of features (special set points and
parameters) that are specifically designed to adapt the weigh feeder for batching
applications. These features function in the controller's Batch Mode, and provide
the controller with the ability to perform batching operations in both gravimetric
(Internal and External) and volumetric (Internal and External) operating modes.
The controller is capable of two types of Batching operations: (1) “Loss-in-Weight”
(Batch-out) and (2) “Gain-in-Weight” (Batch-in). “Loss-in-Weight” is the term
applied to “Weight-Loss-Differential” and/or Weigh Belt/Auger feeders that feed
either volumetrically or gravimetrically to a preset weight. The term “Gain-in-
Weight” refers to applications where the feeder is feeding into a scale mounted
hopper or tank to a selected batch weight. Typically, the batching cycle occurs as
described below.
Batching
Batching is initiated via a command from the host. Once a RUN command is
received, the Batch Fed Value will go to zero and begin counting toward the Batch
Size Set Point (refer to Figure 5-3). In addition, the Total (Fed) 1 and 2 values will
be updated so they can be read by the host.
Note: Totalizers #1 and #2 will also increment during batching.
While running a batch, the feeder can be stopped and restarted whenever
desired. This can include refilling the feeder's supply hopper (or tank) for “Weight-
Loss-Differential” Weigh Feeders, since the SBC-2000 re-establishes its scale
operating point each time it is restarted. Moreover, if a power failure occurs, the
SBC-2000 has the ability to resume the batch at the point where it was interrupted
(once power is restored). This feature resumes the batch, but requires a new

“RUN” command from the host (a Batch-lok Set Point entry is required to permit
resumption following a power failure).
Dribble Mode
The purpose of Dribble Mode is to slow the feeder down so that a more accurate
cutoff can be achieved when the Batch Size Set Point is approached (refer to
Figure 5-3). Because of this, batch accuracy is very dependent upon selecting the
proper Dribble Point and Dribble Speed for the application. Logically, the slower
the feeder is feeding at the time it reaches the Batch Size Set Point, the more
accurate the cutoff and batch. However, this has to be balanced against another
critical factor—time. Lowering the motor speed increases the overall time it takes
to complete a batch. In applications where time is a critical factor, the two
parameters must be carefully combined to achieve optimum performance.
Batch Delay
Once the Batch Size Set Point has been reached, and the feeder is turned off, a
short delay begins to allow any material in flight to be accumulated (refer to Figure
5-3). The controller will not consider the amount fed in the batch to be final, or turn
on the Batch Complete status bit, until this interval has elapsed. This period is
called the Batch Delay Time, and has a fixed minimum value of three seconds
(not changeable by the user). However, the user may extend the total Batch Delay
Time by entering a value for the Batch Delay entry. The entered time will be
added to the minimum three second value to determine the total delay time (refer
to Table A-41, “Batch Delay”).
Figure 5-3 Batching Steps for Single and Multiple Batches
First Batch Last Batch
{
Run Output ON
(Contact and
Status) OFF
{
Dribble Mode ON
(Contact and
Status) OFF
{
Delay ON
(Contact and
Status) OFF
Batch Complete ON
(Contact and
Status) { OFF
ON
{
Running
(Contact and
Status) OFF
Start Dribble Mode Start Dribble Mode

Start the Batch
Start Delay Mode Start Delay Mode
Batch Complete
Start the Batch Batch Complete
5-8 SBC-2000
Batch Mode-Set up
Since the Batch Mode is only an extension of the Continuous Mode, many of the
set points and parameters that are used in Continuous Mode will also be
accessed in the Batch Mode. This includes entries such as Feed Rate Set Point
(gravimetric), or Motor Speed Set Point (volumetric). In addition, the Batch Mode
requires entries for special set points and parameters that only apply to the
controller when it is in Batch Mode. The general set up requirements are
explained in the next few sections.
Selecting a Batch Size

A value for the Batch Size Set Point must be sent to the controller by the host. The
Batch Size can be read and written to an accuracy of 0.001 pounds or kilograms,
depending upon the English/Metric calibration entry (refer to Table A-25).
Selecting a Refill Mode (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

In order to run a batch, a Refill Mode must be selected. The controller will run a
batch in either Automatic or Manual Refill Modes. However, if the SBC-2000 is in
Manual Refill Mode, and a Batch Size Set Point is entered that exceeds the
amount of material on the scale, the feeder will not start. If this happens, the SBC-
2000 will transmit a “Batch too Large” error message to the host.
Note: It is important to understand that the Automatic and Manual Refill Modes
control the method of initiating the Refill Cycle. They have nothing to do with the
way the hopper or tank supplying the weigh feeder is physically refilled.
When batching with the controller set for Automatic Refill Mode, the SBC-2000 is
capable of batching through a refill, if necessary, to obtain the Batch Size Set
Point. If, the Batch Size Set Point is greater than the amount of material presently
on the scale, the feeder will start when a “RUN” command is sent to the controller.
During operation, the feeder will stop automatically when a refill starts either from
low level or a “Start a Refill” command. Batching will automatically restart: (a) 20
seconds after completion of the refill, (b) 20 seconds following a Refill Timer alarm
or (c) 20 seconds after “Stop a Refill” command is received. This can occur as
many times as necessary to reach the Batch Size Set Point.
Setting a Motor Speed or Feed Rate Set Point

The SBC-2000 can perform batching using any of the Internal or External Modes
(either gravimetric or volumetric). Because of this, the controller should have the
appropriate value entered for whatever mode is being used (Feed Rate Set Point
or Motor Speed Set Point).
Setting the Batch Mode parameters

Once a Batch Size Set Point, Refill Mode and a Motor Speed Set Point have been
selected, the parameters required for the controller to batch can be entered:
• Batch Through Refill: This option permits a “Weight-Loss-Differential” Weigh
Feeder to continue to feed during the Refill Cycle while the controller measures
the batch fed inferentially (using motor speed). This process is called Inferential
Totalization (refer to Table A-44).
• Batch Deviation Set Point (refer to Table A-43): This parameter will trigger
an alarm if the final Batch Fed amount deviates from the Batch Size Set Point
by more than the specified percentage. The Batch Deviation and alarm
functions will be energized (see Table A-54, “Digital Output #1, #2” on
page 18).

• No Batch Timer: This parameter can be set if the batch must be completed
within a specified amount of time. The user selects the interval and the alarm
message “Batch Timer Alarm” will be generated if the time expires before the
batch ends. If this occurs, the No Batch Timer and alarm functions will be
energized.
• Batch-lok Set Point (refer to Table A-42): In order to prevent scale
disturbances from causing batching inaccuracies, a disturbance threshold can
be entered that will cause the feeder to stop for five seconds if a disturbance is
sensed. If a disturbance to the scale is detected, a “Batch-Lok in Effect”
message will be sent to the host, and the Batch-lok alarm function will be
energized. A general alarm is not generated.
• Dribble Point (refer to Table A-49): Establishes the number of pounds or
kilograms away from the Batch Size Set Point before the unit will go into
Dribble Mode.
• Dribble Speed Set Point (refer to Table A-48): The SBC-2000 will switch
to this motor speed once the Dribble Point (see above) is reached.
Note: Metering in the Dribble Mode is always done volumetrically, even when
the controller is in Internal or External Gravimetric Mode.
These are the only entries that may be required in order to run a single batch.
When running multiple batches, there are additional entries as described in the
following:
• Batch Interval: The Batch Interval specifies the number of seconds from the
completion of one batch until the start of the next when running multiple
batches.
• Preset Number: The preset number of batches to be run.
Batch Mode-Completion
Once the first batch is completed, repeat batching can take place. The SBC-2000
has provisions for automatically running a preset number of batches, and for
specifying the time interval to be used between them. The Preset Number of
Batches Set Point specifies the number of batches to be run, and the Interval
Time specifies the number of seconds between batches.
The Interval Time starts upon a Batch Complete status. If all the proper set points
and parameters have been set, another batch will automatically start when the
Interval Time expires. This cycle will continue until the total number of batches
completed equals the value entered as the set point.
Batch Preact
The SBC-2000 Controller allows for the entry of a Batch Preact. This value
compensates for material “in flight” from one device to another. The controller will
subtract this value in weight units from the Batch Size Set Point. This is useful in
“Gain-in-Weight” (batch-in) applications where a dry solids volumetric feeder
meters product into a weigh hopper or tank, or in applications where both a
volumetric feeder and a weigh feeder meter product to another device.
For Example If the Batch Size Set Point is 10.000 pounds and the Batch Preact is .250 pounds,
the SBC-2000 will stop feeding at 9.750 pounds. The remaining 0.250 pounds are
expected to be “in flight” and will be totalized during the Batch Delay.
5-10 SBC-2000
Batch Trim
If physical sampling reveals a discrepancy between the Batch Size Set Point and
the actual batch amount, the Batch Trim parameter can be used. This parameter
will cause the SBC-2000 to internally modify the Batch Size Set Point in order to
adjust for the difference.
The Batch Trim value is associated with the present Batch Size entry only, and is
the actual measured value, not the displayed value for Batch Fed. If the Batch
Size Set Point is changed, the Batch Trim entry must either be changed or set to
zero for proper operation.
Note: In order to prevent erroneous operation, the Batch Trim value cannot
differ from the Batch Size Set Point entry by more than 25 percent. If this limit is
exceeded, the SBC-2000 will generate an error and prevent the weigh feeder
from starting.
Batch Count
In order to provide a means for identifying or counting batches, a Batch Count is
maintained by the SBC-2000. This number is incremented by one each time a
batch is started, providing for identification of partial, or aborted batches, if
necessary. The Batch Count can be cleared (set to zero) or read by the central or
host controller.
Batch Abort
A batch in progress can be aborted at any time the feeder is stopped by the
“Batch Abort” command. This command will: (1) abort the current batch, (2)
terminate any series of batches that may be in progress and (3), turn on Batch
Complete status bit immediately.
Chapter Summary
The following sections provide operational summaries for the operating and
control modes described in this section.
Internal Mode Operational Summary

To operate the feeder in the Internal Gravimetric or Internal Volumetric
Mode, proceed as follows:
1. Select the operating mode as either Internal Volumetric Mode (INT VOL, based
on motor speed), or Internal Gravimetric Mode (INT GRAV, based on feed rate)
by sending the appropriate command from the host.
2. Enter the desired Feed Rate Set Point (Internal Gravimetric Mode) or Motor
Speed Set Point (Internal Volumetric Mode) from the host.
3. For “Weight-Loss-Differential” Weigh Feeders, select either Automatic (AUTO)

or Manual (MAN) Refill Mode from the user’s host interface. Verify that material
is available in the hopper (or tank) for feeding. If using the Automatic Refill
Mode, ensure that the Low Level Set Point, High Level Set Point and Bulk
Density parameters have been entered.
4. Ensure that the Fast Start feature is properly set up.
5. If in the Internal Gravimetric Mode, ensure that there is no Scale, Overfill or

Fault alarms present.

6. Verify that the following Calibration Data parameters have been entered:
1. Proportional (and Integral if using PID Control).
2. Bulk Density
3. High Level
4. Low Level
5. Scale Empty
6. Scale Full
7. Maximum Scale Weight
8. Maximum Feed Rate
9. Mid Feed Rate (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)
10. Retention Time (Weigh Belt/Auger/Rotary Feeders)
11. Hopper or Tank Size (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)
12. Chamber Size (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)
13. Start Band
7. Enter additional desired, or required, Calibration Data parameters (e.g. Acri-

Lok Set Point, Deviation Set Point).
8. Send a “RUN” command from the host. If the feeder fails to start, the host
should be able to read a status back from the controller explaining why.
9. Monitor the motor speed, hopper (or tank) level, by displaying the data
parameters at the host.
External Mode Operational Summary

To operate the feeder in the External Mode, proceed as follows:
1. Select the operating mode as either External Volumetric (EXT VOL, external
motor speed control), or External Gravimetric (EXT GRAV, external feed rate
control), and enter the Calibration Data parameters required by sending the
appropriate data from the host.
2. If ratio control method is being used, verify that the desired Total Throughput
Set Point has been entered from the host.
3. Enter the desired Ratio Set Point from the host (set to 0 if only a single feeder
is being controlled).
4. For “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders, select either Automatic (AUTO) or

Manual (MAN) Refill Mode from the user’s host interface. Verify that material is
available in the hopper (or tank) for feeding. If using the Automatic Refill Mode,
ensure that the Low Level Set Point, High Level Set Point, and Bulk Density
Calibration Data parameters have been entered.
5. Verify that the following Calibration Data parameters have been entered:
1. Proportional (and Integral if using PID Control).
2. Bulk Density
3. High Level
5-12 SBC-2000
4. Low Level
5. Scale Empty
6. Scale Full
7. Maximum Scale Weight
8. Maximum Feed Rate
9. Mid Feed Rate (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)
10.Retention Time (Weigh Belt/Auger Feeders)
11. Hopper or Tank Size (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)
12. Chamber Size (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)
13. Start Band
6. Ensure that the Permissive Run contact is closed, unless it is being used as a
Remote Run contact.
7. If in the External Gravimetric Mode, ensure that there is no Scale, Overfill or

Fault alarm present.
8. Send a “RUN” command from the host. If the feeder fails to start, the host
should be able to read a status back from the controller explaining why.
9. Monitor the motor speed and hopper (or tank) level by displaying the data
parameters at the host.
Batching Mode Operational Summary

To operate the feeder in Batch Mode, do the following:
1. Select/verify the Batch Mode of operation. A Status request will verify if the
controller is in Batch Mode. If the Status request shows that the controller is in
Continuous Mode, transmit a “Select Batch Mode” command from the host to
switch from Continuous Mode to Batch Mode.
2. Select the control mode for the feeder as either INT VOL, EXT VOL, INT
GRAV, EXT GRAV or EXT FAST by sending the appropriate command from
the host.
3. Select the desired Batch Mode as either batch-out, batch-in or weigh vessel by
writing the appropriate parameter selection to the Batch Mode Configuration
parameter.
Enter values for the following optional Calibration Data parameters, if desired
or required:
1. Batch Deviation Set Point
2. Batch Delay Time
3. No Batch Alarm Timer
4. Batch-lok Set Point
5. Enter values for the following Calibration Data parameters:
• Batch Size. If using the Batch-out mode, and the batch size is greater than
the amount of material in the hopper (or tank), ensure that the Automatic
Refill Mode is selected. If using the Batch-in mode, the batch size must not
exceed the capacity of the scale.

• Enter the Batch Trim, if required.
• Enter the Batch Preact, if required.
• Enter the desired Dribble Speed Set Point.
• Enter the desired Dribble Point.
• Enter the Preset Number of Batches desired.
• Enter the Batch Interval, if running a sequence of batches.
4. Send a “RUN” command from the host to start the batch.
5-14 SBC-2000
CHAPTER
6
SELECTING PARAMETERS
CHAPTER6
Understanding which operating and control modes to select for the user's
particular application is one of the most vital aspects of properly implementing the
SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller. However, once this understanding has been
achieved, the problem becomes one of knowing what parameters to enter for the
modes that have been chosen.
Since parameters provide the specific values required by the control and
operating modes to function, it is important for the user to have an overall
understanding of how these parameters are applied. This chapter will classify the
different types of parameters. In addition, it will provide a simplified explanation
and listing of the core parameters that need to be entered when programming the
controller for an initial start up.
Note: The information contained in this chapter is summary in nature. The user
is referenced to Appendix A (parameter descriptions) and Appendix B
(parameter codes) for detailed information.
Parameters
The broad term parameters encompasses the wide range of data needed by the
the SBC-2000 to perform the various algorithms that actually control the functions
of the weigh feeder. In all, over 120 parameters are stored in the controller’s
memory for access by a host PLC, DCS, or PC. Each of these parameters is
stored in controller memory and performs a different function depending on the
values written to that parameter.
In general, the controller relies on the parameters in different ways depending on
what modes have been used or selected. A few parameters are common and
required globally for all operations. In contrast, many others are only accessed for
very specific modes or functions.
Note: Calibration Data is stored in non-volatile memory and are not affected by
loss of power. The SBC-2000 can store this type of data for up to 10 years.
For the purposes of discussion, the parameters will be divided into four different
categories based on how they are used within the different operating modes.
However, it should be understood that from the controller and host point of view,
all the parameters are read or written in the same manner using the Parameter
Index Code.
Selecting Parameters 6-1

Types of Parameters
In the SBC-2000, all four main categories of parameters (set points, commands,
data and calibration data) are combined to provide the controller with the
information needed to function. Generally, many parameters will not be used in
most applications. Moreover, some parameters will be entered once and never
changed again. Because of this, the following sections will examine the parameter
categories individually, and outline the parameters in each category.
Set Points
In simple terms, set points are the read/write values that determine how the weigh
feeder will perform. Overall, set points are associated with specific operating or
control modes and must have values entered in order for the feeder or feeding
system to operate. The set points shown below are selectable from within the
SBC-2000's control program.
• Feed Rate SP • Ratio SP External • Motor Speed SP

Volumetric
• Ratio SP External • Total Throughput Set • Acri-Lok Set Point
Volumetric Point
Commands
Commands are single coil (register) writes that cause the weigh feeder to perform
a specific action. These commands allow the user to change operating and/or
control modes; initiate special sequences, and abort operations. The commands
are listed below.
• Select Internal • Select External • Select Internal

Gravimetric Mode Gravimetric Mode Volumetric Mode
• Select External • Select Continuous • Select Batch Mode
Volumetric Mode Mode
• Start Feeder • Stop Feeder • Alarm Acknowledge
• Cancel a Batch in • Select Auto Refill Mode • Abort Rezero Pending
Progress
• Select Manual Refill • Start a Refill • Stop a Refill
Mode
• Start Rezero • Emergency Stop • Select External Fast

Mode
• Select “Scaling Factors” • Exit “Scaling Factors” • Clear Scaling Factor 3
Mode Mode to Zero
• Start Max Rate • Enter “Parameter • Exit “Parameter

Remap” Mode Remap” Mode
• Clear Remapped
Parameters
Data Parameters
This category of parameters encompasses read-only data values, which allow the
host to monitor and display the operations of the controller. They are separate
from Status requests and include items such as motor speed and hopper level.
Below is a list of the read-only data parameters currently available for use in the
SBC-2000.
6-2 SBC-2000
• Feed Rate • Motor Speed • Motor Current
• Motor Command • Hopper Level • Weight in %
• Weight in LBS. • Error Message • Weight
• RPM • Resolver • Refill Mode
Calibration Data Parameters (Operational Data)

The SBC-2000 Controller's program incorporates data tables that contain the
read/write values needed to perform its control algorithms. Calibration Data
parameters (operational data) are nothing more than the individual values, which
make up these data tables. Calibration Data parameters range from entries that
enable or disable features to floating point values that determine how a certain
feature will function. A detailed description and listing of all the Calibration Data
parameters is provided in Appendix A.
Note: The “Default” feature can be used to set most of the required parameters
to a reasonable value (refer to Table A-5, “Select Programmed Defaults”).
Status Requests
There are ON/OFF bits of information available from an SBC-2000 Controller that
fully describe its present operational status. These Status bits are grouped into a
4 byte block that may be requested as a single read (32 bits), or as a read of the
first and second group of 16 (2 bytes), depending on the protocol. The SBC-2000
offers two separate status requests; Feeder Status Request and Status 2
Request. The byte and order may vary between protocols (refer to “Controller
Status Bytes” on page B-7). The table below shows the typical bit order for a
Feeder Status Request (1):
Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1

Not Feeder Feeder High Manual
Byte 1 Dribble On Off Level
Auto Refill
Refill
Low Level Refill On
Internal Batch External Batch Batch Internal External Batch

Byte 2 Grav. Mode Grav. Running Delay Vol. Vol. Complete
Byte 3 Overfill No Scale Acri-Lok Empty No Tach. Deviation Fault Overload
Byte 4 EM7 EM6 EM5 EM4 EM3 EM2 EM1 EM0
The bits labeled “EM0-EM7” are binary-coded Error message numbers.
Refer to all the similar tables located in Appendix B for an explanation of each
Status request and how they differ from protocol to protocol.
Associating Parameters with Operating and Control Modes

In most cases, the SBC-2000 will be supplied in one of two ways: as a separate
feeder controller or as a feeder controller associated with a specific feeder. This is
important because the amount of initial programming required will be directly
related to how the SBC-2000 is supplied. Since, all feeders are tested at the
factory prior to shipment (if the controller and feeder are supplied together) many

of the calibration and operational parameters will have already been entered at
the factory. Conversely, any controllers supplied separately or as a spare part will
require all values to be entered (refer to Figure 6-1).
Note: A printout of the controller parameter settings (factory set) is supplied

from the factory.
The easiest method for understanding the process of selecting the proper
parameters and parameter values involves dividing the controller’s programming
process into a step by step procedure. The ultimate goal of this procedure is to
define every aspect of the application to the controller so that it can achieve the
desired output. This procedure outlines the essential entries needed to operate
the feeder as well those required for the two major modes of operation.
The procedure involves the following steps:
Step 1 If the controller is supplied separately, set the controller to use the
Default 1 settings by writing the appropriate value for the “Select Pro-
grammed Default Values” calibration parameter.
Step 2 Verify that the parameters, which define the feeder and scale to the
controller, are entered and correct.
Step 3 Enter initial values for the parameters that define the method of control
(Standard or PID). Note: These values will require “fine-tuning” once
the feeder is running.
Step 4 Enter the parameters that define the Refill Cycle (“Weight-Loss-Differ-
ential” Feeders) or Rezero Mode (Zero-Reference Feeders) to the con-
troller.
Step 5 Enter the minimum parameters needed to run the feeder if Continuous
operation is desired.
Step 6 Enter the minimum parameters needed if Batch operations are desired.
As can be seen, each step builds on the preceding step to define all the essential
aspects of the application for the controller. For the most part, these essential
settings will be entered once, and never changed again. However, they must be
set properly in order for the feeder to run initially. Once the feeder is running, the
user will then be able fine tune or tailor operations according to their particular
application.
Note: The information in the following sections is provided based on the

assumption that all the other aspects of a feeder startup have been verified. This
includes, the physical setup (wiring), establishment of communication between
the host and controller (interface), testing the motor/motor controller and initial
calibration of the scale.
Using the Programmed Default Values

In situations where the controller has been supplied as an individual component or
as a spare part, the programmed default values can be an invaluable tool in
establishing a starting point for programming. Applying the default values will
6-4 SBC-2000
allow the user to get the feeder running quickly and customize the parameter
settings as needed (refer to“Default Tables” on page 6-8 ).
Warning: Only use Default 1. Using Default 2 or Default 3 will change any
feeder or scale calibration data that may have been programmed at the factory.
Defining the Feeder and Scale

The first group of parameters that must be verified are entries that define the
feeder and scale to the controller. These entries are essential to the operation of
the feeder and may actually prevent the feeder from running, if not properly set.
The entries are:

• Scale Empty • Chamber size (“Weight-Loss-Differential”)
• Max Scale Weight • Bulk Density (“Weight-Loss-Differential”)
• Scale Full • Hopper/Tank Size (“Weight-Loss-Differential”)
• Maximum Motor RPM • Retention time (Weigh Belt/Auger/Rotary)
Defining the Method of Control (Standard or PID)

Once the most basic calibration parameters are entered, the user must specify
which control algorithm the controller will use. Defining the method of control is
very important because it specifies how the controller will react to compensate for
changes in feed rate (refer to “Feed Rate Control Algorithms” on page 7-4).
This is done by entering values for the following parameters:

• Max Feed Rate
• Integral
• Proportional
Use the initial or Default 1 values as a starting point and fine tune the control once
the feeder is operational. This can be done according to the instructions in
Chapter 6 (refer to “Feed Rate Control Algorithms” on page 7-4).
Defining the Refill

The next set of parameter entries provide the values needed for the SBC-2000 to
properly control the Refill Cycle, essential for “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders,
which should be set prior to actually placing the feeder in operation.
These entries include:

• Empty Level Set Point (“Weight-Loss-Differential”)
• Low Level Set Point (“Weight-Loss-Differential”)
• High Level Set Point (“Weight-Loss-Differential”)
• Refill Timer (“Weight-Loss-Differential”)
• Rezero Timer (Weigh Belt/Auger/Rotary Feeders)

Figure 6-1 Illustration—Procedure for programming the SBC-2000
SBC-2000 supplied as SBC-2000 supplied as

a separate component a new system with an
or spare part associated feeder
Select and Enter the Verify that values entered

Default 1 Calibration for the parameters that
Parameters define the Feeder/Scale
for the controller
Enter the parameters

Verify values for the
that define the
parameters that define
Feeder/Scale for the
the Refill
controller
or
Enter values to enable Verify the minimum Verify the minimum
control method that will parameters needed for parameters needed to
be used by the controller Batch Mode in Continuous Mode
Enter values for the Enter a set point for

parameters that define the desired output
the Refill (Motor Speed Set Point
or Feed Rate Set Point)
or
Enter the minimum Enter the minimum
parameters needed for parameters needed to Send a RUN Command
Batch Mode in Continuous Mode to the Controller
Enter a set point for

the desired output
(Motor Speed Set Point
or Feed Rate Set Point)
Send a RUN Command

to the Controller
6-6 SBC-2000
Defining the Parameters Needed for Continuous Mode
At this point in the procedure, nearly all of the parameter values needed for
operation in Continuous Mode have been entered. The final parameters that
require values are listed below:
• External Threshold
• Start Band Set Point
Once these final parameters are entered, operating the SBC-2000 will just be a
matter specifying the desired output (refer to “Internal Mode Operational
Summary” on page 5-11):
• Select Continuous Mode (send command).

• Select a control mode (send command): Internal Gravimetric, Internal
Volumetric, External Gravimetric, External Volumetric, External Fast Start.
• Enter a Feed Rate Set Point or Motor Speed Set Point.
Defining the Parameters Needed for Batch Mode

If Batching operations are desired, the SBC-2000 will have to be programmed
with values for the parameters that relate strictly to batching. In almost all
applications, batching will be done in Volumetric Mode, since the total batch
amount fed, not the rate per hour, is the main concern. The following set points
must have values for the batching function to work:
• Batch Size • Dribble Point

• Dribble Speed • Batch Trim
• Batch Interval • Preset No.
Chapter Summary
Operating the SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder Controller involves selecting the
appropriate set points, commands, and parameters from those available in the
controller’s memory. These entries enable the user to define the application to the
controller so that it can accurately perform the desired functions. How much
programming the user will have to do is directly related to whether or not the SBC-
2000 is supplied as an individual component or as part of a new system (with an
associated feeder). At its most complex, programming the SBC-2000 will require
the user to do the following:
1 Select the Default 1 values.
2 Enter values for the parameters that define the scale and feeder.
3 Enter values that specifies the method of control (Standard or PID).
4 Enter values that define the Refill or Rezero Mode.
5 Enter values for the parameters needed to run in Continuous or Batch Mode.
6 Enter a value for a Feed Rate Set Point or Motor Speed Set Point that specifies
the desired output.
As an example, Figure 6-2 shows a hypothetical printout for the set up of a

controller operating continuously in Internal Gravimetric Mode.

Figure 6-2 Generic parameter set up example
Set Points
Feed Rate Set Point 2000.000 LB/HR Ratio Set Point 0.0 PCT (%)
Motor Speed Set Point 0.0 PCT (%) Ratio Set Point 0.0 PCT (%)
Bulk Density 28.00 LB/CU. FT. Acri-Lok Set Point 10.00 PCT (%)
Calibration
Proportional 1.20 Select Units LBS
Derivative 0.000 Integral 5 SEC
Scale Full 642728 Calibration Trim 0.00 LB/HR
Max Weight 3.02 LB Scale Empty 2057 96
Chamber Size 1.000 CF Max Rate 9000.00 LB/HR
Deviation Set Point 1.0 PCT(%) Hopper Size 20.000 CF
Acri-Lok Timer 20 SEC Dev iation Timer 15 SEC
High Level 80.0 PCT(%) Stop On Empty 0
Empty Level 10.0 PCT(%) Low Level 20.0 PCT(%)
Refill Delay 0 SEC Refill tim er 120 SEC
Alarm Latc h 0 Scale Averaging 1
Tach Alarm Enabl e 1 Start Band 15 SEC
External Threshold 10.0 PCT(%) Dig out 1 0
External Input Span 15 LB/HR Dig In 2 2
Dig Out 2 0 Compensation Source 0
Dig In 1 0 Negative Manual Comp 0.0 PCT(%)
Compensation Mode 0.0 Don’t Pace in Fill 0
Positive Manual Com p 0.0 PCT(%) Rate per/min 0
Bumples s Transf er 0 PCT(%) Stop Delay 0 SEC
Start Delay 0 SEC Sample Interval 0
Inferentia l Totalization 0
Default Tables
Default 1
The table below lists the values that will be entered into the controller’s memory
when the Default 1 is selected. Please note that the batching parameters are
shown separately in the bottom portion of the table.
Table 6-1 Default 1 parameter values

Parameter Default Value Parameter Default Value
Emulation Mode 0 RPM Set Point 1800
AFR Delay 60 Scale Average 1
Manual Comp Pos. 0 Accel Set Point 50
Manual Comp Neg. 0 Current Lim Setpt 15
External Threshold 10 Motor Display 0
Comp Selection 0 Fast After Refill 0
Start Band Set Point 15 Check For Notach 1
Displayed Bits 0 Stop On Empty 0
High Level 80 Dig Out 1 4
6-8 SBC-2000
Low Level 20 Dig Out 2 6
Hopper Empty 10 Dig In 1 0
Refill Timer 120 Dig In 2 0
Acrilok 10
Batch Start Delay Set 0 Batches Remaining 0

Batch-in Mode 0 Batch Interval 0
Batch Size 15.0 Batch Delay Set Point 3
Dribble Point 2.5 No Batch Timer Set Point 0
Dribble Speed 5.0 Preset Num Of Batches 1
Batch Trim 0 Batchlok Setpt 0
Batch Fed 0 Batch Deviation 10
Batch Counter 0 Refill After Batch 0
Remaining Batches 0
Default 2
The table below lists the values that will be entered into the controller’s memory
when the Default 2 is selected. Please note that the Batch Mode parameters are
shown separately in the bottom portion of the table followed by the listing of the
Remapped parameters.

Ramp Interval 0 Derivative 0
Emulation Mode 0 Calibration Trim 0
External Input Span 9000 Calbb 1
Dont Pace 0 Deviation Set Point 5
AFR Delay 60 Deviation Timer 30
Delayed Start 0 Scale Full 999999
Delayed Stop 0 Scale Empty 500000
Comp Source 0 Displayed Bits 0
Manual Comp Pos. 0 High Level 80
Manual Comp Neg. 0 Low Level 20
Acrilok 10 Hopper Empty 10
Acrilock Timer Sp 10 Max Scale Weight 600
External Threshold 10 Chamber Size 1
Comp Selection 0 Refill Timer 120
Start Band Set Point 15 RPM Set Point 1800
Per Minute Mode 0 Scale Average 1
Bumpless Mode 0 Accel Set Point 50
Max Motor Speed 100 Current Lim Setpt 15
External Set Point 100 Motor Display 0
Ext Vol Set Point 100 Fast After Refill 0
Internal Set Point 2500 Check For Notach 0
Volumetric Set Point 25.0 Stop On Empty 0
Bulk Density 28.0 Dig Out 1 4

Hopper Size 20 Dig Out 2 6
Max Scale Weight 600 Dig In 1 0
Max Feedrate 9000 Dig In 2 0
Proportional 1.75 Alarm Latch Sp 0
Integral 5 Vol Totalizer Fac 0
Keyboard Lock 0
Batch Start Delay Set 0 Batches Remaining 0

Batch Size 15.0 Batch Interval 0
Batch-in Mode 0 Batch Delay Set Point 0
Dribble Point 2.5 No Batch Timer Set Point 1
Dribble Speed 5.0 Preset Num Of Batches 1
Batch Trim 0 Batchlok Setpt 0
Batch Preact 0 Batch Deviation 10
Batch Fed 0 Batch Thru Refill 0
Batch Counter 0 Settle Delay Setpt 10
Remaining Batches 0 Refill After Batch 0
Index
Channel 0 Channel 1 Code Description
Parameters Parameters (Hex)
Remap [0] = Remap [0] = 63 Feed Rate
Remap [1] = Remap [1] = 64 Total Fed
Remap [2] = Remap [2] = 65 Motor Speed
Remap [3] = Remap [3] = 66 Motor Current
Remap [4] = Remap [4] = 9a Hopper Level
Remap [5] = Remap [5] = 9b Scale Weight %
Remap [6] = Remap [6] = a3 Bulk Density
Remap [7] = Remap [7] = 73 Max Feed Rate
Remap [8] = Remap [8] = a4 Mid Feed Rate
Remap [9] = Remap [9] = 6e Proportional
Remap [10] = Remap [10] = dc Integral
Remap [11] = Remap [11] = 5c Feed Rate Set Point (Int. Grav.)
Remap [12] = Remap [12] = 5d Feed Rate Set Point (Ext. Grav.)
Remap [13] = Remap [13] = 5e Motor Speed Set Point (Int. Grav.)
Remap [14] = Remap [14] = 5f Motor Speed Set Point (Ext. Grav.)
Remap [15] = Remap [15] = 98 Feeder Status Request (Word 1)
Default 3
Selecting Default 3 will enter the same parameter values as the Default 2 values
with one important exception—Emulation Mode. The Default 3 programmed
default values enable a special internal feeder Emulation Mode (software) that
mimics a feeder’s scale signal and allows the controller to operate as if it were
connected to a real feeder. This special default is primarily designed for training,
demonstration or software development situations where connection to feeder is
necessary but not available.
6-10 SBC-2000
CHAPTER
7
ADVANCED CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS
CHAPTER7
This chapter will describe some of the supplemental and advanced features that
can be used to enhance or customize the performance of the SBC-2000 Weigh
Feeder Controller. Some of the features are optional, and used only in conjunction
with special applications or modes of operation. In contrast, others are required
(for certain applications) in order for the weigh feeder to function properly.
Normally, advanced features can be divided into two groups; built-in features that
improve performance or features that provide functionality for special applications.
Features that Improve Performance

The main performance enhancement features of the SBC-2000 Weigh Feeder
Controller are described in the following sections. The user should carefully
review the features for possible uses in their particular application.
Bumpless Transfer
This optional feature is for “Weight-Loss-Differential” feeders, and enables the
user to manually alternate between volumetric and gravimetric operation. The
SBC-2000 Controller allows Bumpless Transfer from Gravimetric Mode to
Volumetric Mode or from Volumetric Mode to Gravimetric Mode by tracking Feed
Rate Set Point changes. For example, this feature allows the user to start the
feeder in Internal Volumetric Mode, slowly increase the Motor Speed Set Point to
the desired value, and then switch to Internal Gravimetric Mode without having to
know the exact Feed Rate Set Point.
While in Internal Volumetric Mode, Bumpless Transfer automatically converts the
current volumetric motor speed into an equivalent gravimetric Feed Rate Set
Point and enters that value when the control mode is changed. This capability is
normally used when gradually bringing a feeder, “up to speed”, or when the
optimum feed rate is unknown. Refer to Appendix A for a complete description of
the Bumpless Transfer feature (Table A-61).
Feed Rate Set Point Universal

This feature allows an external feed rate signal to control the feeder in both
External Gravimetric and External Volumetric Modes. When the Feed Rate Set
Point Universal is used, both the volumetric motor speed and Feed Rate Set Point
are calculated from the same signal source. From a programming standpoint, this
allows the host to write the desired set point without first having to poll the
controller in order to find out which control mode is currently selected. The
Advanced Controller Functions 7-1

Universal Set Point is enabled by writing a value for the Feed Rate Universal Set
Point.
For Example In a multiple feeder configuration using the simple control method, many of the
feeders may need to be alternated between gravimetric and volumetric
operations. In order to simplify programming, the user can control each feeder
using the Universal Set Point. This allows the host to send any set point changes
to each feeder without having to first poll them for the current control mode.
This is especially helpful for extruder applications where multiple feeders are
manually “ramped up” in Volumetric Mode and then switched to gravimetric once
the proper output has been determined.
Auto Compensation
Factors such as changes in bulk density and head effect can have a negative
impact on the overall accuracy of the feeder. Auto Compensation enables the
SBC-2000 to automatically adjust the motor speed to compensate for these
potentially detrimental changes. Because of the wide range of factors that can
affect accuracy, the SBC-2000 is equipped with three types of compensation.
These are Head Effect Compensation, Bulk Density Compensation and Mid/Max
Rate Compensation.
Head Effect Compensation

The flow characteristics of some materials can actually cause the Feed Rate to
fluctuate during the Refill Cycle. This property—known as head effect—can be
caused by many different product-related variables, including compaction of the
material in the hopper and changes in the bulk density.
In one situation, the bulk density of the material may be higher in the lower portion
of the hopper when the hopper is full (head effect). Because of this, as the hopper
level decreases the motor speed will increase because the feeding mechanism
must feed faster to maintain the same rate of feed (refer to Figure 7-1). This
causes an undesirable fluctuation in feed rate as the controller slowly adjusts to
the new bulk density of the material. Head Effect Compensation enables the SBC-
2000 to anticipate the change in material weight and quickly adjust the motor
speed accordingly.
Figure 7-1 Head Effect Compensation Chart

Percentage of Change
Time in Seconds
Motor Speed Trend Hopper Level Trend
7-2 SBC-2000
Bulk Density Compensation
Some materials have a sensitivity to moisture (hygroscopicity) that can cause
changes in the material’s handling characteristics, including bulk density. In some
applications, these changes can be so severe that the controller’s ability to
accurately calculate the hopper level is affected. In order to compensate for these
types of changes, the SBC-2000 can be programmed to perform Bulk Density
Compensation. Bulk Density Compensation causes the controller to correct the
motor speed to adjust for any extreme fluctuations in the material’s weight.
Mid/Max Rate
Mid/Max Rate Compensation is similar to Bulk Density Compensation. However,
the Mid/Max Rate Compensation uses a calculation based on motor speed and
current scale weight to compute the proper Max Feed Rate Entry. This type of
compensation can be an extremely effective tool for helping to maintain the
accuracy of the controller’s Fast Start feature.
Selecting Automatic Compensation

When the Auto Compensation feature is enabled, sampling of the feed rate, motor
speed and hopper level is performed by the controller at the beginning and end of
a Refill Cycle. If a Manual Compensation value has not been entered, the
controller will calculate the motor speed required for maintaining a constant feed
rate during the Refill Cycle. This value is then saved to memory, and used to
maintain a constant feed rate during the next Refill Cycle.
In order to enable Auto Compensation, values must be written for the following
Calibration Data parameters:
Compensation Selection—Enables and selects the type of compensation
(Head Effect, Bulk Density or Max/Mid Feed Rate).
Compensation Input Selection—specifies what parameters will be used to
calculate the compensation (Motor Speed or Motor Command).
Entering a new Feed Rate Set Point does not cancel the Auto Compensation for
the next Refill Cycle. The calculations performed are described in Appendix A.
Note: Auto Compensation is not computed unless the difference between the
before and after sampling process shows a change greater than 10 percent. If
the change is less than ten percent, or a special condition exists (e.g., alarms
etc.), the previous value remains unchanged.
Selecting Manual Head Effect Compensation

The SBC-2000 also allows the user to manually specify the percentage of change
in motor speed, instead of allowing the controller to calculate it automatically. To
enable Manual Head Effect Compensation, the user must enter a value for either
the Positive or Negative Manual Compensation parameters. This permits Head
Effect Compensation without requiring the Non-linearity and Bulk Density
Compensations that begin when the Auto Compensation Mode is selected.
Appendix A describes the calculation used to derive the actual change in motor
speed that is entered in the Manual Compensation parameter.
Note: Head Effect Compensation (automatic or manual) remains active for ten
seconds after the High Level Set Point is reached. In addition, any non-zero
value entered for this parameter will be used by the controller instead of an
automatically computed value. This will occur even when operating with Auto
Compensation energized.

Feed Rate Control Algorithms
The SBC-2000 is programmed with two different control algorithms that it uses to
manage the Feed Rate—Standard and PID. During normal operation, the
controller samples the signal from the scale and applies those values to whatever
control algorithm is being used. This process controls how the motor speed will
react to changes in the Feed Rate.
As a rule, optimum performance is achieved using either control when the motor
speed changes only slightly to compensate for changes in feed rate. If the feed
rate increases or decreases, the motor speed should change just enough to return
the feed rate to the desired Feed Rate Set Point. The following sections explain
how optimum performance can be achieved using Standard or PID Control.
Note: Standard and PID control are very different. Only one should be selected
and used. Changing from one type to the other is not recommended.
Standard Control
Standard control is enabled by writing a zero as the value for the Integral
calibration parameter. In this type of control, there are two critical calibration
parameters for maintaining optimum feed rate—Maximum Feed Rate and
Proportional. Accurately determining these values is the key to minimizing
variations in actual feeder output.
Maximum Feed Rate (standard control)

The method for having the SBC-2000 automatically determine the Maximum Feed
Rate value is explained in Appendix A. If it becomes necessary to determine this
value manually, samples of the feeder's output must be taken, and weighed.
Use the following procedure:

Step 1 Set the controller to operate in the Internal Volumetric Mode. The hop-
per (or tank) should have enough material in it for taking samples with-
out refilling (“Weight-Loss-Differential”).
Step 2 Enter a suitable Motor Speed Set Point. The speed entered should
operate the feeder slowly enough so that the material discharged can
be caught in a container for weighing.
Step 3 Before taking samples, make sure the feeder is metering a steady flow
of material.
Step 4 While operating the feeder, take a 1-minute sample of the feeder output
and weigh it. If possible, take several and calculate the average sample
weight.
To determine the Maximum Feed Rate in units per hour, use the following
formula:
Sample  60
Maximum Feed Rate = --------------------------------------------------------------------------
Motor Speed (in % decimal)
For Example A one-minute sample of 50 pounds is taken at a set speed of 10 percent (.1).
Using the above formula, the Maximum Feed Rate Value would be 30,000 pounds
per hour.
7-4 SBC-2000
50  60
------------------- = 30, 000
.1
Proportional Value (Standard Control)

The Proportional value affects how much the motor speed changes to
compensate for changes in feed rate. In general, auger feeders that must operate
at a higher RPM require smaller Proportional values, while auger feeders that
operate at a lower RPM require larger ones. Although the optimum value for this
parameter must be determined by trial and error, some guidelines are provided
below for the initial set-up of dry solids feeders employing an auger type metering
mechanism.
Use the following Proportional Values as guidelines:
• For Auger sizes A to D, use a Proportional Value of about 200, or greater.
• For Auger sizes E to H, use a Proportional Value of about 20.
• For Auger sizes K to P, use a Proportional Value of about 5.
• For Auger sizes larger than P, use a Proportional Value less than 1.
Note: If the Proportional value for a particular installation has been determined
by Acrison at the factory, use this value.
PID Control
The SBC-2000 Controller uses two Calibration parameters for PID Control. They
are Proportional, and Integral. Although the Derivative is available as a Calibration
parameter, its value is not presently used by the controller.
• Proportional: The optimal Proportional value is determined by trial and error.
However, the guidelines provided for the initial setup in Standard Control may
be applied.
• Integral: The entered value, from 0-120 seconds, is used in the PID Algorithm
to compensate for long term variations in feed rate. The optimal setting for the
Integral Value must be determined by trial and error.
• Derivative: The Derivative value should be set to zero.
The SBC-2000 uses the following PI equation:
FORMULA:
P .25
New Motor Speed = Present Motor Speed + ---------- E + -------- E N
100 I
Where… E = Error (Set Point - Feed Rate)/100

I = Seconds
En = Sum of E during interval I
This equation illustrates the use of the Proportional (P) and Integral (I) Values.
Note: The Integral is disabled during Acri-Lok or Fast Start.

Autotuning
NOTE: The Maximum Feed Rate Value must be determined before Autotuning.
A self-calibrating capability “Autotuning” satisfies a unique requirement: the ability

of the SBC-2000 CM or DSP Controller to automatically enter the P, I and D con-
stants’ Values into the Operational Data Table. Operationm is the same for either
the SBC-2000 CM or DSP Controllers but differs in how the function is initiated.
The description below is for the DSP version that has an integral keyboard.
To initiate the Autotune feature via the Graphic Keyboard/Display Unit of the SBC-
2000 DSP Controller, proceed as follows:
1. Press the “Commands” button to bring up the available commands.

2. Press the numeric keybutton associated with “Start Autotune.”
3. Enter the controller’s access Password to begin Autotuning.
The SBC-2000 DSP will start the feeder and will initially display the message
“TUNE - INITIALIZATION.” The controller will then operate the feeder in the Volu-
metric Mode at 30 percent of the value of the Maximum Feed Rate and will display
“TUNE - LOW RATE XXXXXX.”
Note: If the Low Feed Rate is not established within 5 minutes, the controller will
shut off the feeder, and display the error message:, “TUNE - NO LOW FEED
RATE.”.
The controller will then calculate the value of the slope based on the Low Feed
Rate and Maximum Feed Rate Values and display “TUNE - FIND SLOPE.”
Note: If the controller cannot find the slope within 3 minutes, it will shut down the
feeder and display the error message, “TUNE - NO SLOPE.”
The controller will next operate the feeder in the Volumetric Mode at 70 percent of
the value of the Maximum Feed Rate Value and display “TUNE - HI RATE
XXXXXX.”
When complete the Autotuning Program will exit, compute and enter new values
for Proportional and Integral, and stop the feeder. The Derivative value is nor-
mally set to zero.
Features for Specialized Applications

The following sections describe features that are used with specific applications or
functions. This section also includes a brief discussion of some optional devices
that are used to integrate the SBC-2000 to special networks or host devices.
7-6 SBC-2000
Blending Applications
Start/Stop Delay
Separate Calibration Data parameters are provided for Start Delay and Stop
Delay. These features are primarily for blending system applications where
multiple feeders are required to start and stop at different intervals in relation to
each other.
For Example In a specific application, four feeders are metering individual ingredients into a
common in-line blender where they are being combined to create a final product.
However, because each feeder is situated at a different location along the
blender, starting them at the same time would cause inconsistencies in the
mixture. In order to prevent this, each feeder is set with a start delay that prevents
the feeder from starting before the material from the preceding feeder has
reached the proper location in the blender. This way an even mixture is
maintained during the initial start (refer to Figure 7-2).
The Start Delay and Stop Delay enable the user to enter a specified time delay for
starting or stopping each feeder. Each delay begins upon receiving a RUN
command from the PLC or PC host. Once the request is received, the feeder will
start or stop after the specified amount of time.
Figure 7-2 Illustration Start/Stop Delay
Start Delay= Start Delay= Start Delay= Start Delay=

0 Min. 2 Min. 4 Min. 6 Min.
A B C D
B L E N D E R
Individual Feeders are set to start as the material flowing

through the blender reaches the appropriate position.
Password Protection
The SBC-2000 has no inherent security features. Because serial access to any of
the parameters is available at anytime, password protection must be established
by the user at the host interface. Caution must be taken because improper setting

of important calibration parameters can seriously affect the performance of the
feeder controller. The SBC-2000 is equipped with a Password parameter that is
used with all Acrison designed interfaces, but can also be utilized by a host to set
up password protection for any or all of the controller’s functions (refer to Table A-
51).
Recipe Load/Save
A recipe feature is standard for SBC-2000 Family Controllers that are equipped
with an Acrison KDU (local or remote versions) such as the Graphics Display or
the Color KDU, or with a host running Acri-Data software. This feature provides
for saving and reloading up to 25 recipes in the controller, each consisting of 18
preselected parameters. The recipes are saved in non-volatile.memory. The
parameters included in a recipe are:
1) Internal Setpoint 12) Dribble Point
2) External Set Point 13 Dribble Speed
3) Volumetric Set Point 14) High Level
4) External Volumetric Set Point 15) Low Level
5) Bulk Density 16) Scale Average
6) Max Feed Rate 17) Control Mode
7) Proportional 18) Feeder ID
8) Integral 19) Actual Rate # 1-5
9) Derivative 20) Sample % Mtr Speed #1-5
10) Batch Size 21) Compensation
11) Batch Deviation
Recipes are saved or loaded using the appropriate keybuttons on the KDU and
may be saved or loaded while the feeder is running or stopped. Some parameters
may not take effect immediately. See Appendix A for the parameter descriptions
for further details.
Optional Devices
Acrison offers many optional devices the can expand the capabilities of their
controllers. As a rule, these devices take the form of modules that plug-in directly
into the controller card rack. However, they are not limited to just add-on circuit
boards. The following sections describe some of the optional devices that can be
used with the SBC-2000.
Network Gateways
Acrison's Network Gateway is a device that provides a communications
connection (bridge) between Acrison controllers and different high-speed network
protocols. It essentially operates as a “protocol converter”. On the network, the
Network Gateway operates as an addressable slave device, waiting for requests
(reads) or commands (writes). These communications are subsequently
converted to an Acrison protocol by the Network Gateway and sent to the
appropriate Acrison controller using a multi-dropped, 4-wire, RS-422 interface. At
present, supported protocols include:
• Profibus-DP • Ethernet
• Allen Bradley Data Highway • Allen Bradley Ethernet
IR Interface (Optional)
As an option, the SBC-2000 can be equipped with an IR port that allows for
communication between the controller and any Palm™ III or Palm™ V handheld
7-8 SBC-2000
equipped with Acrison’s pKDU software. The main purpose of the IR port is to
allow for local access to the controller for maintenance or troubleshooting. Note
that this feature is standard in the SBC-2000 DSP/C controller.
PersonalKDU
Acrison’s pKDU is a custom application based on the Palm OS® that converts any
Palm™ III or Palm™ V handheld into a wireless Keyboard/Display Unit (KDU). It
provides full access to all set points and calibration parameters. It also has the
ability to activate many of the SBC-2000's normal functions.
Note: If the SBC-2000 is equipped with an optional IR port, one of the two serial
channels (S1/S2) must be dedicated to this component.
Local Graphic Interfaces

Stand-alone graphic interfaces can also be purchased as an option. These
graphic displays can be mounted locally to provide a method for viewing data or
entering set points, command and calibration data.
Figure 7-3 Palm™ V with pKDU, MPKDU, and Color Touchscreen
MPKDU
personalKDU
Color
Touchscreen

MPKDU
Acrison’s MPKDU-1 is a central Keyboard/Display Unit that provides access to all
calibration data, set points and commands for up to 16 Acrison controllers. The
MPKDU-1 communicates serially with the SBC-2000 via one of the two serial
communications channels (S1/S2) and requires the use of the DB-576 protocol.
The MPKDU is usually supplied in its own, separate enclosure, but it can also be
supplied loose for user mounting.
Color Touchscreen
Acrison’s Infra-red Color Touchscreen is a Graphic Keyboard/Display Unit that
offers complete access to all set points, commands and calibration data for a
single SBC-2000 Controller. The Infra-red Color Touchscreen is available with
either a 10” or 18” diagonal viewing area.
WIreless Interface
Acrison’s SBC-2000 Controller can also be equipped with an optional module that
allows for wireless communication between the controller and any compatible
device. The SBC-2000 Bluetooth allows wireless networking with any Bluetooth
compatible device and complete access to all set points, commands and
calibration data within the controller’s memory.
7-10 SBC-2000
CHAPTER
8
REFILL MODE
CHAPTER8
This Chapter will describe the Refill Mode for “Weight-Loss-Differential” Weigh
Feeders. The Chapter will also provide a simplified sequence of operation for use
when troubleshooting the Refill Cycle.
Understanding the Refill Cycle (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

The SBC-2000 has two available modes for controlling the Refill Cycle. Both
these modes are identical in operation, and differ only in execution. The two
modes available to the user are:
• Manual Refill Mode: The user determines that the supply hopper (or tank) is
low, either visually, by the weigh feeder controller, or by means of additional
equipment and must then initiate action to begin the Refill Cycle. This can be
accomplished by sending a “Refill On” command over the serial communication
channel.
• Automatic Refill Mode: The Model SBC-2000 Controller detects that the
supply hopper (or tank) has reached a low level—based on whatever value has
been entered for the Low Level Set Point parameter—and automatically begins
the Refill Cycle.
When either mode is initiated, the controller checks for the presence of a Feed
Rate Deviation alarm. If an alarm is present, the controller goes into a one-minute
delay cycle to allow some time to get the feeder back on rate. At the end of one
minute, the Refill Cycle begins—regardless of the Deviation alarm—in order to
prevent running out of material.
Acrison's patented Acri-Lok® feature is an important component of the Refill
Cycle. The controller also uses Acri-Lok to transition the feeder into normal
Gravimetric Mode once the Refill Cycle is complete. This helps the controller
anticipate the scale disturbances caused by the refilling process and prevent the
feeder from going off rate during the Refill Cycle.
Initiating a Refill of the Supply Hopper

Once the Refill Cycle is initiated, the SBC-2000 will take samples of the present
hopper (or tank) level, motor speed and feed rate for use in later computations.
The controller then turns on a Status bit and starts the Refill Timer. The Refill
Timer interval (based on Refill Timer parameter) specifies the maximum time to
allow after the start of refill before the SBC-2000 must return to the Gravimetric
Mode. If refilling does not start, the hopper (or tank) level will decrease to the
Empty Set Point, which will trigger an alarm condition.
Refill Mode 8-1

Once the Refill Cycle begins, the motor speed will be held relatively constant to
ensure accurate feeding with the following exceptions:
• If the SBC-2000 is operated in the Internal/External Gravimetric or Internal/

External Volumetric Modes, and a change is made to the set point during the
Refill Cycle, the controller will Fast Start to the new rate if the External Fast
Start parameter is exceeded (Gravimetric Mode), or will immediately change to
the specified motor speed (Volumetric Mode).
• If Head Effect Compensation is being applied, the motor speed will gradually
change as the hopper (or tank) refills in response to the percentage being used
for compensation (automatic or manual).
Stopping the Refill Mode

Regardless of the Refill Mode selected (automatic or manual), the Refill Cycle will
be terminated, and the Refill Status bit turned off, when any one of the following
events occur:
• The High Level Set Point, previously entered into the SBC-2000 by the user, is
reached.
• An Overfill condition is detected (defined as either 100 percent scale weight or
100 percent hopper or tank level).
• A “Refill Off” command is received from the host over the serial communication
channel.
• The Refill Timer expires.
Post Refill Functions

Once the supply hopper (or tank) has reached the high level point, a test is made
to determine whether Head Effect Compensation is active. Since overfilling is a
possibility with certain automatic refilling devices, Head Effect Compensation will
continue to be applied for an additional ten seconds after reaching the high level
point. This will offset the difference in level if overfilling has occurred. The
following actions will then occur:
1. The Acri-Lok Timer is started. During the period of the Acri-Lok Timer, scale
samples are taken to establish the actual feed rate. At the end of the Acri-Lok
Timer period, the SBC-2000 returns to Gravimetric Mode.
Immediately upon entering Gravimetric Mode, the controller checks to see if Auto
Compensation is in effect. If Auto Compensation is still in effect, the controller
samples the feed rate, motor speed and hopper level again thirty seconds later for
use in computing the Head Effect and/or Bulk Density change.
Note: This will not happen if a Deviation Alarm existed when the Refill Cycle
started.
When in Auto Compensation, a thirty-second timer is started, during which none

of the following conditions can occur. If any of these conditions do occur, the timer
is restarted from zero. These conditions are as follows:
• Feeder stopped and started

• Any alarm condition
8-2 SBC-2000
• A change of more than one percent to the Feed Rate Set Point over the total
thirty seconds
• A Fast Start
Assuming none of the above conditions occurred during the thirty second time
period, an average of the feed rate, motor speed and hopper (or tank) level is
taken for five seconds and stored in memory. Any change in hopper level of 10
percent or greater, since the start of the Refill Cycle, will cause the controller to
compute new values for Head Effect Compensation, Bulk Density and Maximum
Feed Rate. These new values will be stored in memory and the controller will end
the Refill Cycle. It is important to note that the Maximum Feed Rate Value will not
be allowed to change by more than 20 percent of its previous value.
Note: If no alarms are present while operating, the Maximum Feed Rate and
Bulk Density Values are calculated every 15 seconds.
Multiple Product Changeovers (Dry Solids)

All Acrison weigh feeding systems are designed specifically for each application
based on precise design guidelines. These guidelines take into account many
factors including the handling characteristics of a particular product or group of
products. Because of this, feeder/scale combinations are not “generic” and cannot
always be used to feed dissimilar materials. Materials with similar characteristics
may work. However, the mechanical components of a system (i.e., metering
auger, hopper, feed chamber) have inherent performance limitations that must be
considered prior to any changeover (e.g., maximum possible feed rate, hopper
capacity, scale weight).
Before attempting to change the product being fed, the following issues must be
resolved.
• If the mechanical components are sized to accommodate the new product, the
bulk density (weight per unit volume), Max Feed Rate, Proportional and
Integral (if applicable) will have to be recalculated and entered into the SBC-
2000 (refer to Appendix A).
• The values for the hopper's High and Low Level Set Points must also be
rechecked. If the bulk density of the new product being fed is much greater
than the previous product, Maximum Scale Weight (100 percent) could be
reached well before the Hopper High Level Set Point is reached. This would
cause an Overfill alarm condition and impose mechanical constraints to the
weigh scale that must be avoided. In order for the feeder to operate properly in
this case, the High Level Set Point would have to be lowered in order to end the
Refill Cycle before the Maximum Scale Weight is reached.
• In cases where the bulk density is drastically increased, it may not be practical
to use the same feeder/scale combination. The inverse would apply if the bulk
density of the product decreased drastically.
Note: It is recommended that the user consult Acrison before attempting to

change products having significantly different handling characteristics and/or
bulk densities.
Troubleshooting the Refill Cycle

Typical applications of the SBC-2000 Controller use the PC or PLC host to
monitor the Refill Status bits so that the host can then trigger the automatic
refilling device once the controller has begun the Refill Cycle. This allows the
controller to utilize the Automatic Refill Mode and obtain optimum performance.
Refill Mode 8-3

However, regardless of the configuration, there are three possible scenarios for
the outcome of a Refill Cycle. These include a normal sequence (High Level
reached), a partial or no refill (High Level is not reached) and an Overfill (High
Level is exceeded). Because of the many subtle differences between each
scenario, it is important to understand how the weigh feeder will perform during
each condition.
Normal-Refill Sequence (see Figure 8-1)

1. LOW LEVEL-The controller senses that the material level has reached the
Low level Set Point.
1. Controller turns on the Refill
2. Refill Status bit turns on
3. Refill Timer starts timing
4. Feed rate and Motor speed secure at their last values before Refill
5. Host activates the automatic Refill device
2. HIGH LEVEL-The controller senses that the material level has reached the
High Level Set Point.
1. Controller turns off the Refill
2. Refill Status bit turns off
3. Host de-activates the automatic refill device
4. Refill Timer resets
5. Acri-Lok Timer starts timing
3. ACRILOK TIMER TIMES OUT

Feed rate and Motor speed unlock and reference the scale; the controller returns
to Gravimetric Mode.
Note: The scale is not referenced for feed rate control during the Refill Cycle.
The scale reading is only referenced for starting and stopping the Refill Cycle
sequence.
Figure 8-1 Normal Refill Cycle
High Level High Level
Low Level Low Level
Material in Hopper reaches Refill Cycle commences and

Low Level Set Point and the continues until High Level is
Refill Cycle is initiated. reached.
8-4 SBC-2000
Figure 8-2 Partial or No-Refill
Low Level Low Level
Low Level is reached and the Refill Timer times out before the
Refill cycle is initiated. High Level Set Point is reached;
Refill Cycle ends with only Partial
refill of the hopper achieved.
Partial-Refill or No-Refill Sequence: (see Figure 8-2)

1. Controller turns on the Refill Cycle
3. Host activates the automatic refill device
5. Feed rate and motor speed secure at their last values before Refill Cycle
2. REFILL TIMER TIMES OUT-High level not reached before the Refill Timer
interval has expired.
1. Controller turns off the Refill Cycle
5. Refill Timer expires

1. Feed rate and motor speed reference the scale
Note: If the refill reached above the low level, the controller will try to refill when
the low level is reached again. If the level never gets above the Low Level Set
Point, the controller will not be able to turn on the Refill Cycle automatically. The
Refill Cycle will have to be started manually.
Overfill Refill Sequence: (see Figure 8-3)

Refill Mode 8-5

1. Controller turns on the Refill Cycle
3. Host activates the automatic refill device
5. Feed rate and motor speed secure at their last values before Refill Cycle
2. HIGH LEVEL-The controller senses that the material level has reached the
High Level Set Point.
1. Controller turns off the Refill
4. Refill Timer resets
3. OVERFILL LEVEL-Because the automatic refill device activates very slowly,

the material level has climbed above the High Level Set Point.
1. Overfill alarm is generated by the controller and displayed by the host
2. Acri-Lok Timer resets
3. Feed rate and motor speed remain secure for the duration of the Overfill
Alarm
4. OVERFILL LEVEL CLEAR-controller senses that the material level has

dropped down to the High Level Set Point.
1. Overfill Alarm is acknowledged and cleared at host

1. Feed rate and motor speed reference the scale
Figure 8-3 Overfill Refill Cycle
Overfill Overfill
Low Level Low Level
Low Level is reached and the High Level is reached, but slow
Refill cycle is initiated. actuation of refill device causes
an overfill condition.
8-6 SBC-2000
CHAPTER
9
GRAPHICS KDU OPERATION
CHAPTER9
Graphics Keyboard / Display Unit (KDU)

The SBC-2000 Controller may be used in conjunction with a keyboard/display unit
(KDU) that features a waterproof, super-twisted, page-white liquid crystal display
(LCD) with clear messages and data in English, German, French or Spanish,
visually providing all information regarding feeder operation. Just a few display
screens provide instant access to all controller and feeder information. For the
purposes of this chapter operation is described for a Loss-In-Weight feeder.
Operation of this KDU with weigh belts and other zero reference devices is
similar, but displays different feeder symbols. Upon power-up the display shows
the Feeder/Graph Screen (see Figures 9-1 and 9-2) that provides the following
information (differs slightly between Batch and Continuous modes):
• SET PT: Displays the present value of the Feed Rate Set Point whenever the
feeder is operating in the Continuous Mode. The Feed Rate Set Point is
entered directly from the numeric keypad whenever the Continuous Set Points
Screen (see Figure 9-3) is displayed (press the SET POINTS key to enter and/
or change the various Set Points). Press the SCROLL key while viewing the
Continuous Set Points Screen to toggle between Continuous and Batch Set
Points. The UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys allow selection.
Figure 9-1 Graphic Keyboard / Display Unit
Graphics KDU Operation 9-1

• F. RATE: Displays the actual feed rate whenever the feeder is operating in the
Continuous Mode.
• B. SIZE: Displays the present value of the Batch Size Set Point whenever the
feeder is operating in the Batch Mode, instead of the Feed Rate Set Point. The
Batch Size Set Point is entered directly from the numeric keypad whenever the
Batch Set Points Screen (see Figure 9-4) is displayed (press the SET POINTS
key to enter and/or change the various Set Points).
• B. FED: Displays the actual Batch Fed value, instead of the Feed Rate,
whenever the feeder is operating in the Batch Mode.
• FEEDER SYMBOL: Displays a Feeder or Pump symbol (selectable via
Operational Data Entry “ICON”) below a hopper and Indicates the relative level
of material in the supply hopper (or tank), the Run/Stop Status, the Alarm
Status, the Batch Status, the selected Refill Mode and the current Operating
Mode.
• HOPPER LEVEL SET POINTS: Indicate the relative positioning on Weight-
Loss-Differential Feeders’ supply hopper (or tank) for the High, Low, and
Empty Level Set Points based on their Operational Data Entries (Set Points). A
darkened square appears next to the "H" (High Level) when the level of product
in the hopper (or tank) reaches the High Level Set Point value during refill, and
remains there until the level of product falls below the High Level Set Point
value. A darkened square appears next to the "L" (Low Level) when the level of
product in the hopper (or tank) falls below the Low Level Set Point value during
operation of the feeder, and remains there until the level of product reaches the
Low Level Set Point value during refill. A darkened square appears next to the
"E" (Empty Level) when the level of product in the hopper (or tank) falls below
the Empty Level Set Point value during operation of the feeder, and remains
there until the level of product reaches the Empty Level Set Point value during
refill.
Two visual indications are provided to the user when a refill cycle is in
progress. First, the material shown in the hopper will rise as it refills, based
upon the gain in Scale Weight. Second, two vertical arrows will appear to the
left of the hopper symbol (See Fig 9-6) indicating that a refill cycle has been
initiated.
Figure 9-2 Main Screen Display—Batch Mode
9-2 SBC-2000
• STATUS BOX: The Status Box located to the left of the Feeder Symbol (see
Figure 9-2) contains three separate lines of information. The top line of the
Status Box always displays one of the following:
CONT (Continuous Mode) signifies that the SBC-2000 Controller is
operating in the Continuous Mode.
BRUN (Batch Run) appears whenever the SBC-2000 Controller is operating
in the Batch Mode and that a Batch is in progress.
DRIB (Dribble Speed) appears whenever the feeder meters product (in
Batch Mode) at the Dribble Speed Set Point.
BDLY (Batch Delay) is the period of time (in Batch Mode) beginning
immediately after a Batch completes and ending when the Batch Complete
digital output is enabled (energized).
BCMP (Batch Complete) appears whenever the SBC-2000 Controller has
completed a Batch. Starting a new Batch will reset the last Batch Complete
(de-energizes the Batch Complete digital output).
WAIT is the period of time (in Batch Mode) between the completion of one
Batch and the beginning of the next Batch in a series of Batches when the
Number of Batches is set for two or more.
TUNE (Autotune) appears whenever the Autotune sequence has been
selected and is in progress.
MAXR (Max Feed Rate) appears whenever the Max Feed Rate sequence
has been selected and is in progress.
NOTE: A "+" (plus sign) will appear immediately to the right of CONT,
BRUN, or DRIB when the feeder is operating in the Internal or External
Gravimetric Mode and a Fast Start is in effect.
The middle line of the Status Box always displays one of the following:
INTV (Internal Volumetric) appears whenever the SBC-2000 Controller
operates in the Internal Volumetric Mode.
EXTV (External Volumetric) appears whenever the SBC-2000 Controller
operates in the External Volumetric Mode.
INTG (Internal Gravimetric) appears whenever the SBC-2000 Controller
operates in the Internal Gravimetric Mode.
EXTG (External Gravimetric) appears whenever the SBC-2000 Controller
operates in the External Gravimetric Mode.
FAST (External Volumetric Fast Start) appears whenever the SBC-2000
Controller operates in the External Volumetric Fast Start Mode.
The bottom line of the Status Box always displays one of the following:
MAN (Manual Refill) appears whenever the SBC-2000 Controller operates a
Weight-Loss-Differential Feeder in the Manual Refill Mode, or whenever the
SBC-2000 Controller operates a Weigh Belt/Auger Feeder in the Manual
Rezero Mode.
AUTO (Automatic Refill) appears whenever the SBC-2000 Controller
operates a Weight-Loss-Differential Feeder in the Automatic Refill Mode, or
whenever the SBC-2000 Controller operates a Weigh Belt/Auger Feeder in
the Automatic Rezero Mode.
ALARM AREA: The space directly below the Status Box is reserved as an alarm
area (See Fig 9-5). When an alarm condition occurs, an alarm symbol (bell
symbol) with the associated alarm message (text) appears in this area. Up to
three separate alarm messages can appear at once, some indicating combined
alarms.
Since many alarms are mutually exclusive, they have been grouped for display
purposes. The following alarms are grouped together and can only appear on the
same line (alarms are abbreviated as shown):
Group #1: B DEV, FR DEV, ACRLOK, DEV+AK, OVRFIL

Group #2: SCALE, EMPTY, NO BAT
Group #3: OVERLD, FAULT, NOTACH
A darkened square or a small bell symbol will replace the larger alarm symbol
when an alarm condition has been acknowledged, but the alarm condition that
caused the alarm is still present.
When an alarm occurs while the operator is using the Set Points Screen or
viewing the Data Screen, a small Alarm Box will appear in the center of the
screen, covering that portion of the screen until the operator presses the CLR/
ACK key. If the operator returns to the Main Screen instead by pressing the
NEXT/LAST key, the alarm symbols will be presented as previously described for
the Main Screen. (See ERROR MESSAGES below).
Figure 9-3 Set Points Screen—Continuous Mode
GRAPH: The Graphics KDU provides a graphic display of one of 6 selectable

parameters whenever the feeder is operating in the Continuous Mode, or a
graphic display of the Batch Error in percent and Percent Complete whenever the
feeder is operating in the Batch Mode. Graphical plotting in the Continuous Mode
displays a maximum of 101 elements (points):
•
O perational Data Entry Description
This entry selects one of the following param eters:
0) Feed Rate Error %
1) Motor Speed %
G raph Param eter 2) Motor Current %
3) Hopper Level %
4) Scale W eight %
5) External Input %
This entry selects both the sam pling interval and the Y-
Axis range, and O ff. For Feed Rate Error graphing 4% or
20% ranges are available. All other G raph Param eters
use 0-100% and only the sam pling interval is used:
0) O ff
1) 15 Sec / 4%
2) 30 Sec / 4%
G raph Interval
3) 60 Sec / 4%
4) 90 Sec / 4%
5) 13 Sec / 20%
6) 30 Sec / 20%
7) 60 Sec / 20%
8) 90 Sec / 20%
9-4 SBC-2000
Figure 9-4 Set Points Screen—Batch Mode
NOTE: The scroll bar continues to move from left to right (in Continuous
Mode) even when the feeder is stopped, thus providing an accurate
recording with respect to time.
Figure 9-5 Main Screen—Commands (Continuous Mode)
Graphical plotting in the Batch Mode displays a maximum of 24 elements

(bars); each element represents a sampled Batch Error % (see Figure 9-2)
and is displayed at the completion of the Batch.
NOTE: Graphing in either the Continuous or Batch Mode can be prevented
by setting the Graph Interval to zero (see chart below Figure 9-3).
BATCH FED BAR (bc): The Graphics KDU provides a vertical bar graph
(display) of Batch % Complete when operating in the Batch Mode. The
range of the bar graph is 0–100% of Batch Size (see Figure 9-2).
MOTOR SPEED: The feeder motor symbol indicates the current value of the
actual feeder motor speed in percent of maximum speed (%) or in RPM (R),
depending on the Operational Data Entry setting “Motor Display.”

MOTOR LOAD: The feeder motor symbol indicates the present value of the
actual feeder motor current in DC amperes.
SCALE WEIGHT: The display indicates the current scale weight of a
Weight-Loss-Differential Feeder in weight units. Note that when the integral
supply hopper (or tank) is empty, the display will indicate zero weight units.
• ERROR MESSAGES: The upper right hand quadrant of the Main Screen is
also used to provide “messages” to the operator (See Fig 9-9). Error Messages
are a means of providing the operator with information about feeder operation
or operator procedures that don’t rise to the level of an alarm. Error Messages,
however, may be a precursor to an alarm and should be responded to quickly.
When an Error Message appears on the Main Screen it will cover the area of
the Graph and/or Command Screen until the CLR/ACK key is pressed. An
Error Message can also appear when the Set Points Screen or the Data
Screen is displayed. In such cases a slightly smaller message window will
appear in the center of the screen, covering the original screen until the CLR/
ACK key is pushed.
If both an Alarm and an Error Message appear simultaneously, one will be
presented over the other. Each must be individually acknowledged.
Power On-Off Cycle

The Power OFF/ON Switch is typically located on the front of the enclosure in
which the SBC-2000 is mounted. This switch is not for starting or stopping the
feeder. The RUN and STOP keys start and stop the feeder. When an SBC-2000
Controller is first turned on, a start-up sequence begins. First, the display is
tested, then the Program Version is displayed, and finally, the Feeder/Graph
Screen (see Figure 9-1) appears.
Membrane Touch Panel

The SBC-2000 Controller incorporates a touch-activated membrane keyboard,
without moving parts, to provide the highest degree of reliability and resistance to
environmental conditions. The controller includes visual, audible and tactile
feedback of key depressions to confirm the user's desired selection. The keys are
used in conjunction with the Graphic Keyboard/Display Unit to allow accessing or
entering operational and/or control data. The Graphic Keyboard/Display Unit
contains a numeric keypad and thirteen keys: RUN, STOP, UP ARROW, DOWN
ARROW, LEFT ARROW, RIGHT ARROW, NEXT/LAST, SET POINTS,
COMMANDS, SCROLL, CLR/ACK (Clear/Acknowledge), # (number sign),
DECIMAL PT and ENTER. The following Sections describe the operation of these
keys.
Keyboard Lock
The Graphics KDU may be locked to prevent unauthorized operation, such as
starting or stopping the associated feeder, changing modes or changing
parameter values. This function is managed by the password-protected Keyboard
Lock Operational Data Entry (described in Appendix A). Keyboard Lock may be
set via the Graphics KDU itself, or via serial communication with the controller,
which holds the setting.
When the Graphics KDU is locked, a small padlock symbol will be displayed at the
lower left hand corner of the Main Screen, as shown in Figure 9-2.
9-6 SBC-2000
Figure 9-6 Main Screen—Commands (Batch Mode)
SET POINTS Key

Press the SET POINTS key at any time to display either of the Set Point
Screens (see Figures 9-3 and 9-4). While viewing either Set Point Screen, the
user can change various Continuous or Batch Mode Set Points and other
variables. The user presses the UP_ARROW and DOWN_ARROW keys to
advance the highlighted item to the desired selection. Enter the desired value
and press the ENTER key.
The following Continuous Set Point selections are available from the
Continuous Set Points Screen (see Figure 9-3):
• SET RATE: When the SBC-2000 Controller is in Internal Gravimetric
Mode, this selection indicates the currently active value (in memory) of the
desired feed rate in weight units per hour.
• RATIO SET PT: When the controller is in External Gravimetric Mode, this
selection indicates the currently active value (in memory) of the desired
Feed Rate Ratio in percent.
• SET POINT: When in Internal Volumetric Mode, this selection indicates the
currently active value (in memory) of the desired Feeder Motor Speed, in
percent of Maximum Speed.
• RATIO SET PT: When the controller is in External Volumetric Mode, this
selection indicates the currently active value (in memory) of the desired
Feeder Motor Speed Ratio in percent.
• BULK DEN: The bulk density of the product being fed, in weight units. The
value may be viewed or changed here without entering the Operational
Data Table.
• TOTAL FED 1: Total Fed 1 indicates the amount of material fed, in weight
units, since last clearing the total. Totalization can continue to a maximum
of 999,999 units before overflow. The Total Fed 1 display contains six
significant digits only. The decimal point will shift as the total increases. To
clear the present value, highlight TOTAL FED 1, enter a 0 and then press
the ENTER key.
units, since last clearing the total. Totalization can continue to a maximum
of 999,999 units before overflow. The Total Fed 2 display contains six
significant digits only. The decimal point will shift as the total increases. To
clear the present value, highlight TOTAL FED 2, enter a 0 and then press
the ENTER key.

NOTE: Total Fed 1 and Total Fed 2 are cleared (reset) independently of
one another.
• ACRI-LOK SETPT: The Acri-Lok Set Point establishes the allowable
instantaneous deviation of feed rate from the preset value before entering
an Acri-Lok condition. Once in Acri-Lok, the SBC-2000 Controller will
cause the feeder to continuously feed in a Volumetric Mode, until the
disturbance that triggered Acri-Lok ceases, and for whatever period of time
was entered in the Acri-Lok Timer Operational Data Entry. Generally, the
Acri-Lok Set Point Value is about 10%. Enter a value of 0 to disable the
Acri-Lok function.
Figure 9-7 Data Screen—Batch Mode
The following Batch Set Point selections are available from the Batch Set Points
Screen (see Figure 9-4):
• BATCH SIZE: Indicates the currently active value, in memory, of the
desired Batch Size Set Point in weight units from 0.001–999999.
• BATCH TRIM: The Batch Trim Value (in weight units) trims the actual
Batch amount fed to match the desired Batch Size entered. The Batch
Trim value is determined by operating the feeder in the Batch Mode,
entering a Batch Size and taking several weight samples to establish the
actual Batch amount. If the actual amount of the Batch differs from the
desired Batch Size, then enter the actual amount fed in weight units. If a
Batch Trim is not required, a 0 should be entered.
9-8 SBC-2000
Figure 9-8 Data Screen—Continuous Mode
• BAT PREACT: The Batch Preact value compensates for material in flight
from one device to another. The SBC-2000 Controller will subtract this
value (in weight units) from the Batch Size Set Point. This is useful in
Batch-In applications where a volumetric feeder meters product into a
scale-mounted hopper (or tank), or in applications where both a volumetric
feeder and a weigh feeder meter products to another device.
• DRIBBLE SPEED: The Dribble Speed Set Point is used to set the Motor
Speed when the Dribble Point (see below) is reached during an active
batch. The Dribble Speed Set Point can be changed at any time before, or
during a batch, if necessary.
• DRIBBLE POINT: The Dribble Point is selected as the weight remaining to
be fed in the batch at which the Feeder Motor Speed is switched to the
Dribble Speed (Set Point) as entered above.
• BATCH COUNTER: Indicates the current number, in memory, of batches
completed since last clearing the counter. To clear the present value,
highlight BATCH COUNTER, press the CLR/ACK key and then press the
ENTER key.
• NUMBER OF BATCHES: This is the number of batches which will run
consecutively, in conjunction with the Batch Interval Entry (see below),
when a start command is initiated. If running single batches, the minimum
entered value is one.
BATCH INTRVL: The period of time between consecutive batches when the
Number of Batches Entry (see above) is greater than one. If running single
batches, this entry can be ignored.

Figure 9-9 Main Screen—Message (Continuous Mode)
COMMANDS Key
Press the COMMANDS key at any time to display either of the Feeder/Commands
Screens (see Figures 9-5 and 9-6). While viewing a Feeder/Commands Screen,
the user can change Operating and/or Control Modes and initiate Autotune and
Max Rate sequences. When viewing an Operational Data Entries Screen, press
the COMMANDS key to alternate the SCROLL key's function between forward
(page up) and reverse (page down) scrolling.
The following Command Selections are available from the Feeder/Commands
Screens:
• START A REFILL: Press the 0 key to initiate a refill cycle if below High.
• STOP A REFILL: Press the 0 key to terminate a refill cycle in progress.
• INT VOL: Press the 1 key to cause the indicated Control Mode to take
effect. Press the SCROLL key to cause the display to indicate an alternate
Control Mode selection. The SCROLL key will advance (or sequence)
through INT GRAV (Internal Gravimetric Control), EXT GRAV (External
Gravimetric Control), INT VOL (Internal Volumetric Control), and EXT VOL
(External Volumetric Control) to EXT FAST (External Volumetric Fast
Start) selections.
• AUTO REFILLS: Current refill mode is Manual Refill Mode. Press the 2 key
to cause the controller to switch from Manual Refill Mode to Automatic
Refill Mode.
• MANUAL REFILLS: Current refill mode is Automatic Refill Mode. Press the
2 key to cause the controller to switch from Automatic Refill Mode to
Manual Refill Mode.
• BATCH MODE: Current operating mode is Continuous Mode. Press the 3
key to cause the controller to switch from Continuous Mode to Batch
Mode.
• CONTINUOUS MODE: Current operating mode is Batch Mode. Press the
3 key to cause the controller to switch from Batch Mode to Continuous
Mode.
• CLEAR GRAPH: Press the 4 key to clear the currently displayed Graph.
• START AUTOTUNE: Press the 5 key and enter the correct password to
initiate an Autotune sequence.
9-10 SBC-2000
• START MAX RATE: Press the 6 key and enter the correct password to
initiate a Max Feed Rate sequence.
• LOAD A RECIPE: Press the 7 key (in Continuous Mode or the 8 key in
Batch Mode) to load a previously-saved Recipe.
• SAVE A RECIPE: Press the 8 key (in Continuous Mode or the 9 key in
Batch Mode) and enter the correct password to store the savable
parameters to NV Memory as a Recipe.
• ABORT A BATCH: Press the 7 key to abort the current batch in progress.
This selection is only viewable and selectable when operating in the Batch
Mode.
NEXT/LAST Key
From the Main Screen, press the NEXT/LAST key once to view the Data Screen;
press it again to return to the Main Screen. When viewing any other screen press
the NEXT/LAST key once to return to the Main Screen.
The following values are view-only from the Data Screen depending on whether
Continuous or Batch Mode has been selected (see Figures 9-7 and 9-8):
• BATCH COUNTER: Indicates the current number, in memory, of batches
completed since last clearing the counter.
• REMAINING BATCHES: The number of batches which must be completed
to equal the Number of Batches entry.
units, since the value was last cleared.
units, since the value was last cleared.
• EXT INPUT: The current value of the External Input Signal in percent of
maximum from 0 to 100.00 percent.
• COMP SET: When operating in the External Gravimetric Mode, the
Composite Feed Rate Set Point is in weight units, calculated from the
External Input Signal, Ratio Set Point and the Input Span.
When operating in the Internal Gravimetric Mode, the Composite Feed
Rate Set Point Value is the last entered Internal Feed Rate Set Point in
weight units.
When operating in the External Volumetric Mode, the Composite Motor
Speed Set Point Value is the percent of maximum speed, calculated from
the External Input Signal and the Ratio Set Point.
When operating in the Internal Volumetric Mode, the Composite Motor
Speed Set Point Value is the last entered Internal Motor Speed Set Point.
• SCALE WEIGHT: The Scale Weight in percent of Maximum Scale
Capacity.
• SCALE SIGNAL: The current value of the Scale Signal received from the
Weight Resolver Computational Module, in the range 1–1,048,576.
• MEAN: The Feed Rate Mean computed from the last 60 samples taken at
the user-specified sample interval.
• CV: The Feed Rate Coefficient of Variation computed from the last 60
samples taken at the user-specified sample interval.
• STD DEVIATION: The Standard Deviation of feed rate computed from the
last 60 samples taken at the user-specified sample interval.
• CPK: The Process Capability Index. This is computed, while running, from
a population of samples and may take some time to appear on the display.
• HOPPER LEVEL: The current level of material, in the integral storage
hopper (or tank), in percent of maximum capacity.

• Other Data: Indicates the various Program Levels presently installed in the
SBC-2000 Controller. The following example indicates the Program
Version coding utilized with the SBC-2000 Controller.
Example = “CPU A01 w/Emulation”
CPU–Program Identifier (CPU)
A–Hardware Level (A = Version 1 Hardware; B = Version 2 Hardware)
01–Software Version Number
“w/Emulation”–Indicates that the controller has feeder emulation
capability built-in.
NOTE: The Display Messages will vary by configuration and Software

Revision Level.
SCROLL Key
The SCROLL key continues or advances the displayed information from one
screen to another. When viewing a Set Points Screen (see Figures 9-3 and 9-4),
press the SCROLL key to advance from Batch Set Points to Continuous Set
Points and back. When viewing a Feeder/Commands Screen (see Figures 9-5
and 9-6), press the SCROLL key to advance through the available control modes
and selections.
Cursor Keys
Press and hold the UP ARROW key for more (screen) contrast and the DOWN
ARROW key for less (screen) contrast at any time except when viewing Set
Points, Commands or Operational Data Entries. The UP ARROW and DOWN
ARROW keys scroll the highlighted selection up and down through the Set Points
and Operational Data Entries as well.
When FEEDER ID is selected from the Operational Data Entries Table, the LEFT
ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys scroll, backward or forward, through all the
alphabet letters (a-z and A-Z), plus symbols, as indicated on the display.
Numerals are entered directly via the numeric keys. Press CLR/ACK first for
alphas.
RUN Key / STOP Key

The RUN and STOP keys start and stop the feeder motor. Pressing the RUN key
causes the feeder motor to start; pressing the STOP key always causes the
feeder motor to stop.
NOTE: Pressing the STOP key after beginning Password Entry for a command
that requires Password Entry will stop the feeder. However, you will need to clear
the INCORRECT PASSWORD MESSAGE and re-enter the password again in
order to proceed.
Numeric Keys / Operational Data Entries

The numeric keys consist of the numerals 0–9 (for data entry), decimal point and
the # (number sign) key.
The numeric keys allow the user to enter values for set points and other feeder
Operational Data Entries. After entering number(s), press the ENTER key to
confirm and activate your entry.
The decimal point key allows the user to enter a decimal point for set points and
other feeder Operational Data Entries. After entering numbers and a decimal
point, press the ENTER key to confirm and activate your entry.
9-12 SBC-2000
The “#” key accesses the Operational Data Entry Table. Some operating and
control parameters can only be accessed or entered through the Operational Data
Entry Table. To enter the Operational Data Entry Mode, press the # (number sign)
key while viewing either Feeder/Graph Screen (see Figures 9-1 or 9-2). Enter the
current password using the numeric keys. The default password is “1 2 3 4” (this
can be changed when in the Operational Data Entry Table). As each number is
pressed, a dash (-) appears on the display. After all four numbers are pressed,
press the ENTER key. In the Operational Data Table, pressing the UP_ARROW
and DOWN_ARROW keys causes the highlighted item to move up and down.
When the desired parameter is highlighted, the user may enter a new value by
using the numeric keys and then pressing the ENTER key. To exit the Operational
Data Entry Table and return to normal Operating Mode, press the NEXT/LAST
key.
Please refer to Appendix A for more details, including accessing Help Screens.
Figure 9-10 Help Screen (Typical)
Available Motor Controllers:

----------------------------
0 - No motor controller connected
1 - Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 40
2 - Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 70 or 700
3 - Telemechanique, SQUARE-D and
Altivar 28/31
4 - WEG Model CFM09
5 - Yaskawa F7
6 - ABB ACS 350/550
7 - Telemechanique, SQUARE-D and
- Altivar 71
8 - Delta VFD-E
PAGE 2 < back> # -EXITS HELP
CLR/ACK Key
CLR/ACK (Clear/Acknowledge) is a multi-function key that will clear any enterable
parameter. It will also acknowledge any alarm that is pending and remove the
displayed error message, if the cause of the alarm has been properly restored to
its normal condition.
ENTER Key
The ENTER key confirms that the keyed-in value is satisfactory and should be
accepted by the SBC-2000 Controller.
ALARM LED
The Alarm LED illuminates whenever the SBC-2000 Controller senses an alarm
condition. Acknowledging the current alarm extinguishes the Alarm LED.

RUNNING LED
The Running LED provides a positive indication that the SBC-2000 Controller is
operating the feeder. The Running LED is “On” whenever the feeder is running
and “Off” whenever the feeder is stopped.
ADDRESSABLE KEYBOARD
Figure 9-11 Main Screen—Addressable Keyboard (Continuous Mode)
A single SBC-2000 Graphics KDU can be used as an “Addressable

Keyboard” to communicate with up to 20 SBC-2000 Controllers instead of,
or in addition to, having a separate Graphics KDU provided for each
controller. In this configuration all the controllers are parallel-connected to a
single communications channel and are all accessible to the Graphics KDU.
This type of configuration is most commonly used for providing maintenance
functions and access to seldom changed parameters while a host computer,
DCS, or PLC provides the normal operating functions for the controllers.
Upon power-up, a Graphics KDU configured in this way will scan for a
controller beginning at Station Address #1 and will increment the Station
Address through Station Address #20, or until a controller is found. Once a
controller is discovered full communication is established with the controller
and the normal Main Screen is drawn. The Graphics KDU is then fully
functional.
Switching the Graphics KDU to a different controller is accomplished by
pressing the Right Arrow button on the keypad while on the Main Screen.
The display will change to that shown in Figure 9-10 above. To switch to
another controller, enter its 2-digit Station Address using the numeric
keyboard and then press ENTER. The CLR/ACK button can be used to
erase an entry. The NEXT/LAST key will erase the SELECT/SCROLL
window and return the Main Screen to its normal display without changing
the controller.
When a Station Address is entered, the screen will clear and the Graphics
KDU will attempt to communicate with the controller at the Station Address
entered. If it is unable to establish communications with that controller it will
9-14 SBC-2000
automatically search for the first available controller by repeatedly
incrementing the Station Address and trying again.
The “SELECT/SCROLL” window is provided in order to assist the user in
identifying the desired controller and its Station Address. The window initially
shows the Station Address and Feeder ID for the first 5 of the possible 20
Station Addresses with which the Graphics KDU can communicate. If no
controller is found at a particular Station Address, or if no Feeder ID value
has been entered in the controller’s Operational Data Entry, the Feeder ID
for that controller will be blank as shown above for Station Addresses 3, 4
and 5. To show the next 5 Station Addresses, press the SCROLL button on
the keypad. Repeated pressing of the SCROLL key will cause the window to
cycle through all 20 possible Station Addresses.
Once connected to a controller the Graphics KDU is dedicated to
communication with only that controller until changed.

9-16 SBC-2000
CHAPTER
10
COLOR GRAPHICS KDU OPERATION
CHAPTER 10
OVERVIEW
Technical Overview
Acrison’s Color Graphics KDU (Keyboard/Display Unit) utilizes a bright (500 nits)
320 x 240, 5.7 inch color TFT screen instead of the monochrome LCD screen
used in Acrison’s traditional Graphics KDU. Along with the improved appearance
that color offers, this water tight and dust tight display has wider viewing angles
and a greater operating temperature range (+5°C to +80°C). The keyboard has a
rugged aluminum face, uses piezo electric technology instead of contact closures
on the keybuttons for improved reliability (rated to 50,000,000 operations) and
includes a built-in infrared port with full access to parameters and functions within
the associated controller. The infrared port supplements the variety of
communications ports already available within the controller, and is mainly
provided for compatibility with earlier Acrison controller options. The Color KDU
uses a state-of-the-art 32-bit ARM processor.
Main/Remote Operation
The KDU can be used as a main KDU and, when mechanically coupled with an
Acrison controller, forms Acrison’s SBC-2000 DSP/C Controller. It may also be
used separately with an SBC-2000 CM Controller and can be mounted locally or
up to 4,000 feet from the controller. The Color KDU can also function as a second
KDU for either type controller, or as a common KDU for up to 20 SBC-2000 CM or
DSP Controllers. The “DSP/REM” jumper on the KDU’s circuit board selects the
mode of operation. Some functional limitations apply to the remote mode of
operation as described later in this chapter.
The Color KDU supports controller operation with any of Acrison’s many feeder
models including weight loss and zero reference belt and rotary feeder models.
Graphics
The Color KDU can display a variety of icons to support the different types of
feeders with which it can be used. The Main, or Combo Screen, shown on the
Quick Reference Guide (QRG) below displays a feeder icon on the left side of the
screen representing the type of feeder being controlled. Series 400 icons can be
selected by the operator through the SETPOINTS/CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION/ICON
Operational Data Entry.
A graph can be displayed on the right hand side of the Combo Screen as shown.
This graph can contain up to three trend lines simultaneously updated at a user-
selected interval using selectable range settings.
Along with the feeder icon several parameters are displayed. The description of
each is shown in the QRG. Note that not all parameters shown appear for every
feeder type.
The screen design generally follows that of other Acrison controllers in the SBC-
2000 Family, minimizing training time for current users. This design provides a
Color Graphics KDU Operation 10-1

SBC-2000 DSP/C OPERATOR’S QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE
Keyboard, Screens and Navigation

STATION NUMBER/FEEDER ID/CONTROL

SBC2000DSP/COPERATOR’SQUICKREFERENCEGUIDE REAL TIME GRAPH. UP TO 3 USER-SELECTED
MODE/OPUse the
MODE keybutton to enter a Keyboard,Screens&Navigation PARAMETERS AT A USER-SPECIFIED
Use the and softkeys to move up
value,
+ OPERATOR or to check / uncheck choices
MESSAGES INTERVAL AND WITH ADJUSTABLE RANGES
or down when making selections
BATCH MODE CAN DISPLAY A BAR GRAPH
OF BATCH DEVIATION AND LOG BATCHES:
AUTO/MANUAL REFILL MODE
STATIONNUMBER/FEEDERID/CONTROL REALTIMEGRAPH.UPTO3USERSELECTED
HIGH, LOW, EMPTY SETTINGS
MODE/OPMODE.
+OPERATORMESSAGES PARAMETERSATASELECTABLEINTERVAL
ANIMATED BATCHMODECANDISPLAYABARGRAPHOF
FEEDER ICON (SELECTABLE VIA
SET SCREENS) BATCHDEVIATIONANDALSOLOGBATCHES:
AUTO/MANUALREFILLMODE
HIGH,LOW,EMPTYSETTINGS

MOTOR SPEED (% OR RPM)

ANIMATEDFEEDERICON(SELECTABLE
MOTOR CURRENT (AMPS)
VIASETPTSSCREENS)

SCALE WEIGHT (LBS, KG)
MOTORSPEED(%ORRPM)

MOTORCURRENT(AMPS) TOTAL FED 1 AND 2 VALUES UPDATE AT ¼
FEED RATE
(WT / HOUR) SECOND INTERVALS (LB KG GM)

SCALEWEIGHT(LB,KG,GM)
FEED RATE SET POINT (WT/HR OR /MIN)
SOFTKEY MEANINGS (ASSOCIATED WITH
ENTER DIRECTLY FROM THIS SCREEN.
FEEDRATE(WT/HOUR/MIN) HARDWARE BUTTONS BELOW THE SCREEN)

TOTALFED1AND2VALUES(LB/KG/GM)
FEEDRATESETPOINT(WT/HRORMIN)
STATUS BAR INDICATES RUNNING, DRIBBLE, CLEAR ENTRY/ALARM ACK
CLEARENTRY/ALARMACK
KBD LOCK,ORBATCHSIZEENTERDIRECTLYFROM
ETC. DISPLAYHELPORREMOTESCREENS
THISSCREEN.SHOWSLOCK.
DISPLAY HELP / REMOTE KEYBOARD

SOFTKEYS (MEANING SHOWN ABOVE THE SCREENS
STATUSBARINDICATESRUNNING,
KEY) DRIBBLE,KBDLOCK,ALARMS,ETC.

RUN / START FEEDER
SOFTKEYMENUBAR

STOP THESOFTKEYS(MEANINGSHOWNABOVE
FEEDER

THEKEYINMENUBAR).

RUN/STARTFEEDER INFRARED COMM PORT

STOPTHEFEEDER INFRAREDCOMMPORT
Softkey Menus
SoftkeyMenubars
ViewSetpointsCommandsSettings
View Setpoints Commands Settings
ComboDataGraphLog
Combo Data Graph Log
10-2 SBC-2000
COMMONLY USED OPERATIONAL DATA ENTRIES

ʹ͸ͲǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǲǳʹ͸Ͳ Ǥ ǤǤǤ ǯǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ǦǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǡͲǦͳͲͲǤ
Ǥ
ȋ͓ȌȗǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǡͲǦ͸ͲǡǤǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ȋ͓ȌȗǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤȋͳα ǡǲʹǳα ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ǲ͵ǳαǡǲͶǳαǡǲͷǳαȌǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ ǦͳǤͷǦʹ Ǥ
ȋ͓ȌȗǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤͲǦͻͻͻǡͻͻͻȋͲǦͶͲͻͷȌǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ȋ͓ȌȗǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ ǡǤ ȀǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤȀǤǤ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤȀǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǲ ǳǤ
ȋ͓ȌȗǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǡͲǦ͸Ͳǡ͓Ǥ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ ǤǤǤ
ȋ͓ȌȗǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ͓ǣ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤȋȌǤ
Ͳα Ͷα ͺα ͳʹα ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ͳα ͷα ͻα ͳ͵α ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ʹα ͳ ͸αȋΨȌ ͳͲα ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
͵α ͹αΨ ͳͳα ʹ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ ͶͲͲȋͲα
ǡͳαǤǡʹα
ǡ͵α
ȌǤ
ȋ͓ȌȗǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ͓ǡͲǦͻͻͻǡͻͻͻǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǡͲǦͳʹͲǤǡ Ǥ
ȀǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤʹͲͲǣ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤͲαǡͳαǡʹαǤ
ͲαǤʹͲ͵ ͳαʹͲ͵ ʹαʹ͸Ͳ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
͵αʹͲ͵ȀǤ ͶαʹͲ͵Ȁ ͷαʹͲ͵Ǥ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
͸αʹͲ͵Ǥǡ ͹αʹ͹Ͳ ȀǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǡǡǤ ʹǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ ǦͳǤͷǦʹǤ Ǥ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǡͲǦͻͻͻǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤȋͳͺͲͲ͵ͲͲͲȌǤ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǡǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ ͳͲͲΨǤ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǲ
ǦǦǳǲǦǦǳǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǣ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǦǦǡ
ǦǦǡǤ Ͳα Ͷα
Ͳͻ ͺα Ǧ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǲǦ ǳǤ ͳα ͶͲ ͷα ͹Ȁ
͹ ͻα͹
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ Ǥ ʹα ͹Ͳ͹ͲͲ ͸α͵ͷͲȀͷͷͲ ͳͲαͲ͸ͲȀ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǡͲǦͻͻͻǤ ͵αʹͺȀ͵ͳȀ͵ͳʹǡǦ ͹α͹ͳǡǦǡ ͳͳα ͹ͲȀ͹ͲͲ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤͷǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤͲαǡͳαǤ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤʹ͸ͲǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǦǤ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
Ǥ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ ǡʹͷΨǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ǡͲǤͲͳͻͻͻͻǤͲͲǤ
ͲȀȀ͓ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤͳ͸ͲǡǦǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤͶͻͻͻǤ
ʹ͓ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤͳ͸ʹǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ Ȁ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ Ǥ
ȀȀ
ȀǤ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǯǤǤ Ǥ͓ͳǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤΨǤȋͲǦ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǡͲǦʹǤͷǤǲͲǤǳ ͻͻͻȌǤ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ ͲǦͳͲͲȋǲͲǳȌǤ Ǥ͓ʹǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤΨǤȋͲǦ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ ǢͲǦͻͻͻǤ ͻͻͻȌǤ
ȏ͓ȐǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ ǯǤ
Ͳα ͷαǤ ͳͲα
Ȁ ͳͷαʹ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ ȋǲͲ̶ ȌǤ
ͳα ͸αǤ ͳͳαǤ
Ȁ
ͳ͸αǤ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ʹα ͹α ͳʹαȀ ͳ͹α ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤʹͲͲȋȌǤ
͵α ͺαǤ ͳ͵α ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤʹͲͲ Ǥ
Ͷα ͻα ͳͶαͳ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤͲǦͻͻʹͲͲǤ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤȋͲȌȋͳȌǤ
ȏ͓ȐȗǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤͶ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤȋͲǦ͵ȌǤ
ͶǤǦǣ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
Ͳα ͳͳα ʹʹα ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ͳα ͳʹα ʹ͵α ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ͹ͷΨǤ
ʹα ͳ͵α ʹͶα ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
͵α ͳͶα ʹͷα Ǥ
Ͷα ͳͷα ʹ͸α ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǡͳͻͻǤ
ͷα ͳ͸α ʹ͹α ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ͸ͲǡƬǤ
͸α ͳ͹α ʹͺαΪȀǦ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǲ ǳǤͳʹǦ͸ͲǤ
͹α ͳͺα ʹͻαʹ ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤͲǦ͸ͲǡǤ
ͺα ͳͻαΪ ͵Ͳα ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤͲǦ͸ͲǡǤ
ͻα ʹͲαǦ ͵ͳα ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǦǤ
ͳͲα ʹͳα ͵ʹα ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ
ǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤǤ Ǥ

*Optional equipment required
OPERATIONAL SUMMARY
INTERNAL MODE OPERATION EXTERNAL MODE OPERATION BATCHING MODE OPERATION
1. Select CONTINUOUS Operating Mode from Command 1. Select CONTINUOUS Mode of operation from 1. Select BATCH Mode of operation from
Screen 2 (Operating Mode). Command Screen 2 (Operating Mode). Command Screen 2/ Operating Mode.
2. Select Control Mode as either INT VOL (Motor Speed), or 2. Select Operating Mode from the Command Screen 2 2. Select Control Mode for Feeder from
INT GRAV (Feed Rate Control) from Command Screen 2 as either EXT VOL (External Motor Speed control), Command Screen 2/ Control Mode selection
(Control Mode). EXT GRAV (External Feed Rate Control), or as described under “Internal” or “External”
3. Enter the Feed Rate Set Point desired (percent Motor EXTERNAL FAST (External Fast Mode ignores Start Modes.
Speed if INT VOL Mode, or pounds per hour, if INT Delay, External Input Span and ramping interval) and 3. Select desired Batching Mode as “Gain-in-
GRAV Mode) from the Main Screen or from the Set enter the Operational Data Entries shown in “Internal Weight” or “Loss-in-Weight” in the Operational
Points/ Continuous Set Points Screen. Mode” Step 7. Data Entry called “Batch In”.
4. Select AUTO or MAN Refill Mode from Commands 3. If in EXT GRAV Mode, enter the following Analog 4. Enter the following optional Operational Data
Screen 2, and verify that material is available for feeding Input Operational Data Entries: Entries, if desired or required:
in the Hopper. If using AUTO Refill Mode, ensure that AIN SEL AIN DEL Batch Deviation Set Point
Low Level Set Point, High Level Set Point and Bulk AIN Span AIN SPAN EV Batch Delay
Density Set Points have been entered. Ensure that an External Control Signal is present No Batch Alarm Timer
5. If any Digital In has been set to Permissive Run, be sure (displayed on the Data Screen). Batch-lok Set Point
that the contact is closed, unless it is being used as a 4. Enter Ratio Set Point. When in External mode this will 5. Enter the Batch size desired. If using Loss-in-
Remote Run contact. be the current Set Point that is entered on the Main Weight Mode and Batch Size is greater than
6. If in INT GRAV Mode, ensure that there is no SCALE, Screen. It is also available on the Set Points Screen. material in Hopper, ensure that Auto Refill
OVERFILL, or FAULT alarm present. 5. Select AUTO or MAN Refill Mode from the Command Mode is selected. If using the Gain-in-Weight
7. Verify that the following Operational Data Entries have Screen, and verify that material is available for Mode, the Batch Size must not exceed the
been entered: feeding. If using AUTO Refill Mode, ensure that the capacity of the Scale.
Proportional Maximum Feed Rate Low Level Set Point, High Level Set Point and Bulk 6. Enter the Preset Number of Batches desired.
Integral Mid Feed Rate Density Operational Data Entries have been entered. 7. Enter the desired Dribble Point and Dribble
Derivative Hopper Size 6. If any Digital In has been set to Permissive Run, be Speed Set Points.
Scale Empty Chamber Size sure that the contact is closed, unless it is being used 8. Enter the Batch Trim, if required.
Scale Full Start Band as a Remote Run contact. 9. If any Digital In has been set to Permissive
Maximum Scale Weight 7. If in EXT GRAV Mode, ensure that there is no Run, be sure that the contact is closed, unless
8. Enter additional desired, or required, Operational Data SCALE, OVERFILL, or FAULT alarm present. it is being used as a Remote Run contact.
Entries e.g. Acri-Lok Set Point, Deviation Set Point, etc. 8. Press the RUN (I) Keybutton to turn on the Feeder. If 10. Press the RUN (I) Keybutton to start the Batch.
9. Press RUN (I) Keybutton to turn on the Feeder. If the the Feeder fails to start a message should appear
feeder fails to start, a message should appear explaining explaining why.
why.
302-0877/B/6-10/1K Copyright 2010 – Acrison, Inc. –all rights reserved

field-proven information display that gathers the most important feeder operating
parameters and displays them on a single screen.
Organization
The Color KDU functions are divided into 12 primary screens plus a number of
“sub screens” associated with functions, such as Operational Data Entries and
Commands, where all items would not fit on a single screen. There are five major
categories of screens:
1) Main Screen
2) Set Points Screens (primarily associated with Operational Data Entries)
3) Commands Screens
4) Graph Screens
5) Miscellaneous
Keybuttons and Softkeys

The keyboard itself uses icons for several of its keybuttons, reflecting the global
market it addresses. The “Run” or “Start” keybutton is green, with a “I” inside. The
“Stop” keybutton is red with a “0” inside. The “Clear” keybutton contains the letter
“C” plus a symbol signifying the dual acknowledge function that it serves.
Similarly, a second keybutton is used to activate the “Help” function (? symbol) as
well as optional functions (# symbol). The Carriage Return, or “Enter” keybutton,
is shown as a back arrow next to the “9” keybutton.
In order to provide a simple, uncluttered keyboard, four “softkeys,” or keys whose
meaning changes according to program use, have been incorporated into the
design. The softkeys are the primary means of navigating to and from the various
screens that are available in the Color KDU. The QRG above — available
separately in laminated form — illustrates how different screens are selected
using the softkeys.
In addition to navigating the various screens of the KDU, the softkeys provide
auxiliary functions during editing. For example, up and down arrows and Cancel
functions replace screen navigation information in order to provide the means for
navigating lists of set points or commands and for editing values.
Navigating Screens Using the Quick Reference Guide

The QRG describes each of the items appearing on the Combo Screen of the
display (called the “Combo” Screen because it combines both the feeder icon and
the graph section onto a single screen). In addition, the paths to the various
supplementary screens are shown with arrows that originate at the softkey
menus. Note that the softkey menu can change depending on the screen chosen.
The various screens identified in the QRG are displayed on the actual KDU by
pressing one or more softkeys in order to follow the arrows shown, starting from
the Combo Screen. For example, to select a parameter to graph, the leftmost
softkey must read “Combo.” If it reads “View” press that softkey to change to the
Combo Menubar. Then press the softkey labeled “Graph,” to display the Graph
Screen. On the Graph Screen, the softkeys change to View-Setpoints-
Commands-Prefs. Press “Prefs” to display the Graph Prefs Screen where the
parameter to graph can be selected. All screens have a softkey menubar for
navigating among the various screens that are available.
Status Bar
The Status Bar (see QRG) appears on a number of screens and provides
miscellaneous information related to various functions within the Color KDU. On
10-4 SBC-2000
the left side, a circular icon will “spin” when the feeder is actually feeding material.
This is primarily used when on a screen other than the Combo Screen. Text will
appear next to the icon to further describe the present controller condition,
including *REFILL*, RUNNING, RUNNING-FSTART and STOPPED as well as
sub-states of a running batch including INTERVAL, COMPLETE, DRIBBLE,
DELAY and WAIT.
In the middle of the Status Bar there are three dark boxes. Each box can display
an active alarm. See Figures 10-2 and 10-7 for examples.
On the right side of the Status Bar two icons can appear either separately or
together (shown below). The first is a padlock icon. It indicates that the keyboard
has been locked and no keybuttons are active except the unlock code (password)
and the Stop keybutton. This is a local lock, performed through the keyboard. The
second icon, symbolizing an external host, indicates that the host device has
locked the keyboard. This lock cannot be unlocked from the keyboard. Only the
host device can unlock the keyboard when this icon is displayed.
COMBO SCREEN
(Please refer to the QRG above and to Fig. 10-1 below). This is the main screen
of the display and is typically the first screen to appear on power-up. Its purpose is
to provide the operator with a single screen displaying the most important
information associated with running a feeder. On this and other screens in the
KDU the units of measure that are used reflect the settings in the controller for the
Operational Data Entry SETPOINTS/CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION/SELECT UNITS.
NOTE: The current operating set point, continuous or batch, can be changed
directly from this screen by simply entering the desired value using the keyboard.
Approximately the left third of the Combo Screen shows several refreshing items
that describe the feeder’s operation. These items are constantly refreshed:
1) Feeder Icon: For Acrison Series 400 (loss-in-weight) and volumetric feeders
the symbol representing the feeder that appears on the left side of the Combo
Screen can be selected by the user to match the type of feeder in use. This
selection is the SETPOINTS/CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION/ICON entry. The choice of icon for
Series 200 feeders is available in the SETPOINTS/CONTINUOUS SET POINTS/AUGER/
BELT SELECT entry. Currently only the Model 260 and Model 270 are available
for selection.
2) Top Information Bar: For the Combo Screen the bar along the top of the
screen displays general information about the controller’s status. The leftmost
item is the Station Address of the controller from 1 to 20. This is the address the
controller must use to communicate with the KDU. The Main KDU will always be
address 1, usually shown as [01]. Addresses 2 through 20 are used by a

second KDU or for sharing the KDU with multiple controllers, which each
require a unique address.
The second item shown is the Feeder Name, or Feeder ID. This is an 8
character field that is typically used to identify the product or product. It can be
changed via the “Feeder ID” Operational Data Entry.
The third item is the Control Mode currently in effect. The display can show
INTG, EXTG, INTV, EXTV and FAST. The Control Mode is selected on
Command Screen 1.
The fourth item is the Operating Mode, either CONT for Continuous Mode,
BCMP for Batch Complete, or BRUN for a running batch.
The right most area usually displays the acceptable range of values for an entry
or the format of the entry. The area changes color when input errors occur.
3)Run/Stop Status: The feeder icon background will change color: Green
(shown below) means that the feeder status is running; white indicates stopped.
This is a “state” condition and does not necessarily mean that the feeder is
actually feeding material. For example, when running a preset number of
batches the feeder may go on and off repeatedly, but the state will be “running”
during the entire series of batches. So, to indicate when the feeder is actually
feeding material the feeder icon’s auger will rotate, the arrow below the
downspout will go from gray to blue and the Status Bar will show a rotating icon
as well. These indicators permit quick status determination from any screen.
4) Auto/Manual Refill (Weight Loss Feeders): The box labeled “AUTO”
indicates automatic refill mode. This changes to “MAN” for manual refill mode.
This box will change background color from gray to green when refilling is in
progress.
Figure 10-1 Combo Screen—Loss-In-Weight Feeder
5) Refilling/Rezeroing Indicator: The AUTO box and the right-facing arrow to its
right will change color when refilling/rezeroing is in progress.
10-6 SBC-2000
6) High, Low, Empty Set Points (Weight Loss feeders): Along the right side of
the hopper symbol the letters H, L and E, representing the High, Low and
Empty Set Point values stored in the controller in percent. The letters are
positioned at approximately the point on the hopper that corresponds to the set
point values for each. In the figure shown above, those values are 80%, 20%
and 10%. These letters change color to white as they are reached by the
material in the hopper, to show when they are active.
The High, Low and Empty values are controlled by the Operational Data
Entries SCALE/EMPTY, SCALE/LOW LEVEL and SCALE/HIGH LEVEL and
their functionality is completely described in Chapter 8 of this manual.
7) Hopper Level (Weight Loss Feeders): The level of material shown in the
hopper will go up and down as the feeder runs and refills, matching the hopper
level parameter value, which is displayed as a percent on Data Screen 1.
8) Motor Speed (RPM or %):The feeder’s metering auger motor speed is
displayed inside the motor icon of the feeder symbol in either percent of
maximum speed, or in RPM, according to the selections made in the
Operational Data Entries SETPOINTS/MOTOR COMPENSATION/MOTOR DISPLAY and
SETPOINTS/MOTOR COMPENSATION/MAX MOTOR RPM. When RPM is selected, the
letter “R” will be displayed following the value instead of “%.”
9) Motor Current (Amps): The feeder’s metering auger motor current in amps is
shown just below the motor speed value.
10)Scale Weight (Weight Units): For gravimetric feeders the current scale
weight in weight units is displayed in a blue box just below the motor current
display. The Scale Weight in percent is available on Data Screen 1.
11)Feed Rate (Weight/Hour): For gravimetric feeders displays the current feed
rate in weight units per hour, or per minute (according to the Operational Data
Entry SETPOINTS/FR SETTINGS AND OPTIONS/RATE PER MINUTE) in a gray box just
below the scale weight display.
12)Alarms: The Color KDU provides two visual indications of an alarm occurring,
plus a Log Screen to record the alarm, and the time and date it occurred. When
an alarm occurs a red Alarm Box will appear on the screen, and the Status Bar
will display an abbreviated description of the alarm in red. The Alarm Box is not
limited to the Combo Screen but will appear on whatever screen is presently
being viewed. Up to three alarms can appear in a single Alarm Box, one per
line. See Figure 10-2 below.
The red Alarm Box and Status Bar indicators may also be configured to
automatically clear when the alarm condition no longer exists, or to remain on
the screen until manually cleared. Leaving the Alarm Box on the screen assures
that the operator will immediately know what caused the alarm, especially if
alarms are not being logged on the Log Screen. Refer to the Operational Data
Entry SETPOINTS/CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION/ALARM LATCH.
If a Digital Output has been programmed to activate on either this particular
alarm or a combination of alarms that include this one, it will activate while the
red Alarm Box is displayed, and will deactivate when the Alarm Box clears, or is
cleared by the user.
To clear the Alarm Box, acknowledge it by pressing the Clear/Ack button on the
keyboard as indicated in the Alarm Box. If the alarm is still present, the
indication on the Status Bar will remain on the screen after the Alarm Box
disappears. It will automatically clear when the alarm condition is no longer
present. Alarms may also be acknowledged via serial communication functions.
To cause an alarm to be recorded on the Log Screen (in red) the “Log Feeder
Alarms” checkbox on the Settings Screen must be checked.

Figure 10-2 Alarm on Combo Screen
13)Messages: Messages are typically less serious than alarms, but may still
require the attention of the operator. They are shown in yellow on the screens
and in the Log Screen entry.
The checkbox “Log Keyboard Error Messages” on the Settings Screen must be
checked if messages are to be included on the Log Screen.
A list of possible messages is included in Appendix B on pages B17 and B18.
Figure 10-3 Message on Combo Screen
10-8 SBC-2000
14)Total Fed 1 & 2: These totalizer values are included on the Combo Screen
and on Data Screen 1 for the convenience of the operator. The totalizers are
constantly refreshing whenever the feeder is running. Totalizers cannot have
their values changed, other than to clear them, which is done via the
Operational Data Entries SETPOINTS/CONTINUOUS SET POINTS/TOTAL FED 1 and
SETPOINTS/CONTINUOUS SET POINTS/TOTAL FED 2.
For most feeder models totalization in gravimetric mode is accomplished using

scale values, but there are some exceptions. Totalization in volumetric mode is
based upon the feeder’s motor speed and its percentage of the Maximum
Feed Rate value. See the Operational Data Entry SETPOINTS/FR SETTINGS AND
OPTIONS/MAX FEED RATE.
15)Batch Fed: When in Batch Mode this parameter value is included on the
Combo Screen just above the Total Fed 1 parameter. This value is constantly
refreshing when batches are in progress. See Chapter 5 in this manual for
further details.
16)Set Point: This parameter, displayed in the purple bar near the bottom of
many screens, allows direct input of the current set point from the keyboard
without changing screens, unless locked. If locked (see Fig 10-1) a lock icon
appears to the left of the value, indicating that the set point requires a password
to unlock it that must be entered from the Operational Data Entries in
SETPOINTS/CONTINUOUS SET POINTS or from the Op Data Entries Screen.
Attempting to enter the set point while locked will cause the lock icon to flash.
The actual set point that is displayed depends on the mode of operation. In
Batch Mode it is the Batch Size Set Point in weight units. In Continuous Mode it
will be one of several speed set points:
• In Internal Gravimetric Mode it is the Feed Rate Set Point in weight units per
hour or per minute
• In Internal Volumetric Mode it is the Motor Speed Set Point in percent
• In External Gravimetric Mode it is the EGRAV Ratio Set Point in percent
• In External Volumetric Mode it is the EVOL Ratio Set Point in percent
• In External Fast Start Mode it is the EGRAV Ratio Set Point in percent
GRAPH PREFS SCREEN

Please refer to Figure 10-4 below. The SBC-2000 DSP/C Controller currently
supports eight different parameters that can be graphed. These are divided into
three groups that are separated by horizontal lines on the screen. One parameter
may be chosen from each group, for a total of three graphs that can be displayed
at once. Batch Error is a special case. If chosen to graph batching errors, no other
parameter may be graphed at the same time.
The Graph Screen provides one vertical, or “Y” axis, for graphing the items in the
topmost group and a second that is used with parameters in groups 2 and 3 that
are described in percent from 0 to 100, such as hopper level. Selections are
saved upon exiting the screen and are non-volatile.
To select a parameter, use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow softkeys to navigate to
the desired parameter. Press the Enter key on the keyboard to select. A check
mark will appear, and any other selection that may have been made in that group
will be cleared. Press Enter a second time to clear the check mark.

Figure 10-4 Graph Prefs Screen
The interval at which parameters are sampled from the controller and presented
on the Color KDU graphs is controlled by the Graph Interval Set Point that
appears on the Graph Prefs Screen. When this screen is displayed Graph Interval
entry is immediately active. The values 15, 30, 60 and 90 seconds are the
allowable entries for this parameter, as shown in the right side of the top
Information Bar above. If an invalid number is entered the Information Bar will
change color to orange signifying an out-of-range entry, and the entry will be
ignored.
When a parameter in group 1 is selected the Color KDU will inspect its current
value and choose appropriate range settings to use for the Y-axis. The range is
manually chosen from the choices available by repeatedly pressing the softkey
labeled “Range.” The range is also saved upon exiting the screen. The range for
groups 2 and 3 is fixed at 0-100%. The up and down arrows are repeating buttons
when held down. A summary of the ranges associated with each parameter is
shown:
Min Max Increment
Feed Rate Error (%) -1 to +1 -50 to +50 1
Motor Current (A) 0 100 5
Batch Error (%) -1 to +1 -20 to +20 1
Hopper Level (%) 0 100 Fixed
Scale Weight (%) 0 100 Fixed
Motor Speed (%) 0 100 Fixed
External Input (%) 0 100 Fixed
10-10 SBC-2000
GRAPH SCREEN
While the Combo Screen presents the most comprehensive view of the
parameters associated with the operation of a feeder, some users may prefer a
simpler screen that displays only the most important data. The Graph Screen
accomplishes just that by removing the feeder icon and expanding the graph
portion of the Combo Screen into the left half of the screen. Immediate access to
the Set Point is maintained as it was on the Combo Screen and the Information
Bar and Status Bar still operate the same way. By choosing to graph the feed rate,
hopper level and motor speed, the Graph Screen (Fig. 10-5) will contain the most
important feeder data that appears on the Combo Screen.
Graphs are created by the Color KDU by constantly sampling the specified
parameter(s) from the controller at the interval specified on the Graph Prefs
Screen. Sampling occurs continuously for all parameters that could be chosen
(except for Batch Deviation) and the values are saved for display should the
parameter actually be selected. Parameter selections are saved and sampling
begins when the Graph Prefs Screen is exited. Then, whenever the Graph Screen
is displayed the chosen parameters are replotted from the stored values.
Graphing data is maintained entirely within the Color KDU and is not accessible to
external equipment.
The Graph Screen will always display the last 120 samples taken at the selected
Graph Interval on the Graph Prefs Screen. Since 120 samples will require
different amounts of time to graph 120 samples, an indication of the total time
displayed is provided below the graph. For example, if 30 seconds is the Graph
Interval it will take 120 times 30 seconds, or 60 minutes to fill the graph window.
Similarly, with a Graph Interval of 90 seconds it will take 180 minutes.
The Graph Screen may be selected to be the default screen that appears on
power-up. This choice is made on the Settings Screen. This does not prevent the
operator from accessing other screens, even the Combo Screen, which are still
accessible. This feature is particularly useful if the keyboard is to be locked when
starting, which will prevent changing screens.
All graphs may be erased/cleared using the Clear Graph command. Graphs are
cleared on power down. No provisions currently exist in the Color KDU for saving
or printing graphs. When used in the Remote Keyboard Mode graphs are inactive
until connected to a single controller and will function normally until the Remote
Keyboard Screen is displayed. Leaving the Remote Keyboard Screen clears all
graphs automatically.

Figure 10-5 Graph Screen
SETTINGS SCREEN
Please refer to Figure 10-6 below. The Settings Screen allows the user to select a
number of operational features, most of which are associated with the Log
Screen. Because the Log Screen is limited in the number of entries it can hold the
user may prefer to limit the events that are logged. The first six selections on the
Settings Screen provide this capability and are relatively self explanatory.
Figure 10-6 Settings Screen
10-12 SBC-2000
The option to turn on the Infrared Port, when left unchecked, simply causes the
controller to skip testing for infrared communications, which can improve
keyboard responsiveness when no infrared device is in use. This is the default
setting as this is a seldom used function of the controller.
The option to start on the Graph Screen on power-up instead of on the Combo
Screen was discussed in the Graph Screen description above.
Choices are saved in non-volatile memory and restored on power-up.
The Set Point parameter is not available from the Settings Screen. However, the
Information Bar and the Status Bar function normally.
Note that Log Screen functionality differs when the Color KDU is used in the
Remote Mode.
LOG SCREEN
The Log Screen provides a record of events that occur in the controller. Using the
Settings Screen selections described above, each event is recorded along with its
time and date of occurrence. The internal real time clock can maintain its time for
up to 2 weeks without power, depending on the ambient temperature. No batteries
are used.
The log will hold up to 100 events, thereafter discarding the oldest and adding the
newest so that the most recent 100 events will always be displayed. Softkeys
allow scrolling through the list.
The Log Screen color-codes the entries to provide a quick evaluation of the
importance of the entry. Alarms appear in red, messages are yellow, normal
operational events are green and controller related events are blue.
Figure 10-7 below illustrates some of the most common events that are logged.
Figure 10-8 shows a log filled by a series of batches. Other events could be
interspersed within the log as well. Each time a batch completes it logs its batch
amount fed and the controller computes the deviation error. Both are logged onto
a single line.
Figure 10-7 Log Screen—Typical

Figure 10-8 Log Screen—Batch Error
Saving and Printing a Log

**The Log content is not saved and will be lost on a power down**. Acrison’s Web-
based Configurator (see Chapter 11) includes a feature that can extract the data
in the log to the PC, The button on the main Configurator Screen labeled “Display
Log” (Shown bottom-center in Figure 10-18 below) creates a full color duplicate of
the Log Screen on the PC, making it available to standard Windows functions
such as Print and Save. In order to print in color, be sure that the browser is set to
print background colors in Page Setup.
When operating in conjunction with multiple controllers in its Remote Keyboard
Mode, the Log is not active until connected to a single controller. The Log is
automatically cleared whenever the operator leaves the Remote Keyboard
Screen. Once connected it will record events normally until the Remote Keyboard
Screen is again displayed.
COMMAND SCREENS
The Command Screens utilize just the portion of the Combo Screen that is
normally used to display graphs. The remaining portion of the Combo Screen
continues to function as previously described except that Set Point entry is not
available. Commands are divided into two screens, with the most frequently used
functions on the first screen.
The second Command Screen is accessed by using the right most softkey with
the “>>” symbol in it. The first screen to appear when the “Commands” softkey is
pressed is shown below.
10-14 SBC-2000
Figure 10-9 Command Screen 1
Each of the five commands on this screen may be activated by:

1) Pressing the keybutton number matching the number at the left side of
the desired command, such as number “2” to clear the log, or
2) Scrolling down to the desired command using the softkeys and then
pressing the Enter button on the keypad.
On this screen there is one command that always requires a password: Save
Recipe. If selected, a password entry box will be presented before activation. The
password is the controller’s Operational Data Entry for Password. Each command
is individually lockable. See below.
START REFILL: For a loss-in-weight feeder, this command will activate the
Digital Output contact associated with Refill On if the level of material in the
hopper is below the High Level Set Point. For Series 200 feeders this is the
REZERO command. This command changes depending on the controller’s
status. For example, when not refilling it is the Start Refill command; while
refilling it’s the Stop Refill command, etc.
CLEAR GRAPH: The current graph will be cleared, both on the Combo Screen
and on the Graph Screen.
CLEAR LOG: This command clears the Log immediately. All Log data will be
lost unless saved prior to clearing as previously described.
LOAD RECIPE: Selecting this command will cause an entry box to appear.
Enter the desired Recipe Number (1-25), and then press the Enter keybutton to
execute. See Chapter 7 for further recipe details.
SAVE RECIPE: Causes the password entry box to appear. Once the password
is entered a second entry box will request the Recipe Number to use for saving.
Enter a number from 1 to 25 and press the Enter keybutton to complete the
command. See Chapter 7 for further recipe details.
The second Command Screen is shown below. Two of the five commands on this
screen require passwords and are used infrequently. Most of these commands
also have sub-menus as shown for the Control Mode command.

Use the softkeys to move up and down among the items in the sub-menu. Press
the Enter keybutton to select the desired mode. Refer to Appendix A for
descriptions as needed.
Figure 10-10Command Screen 2
CONTROL MODE: Selects the control mode for feeding.

REFILL MODE (REZERO): Select AUTO or MANUAL refill mode (rezero for
Series 200 feeders).
OPERATING MODE: Select Continuous or Batch mode of operation.
AUTOTUNE: Performs an autotune cycle to establish the tuning constants for
PID. Password required.
MAX RATE: Initiates a Max Feed Rate calculation. Password required.
Each command on Command Screens 1 and 2 can be individually locked. A

locked command will have a small lock icon to its right as shown in Figures 10-9
and 10-11. Locked commands will require the password to be entered whenever
the command is selected.
Locks are set and cleared from Command Screen 2 using option #9 as shown in
Figure 10-11 below. The numeral “9” on the keypad must be used, not the
softkeys. When “9” is entered a request for the password is presented. When
accepted, the Lock/Unlock Commands text will change to green indicating that the
controller is in Lock/Unlock mode. Pressing “9” again will exit Lock/Unlock Mode.
To lock or unlock a command when in Lock/Unlock Mode use the softkeys to
highlight it and press the Enter button on the keypad. A lock icon will be added to
the command’s right, or an existing lock icon will be erased.
To lock commands on Command Screen 1, simply press the “<<“ softkey to
change to that screen, highlight the desired command, and press Enter as was
done for Command Screen 2. On Command Screen 1 there is no visual indication
provided to indicate Lock/Unlock Mode but the controller will remain in that mode
until the Command Screens are exited or the mode is cancelled on Command
Screen 2.
10-16 SBC-2000
Locking of the commands is nonvolatile and locked commands are restored on
power-up.
Figure 10-11Command Screen 2 with Lock Control
SET POINTS SCREENS

Op Data Entries Screen
The Operational Data Entries (set points) have been divided into 12 groups of
related functions to simplify finding and accessing them. The Op Data Entry
Screen shown below is the first screen that appears when the Setpoints softkey is
pressed. It lists and allows selection of the desired parameter group. Each group
consists of 1 or more screens of set points, with the most frequently accessed
groups listed first.
There are two modes of operation associated with set point screens:
1) NORMAL OPERATION. In this mode the value of unlocked set
points may be changed as needed. Values are nonvolatile and are
saved in flash memory.
2) FULL ACCESS. This mode requires a password. When entered, all
parameter locks are ignored, allowing editing of all parameter set
points. In addition, parameters may be locked and unlocked. These
locks are also nonvolatile.
For normal operation the up arrow and down arrow softkeys are used to highlight
the desired group. Pressing the Enter keybutton will then display the first screen
of the selected group.
When the Op Data Entries Screen is first displayed, the word “Toggle” and a lock
icon will appear in softkey #4 (right most softkey), and will be shown in normal

menu color (very dark red). This is the indication for normal mode of operation,
with all parameter locks active. To enable full editing access to all set points
(override the locks) and to be able to set or clear locks, press softkey #4 and enter
the password. The “Toggle” text will turn red as a warning that Full Access Mode
is now enabled. Exiting the Op Data Entries Screen will cancel this mode and
restore normal operation.
When Full Access Mode is active, the operator must choose whether to set or
clear locks, or whether values are to be edited. In either case, the desired group is
first highlighted using the up arrow and down arrow softkeys. Then, to choose to
edit values, press the Enter key on the keypad. To choose to set or clear locks,
press softkey #4. The first screen of the selected group will then be displayed
Figure 10-12 Op Data Entries Screen
When in Full Access Mode the operator can go back and forth between the Op
Data Entries Screen and the parameter set points screens as desired without
needing to reenter the password as long as the word “Toggle” is red, choosing
which mode to use by pressing either “Enter” or softkey #4 on the Op Data Entries
Screen.
Set Points Screens
These are the screens that provide access to all of the set points associated with
operation of the feeder. Set points on these screens are typically organized in
groups of related functions that may each contain several screens of set points.
Navigation from screen-to-screen is accomplished using the “>>” softkey. To
change the direction of the arrow from forward (>>) to backward (<<) hold the
softkey down for 2 seconds.
The parameter descriptions will appear in the language selected by the SETPOINTS/
CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION/LANGUAGE set point. Most units of measure
are selected with
the SETPOINTS/CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION/SELECT UNITS set point.
While displayed, the Set Points Screens continue to provide a display of feeder
performance via the Information and Status Bars. In addition, alarms and
messages will also appear and can be acknowledged from these screens.
10-18 SBC-2000
Figure 10-13Normal Set Points Screen
Once displayed, select the desired set point to edit using the up and down arrow
softkeys to move the highlight. As each is highlighted, the Information Bar at the
top will show the acceptable range of values for it, or the format of data to be
entered.
To enter or change the value of the selected parameter, simply type it using the
keypad. Press Enter to save the value, or the Cancel softkey to discard any
changes. Pressing the Clear button on the keypad will remove the previously
entering digit, or cancel the entry if the last digit has already been erased. If an
operator attempts to enter an out of range value, the right side of the Information
Bar will flash the acceptable range of values in a bright color and the value will not
be accepted.
In Normal Mode of operation, if the parameter has been locked and the operator
attempts to change the value, a password entry box will appear when the first digit
is entered. That digit is saved and will again appear in the parameter’s value field
after successfully entering the password, allowing the operator to continue. If the
password entry is successful, the controller changes to Full Access Mode (value
editing) automatically, without the need to return to the Op Data Screen, since the
password has already been entered.
In Full Access Mode the operator has full access to all parameters and may
change any set point’s value regardless of the presence of a lock icon.
When in Full Access mode, where softkey #4 was used to display the group of set
points (instead of using the Enter key), a screen similar to that shown in Figure
10-14 will be displayed. Note the word “Toggle,” the green background and the
lock icon on the Information Bar indicating that the Toggle Lock function is active
and value editing is not presently available. To set or clear a lock, use the up
arrow and down arrow softkeys to select the desired parameter and then press
Enter.

Figure 10-14Typical Full Access Toggle Lock Set Points Screen
A useful feature of the Set Points Screens is the “Help” function (see Figure 10-15
below), which acts as a simplified manual providing a brief description of the
highlighted parameter. Press the pound (#) keybutton to activate.
Help Screens are available in English, German and Spanish at this writing and
depend on the SETPOINTS/CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION/LANGUAGE set point.
Many of the Help Screens have multiple screens associated with them. If a
parameter does have more than one screen, the right arrow softkey will be
enabled (dark red color). If more than one additional screen is available, both the
left arrow and right arrow softkeys will become enabled allowing the operator to
go forward and backward through the screens. If the parameter contains only one
Help Screen both softkeys will be disabled.
10-20 SBC-2000
Figure 10-15Typical Set Points Help Screen
DATA SCREENS
There are two Data Screens whose purpose is to provide a view of certain data
within the controller. Data Screen #1 constantly updates about once per second.
Only the main Set Point is available for entry; everything else is read-only.
Alarms and messages, as well as running statistics and graphics remain active as
are all the keybuttons. There are no Help Screens available on these screens.
Figure 10-16Data Screen #1

Softkey #4 (>>) is used to navigate between the two screens.
The data on Data Screen #2 does not refresh as this information typically changes
infrequently or not at all. The data that appears below the “GATEWAY” field
generally describes the program versions used within the controller.
Figure 10-17Data Screen #2
Figure 10-18 CONFIGURATOR SHOWING DISPLAY LOG BUTTON
10-22 SBC-2000
REMOTE KEYBOARD OPERATION
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The SBC-2000 DSP/C Controller can be considered to be a combination of the
SBC-2000 CM Controller with a separate Color Keyboard Controller and Display,
with the electronics sharing a single PCB.
When used in its Remote Keyboard mode, no communication exists on the PCB
between the feeder controller electronics and the Color KDU Controller. Instead,
Color KDU communications is redirected to external communications by jumpers
on the PCB. The chart below shows differences in functionality depending on
what devices, and how many, are connected.
Remote DSP/C Jumper Ctrl

Connected To Functional Description Position COM
1 SBC-2000 CM * Full SBC-2000 DSP/C operation REM 0 or 2

* Graphing functions only for the currently connected SBC-2000 CM
* SBC-2000 CM Station Address = 1
* Logging functions only for the currently connected SBC-2000 CM
2-20 SBC-2000 * Graphing functions only for the currently connected SBC-2000 CM REM 0 or 2
CMs * SBC-2000 CMs Station Addresses 1-20
* Logging functions only for the currently connected SBC-2000 DSP
1 SBC-2000 DSP * Graphing functions only for the currently connected SBC-2000 DSP REM 2
* SBC-2000 DSP Station Addresses any from 1-20
* Logging functions only for the currently connected SBC-2000 DSP
2-20 SBC-2000 * Graphing functions only for the currently connected SBC-2000 DSP REM 2
DSPs * SBC-2000 DSP Station Addresses 1-20

In Remote Keyboard Mode no analog or digital I/O features are available. Choose
“Remote Display” protocol for communications in the Configurator.
OPERATION
When connected to a single SBC-2000 CM Controller, operation of the SBC-2000
DSP/C Remote is identical to normal DSP functionality described previously in
this chapter. Operation differs however when connected to multiple controllers or
to an SBC-2000 DSP as a second Color KDU. Either of these two configurations
requires that the jumper be placed in the “REM” position, which changes how the
controller works.
When the SBC-2000 DSP/C powers-up, the screen that appears depends upon
whether communication with another device had previously been established. If
communication with that device is still available the Combo Screen (or Graph
Screen if selected as the starting screen) will be displayed.
If the controller had not been communicating with another controller the Remote
Keyboard Screen (Figure 10-18) will appear. This screen allows the user to select
the controller to communicate with, using its Station Address. Graphing and
Logging are cleared and are not active while this screen is displayed.
Figure 10-19Remote Keyboard Screen
This screen is the method by which the SBC-2000 DSP Remote is connected
electronically to any one of up to 20 controllers. Each possible controller Station
Address (set in Acrison’s Configurator) from 1 to 20 is represented by a square
box alongside its Station Address. The box color is changed by the operator to
specify how that controller is to be treated. This setting is nonvolatile. The
significance of the colors is described at the top of the screen, below the
Information Bar as follows:
SCAN: Tells the controller to attempt to communicate with this controller.
The controller will retry three times before moving on to the next.
SYS: Identifies this controller as part of a grouping of feeder controllers that
will be operated together as a “System.”
10-24 SBC-2000
SKIP: The controller will not attempt to communicate with this controller.
To choose the mode to use, navigate to the desired controller using the up arrow
and down arrow softkeys and then press the Enter keybutton repeatedly until the
desired color appears. For ease of use when many controllers need to be set, the
“Toggle All” softkey will toggle all 20 boxes through the three choices as it is
repeatedly pressed.
It is recommended that all boxes initially be set to “Scan” to determine what
controllers are present. Then those that are to be skipped should be set to “Skip.”
The SBC-2000 DSP Remote will continuously scan all twenty controller
addresses. As it does a small white asterisk will appear next to each Station
Address number. If it is successful in establishing communication with a controller
it will request several data items including Feeder ID, Feed Rate and Run/Stop
and Alarm / Message Status and will display these items as follows.
* The Feeder ID is placed adjacent to the controller’s mode selection box, in
one of four colors:
1) Green indicates running normally
2) Red indicates that an alarm condition exists
3) Yellow indicates that a message is available
4) Black indicates that the feeder is stopped
* The current Feed Rate will appear to the right of the Feeder ID
SYSTEM OPERATION
There are two ways that grouped feeders may be operated from this screen. First,
while this screen is displayed the Run and Stop keybuttons operate differently.
Instead of running or stopping an individual feeder, the Run and/or Stop command
will be sent to all feeder controllers that are set to SYS (blue), allowing all of the
feeders to start or stop at the same time. This is also true for the Clear/Ack
keybutton.
Second, for applications that use Ratio-Proportioning control, an entry box is
provided at the bottom of the screen, labeled “TTSP” for Total Throughput Set
Point. The entry mode is always on for this box, so numbers entered from the
keypad will be entered here. Adjacent to this box is a text field (TT) showing the
sum total of the feed rates of all of the SYS feeders. Whenever a value is entered
into the TTSP box, its value is immediately sent to all SYS feeders allowing on-
the-fly set point changes. The value is also sent whenever the Run keybutton is
pressed.
To run feeders in Ratio-Proportioning mode their controllers must be in Ext Mode
and their Ratio Set Points (their percentage of the TTSP value) must have been
previously set.
INDIVIDUAL FEEDER OPERATION

A single SBC-2000 DSP Remote is primarily used as a method of accessing the
Operational Data Entries of a number of SBC-2000 CM controllers, thereby
providing a cost effective method for doing so. It is particularly attractive when a
host device is also in use.
In operation, the SBC-2000 DSP Remote is instructed to stop scanning and to
connect to (communicate with) a single feeder controller. While doing so it will use
the standard SBC-2000 DSP/C screens previously described in this chapter. This
is accomplished as follows:
1) Press the softkey labeled “CONTROLLER.”

2) Determine the feeder controller to switch to and enter its Station Address
in the box that appeared on the screen. The controller selected must
already be communicating with the SBC-2000 DSP Remote.
3) Press the Enter keybutton.
The Combo Screen or Graph Screen will appear depending on the Settings
chosen. Operation will depend upon the particular controller as shown in the table
above.
To return to the SBC-2000 DSP/C Remote Screen, go to the Combo Screen and
press the pound (#) keybutton.
When leaving the Remote Keyboard Screen both the Graph Screen and the Log
Screen are cleared and begin accumulating data again for this feeder controller.
This will continue until the Remote Keyboard Screen is again displayed. For
applications using a single SBC-2000 CM Controller (see Table above) the
Remote Keyboard will never appear.
HELP SCREEN
A single Help Screen comprised of three screens is available. It summarizes the
information related to the Remote Keyboard Screen. Press the Pound keybutton
to display (“#”)
Figure 10-20Remote Keyboard Help Screen 1
The Remote Keyboard Screen gets help information from the first communicating
controller that it finds during scanning. At least one controller must be active to
use the help screen.
10-26 SBC-2000
COLOR KEYBOARD SCREEN CLEANING
The screen of the SBC-2000 DSP/C is made of a high strength polycarbonate
material. Care should be taken to avoid damage to the screen caused by the use
of strong or caustic chemicals, as well as metallic objects for cleaning. Below is a
list of both acceptable and unacceptable materials for use in cleaning the screen
Acceptable Do Not Use

Mild soap and water Trichlor
Mineral Spirits Acetone
Mexane Triclene
VM and P Naphtha Methyl Ethyl Keytone (MEK)
Varsol No.2 MIBK
#1 & #3 denatured alcohol Toluol
Freone TF and TE-35 Benzol
Ethanol Gasoline
10% Sol Bon Ami Carbon Tetrachloride
Dirtex Chlorinated Hydrocarbons
2% Sol. Reg. Joy Texize-8006, 8129, 8758
Heptane Liquid Cleaner - 8211
White Kerosene Agitene
Methyl, isopropyl and isobutyl alcohols Ajax
Lacryl PCL-2035 polycarbonate cleaner All Liquid Detergents
Petroleum Ether/65 degrees C boiling point Pink Lux (Phosphate free)
Formula 409 Kleenol Plastics
Top Job Lemon Joy (phosphate free)
Windex w. Ammonia D Diversol
Palmolive Liquid Lestoil
Lysol
Stanisol Naphtha
Oils
Wash the screen with a mild soap or detergent (such as 409 cleaner) and
lukewarm water, using a clean sponge or a soft cloth. Rinse well with clean water.
Dry thoroughly with a chamois or moist cellulose sponge to prevent water spots.
Do not scrub or use brushes or abrasives on the screen.
Fresh paint splashes, grease and smeared glazing compounds can be removed
easily before drying by rubbing lightly with a good grade of naphtha or isopropyl
alcohol. Follow the alcohol rub with a mild detergent wash with warm water and
end with a thorough rinsing with clean water.

10-28 SBC-2000
CHAPTER
11
CONFIGURING SBC-2000 DSP/CM CONTROLLERS
CHAPTER11
Overview
The SBC-2000 DSP and SBC-2000 CM Controllers’ operating program is capable
of controlling many different Acrison feeder models including loss-in-weight
feeders, weigh belt and weigh auger feeders, and rotary feeders. It is also capable
of communicating serially, or over a network, using a variety of different serial
protocols and speeds of transmission.
Because the specific feeder to be controlled, and its operational requirements, will
vary from one controller to the next, each SBC-2000 DSP or CM Controller must
be initially set up. This process is referred to as “configuring” the controller.
Configuration is only required once, as the selections are then maintained in non-
volatile memory.
Configuration should be the first activity performed on a new controller and should
be done prior to choosing options in the Operational Data Entries. Basic
configuration of a controller is typically performed at Acrison’s factory, but may
need to be modified by the user. It is recommended that configuration not be
performed while the controller is controlling a feeder.
This chapter will describe the process of configuring an SBC-2000 DSP or CM
Controller and the various options that are available to the user.
Equipment
The process of configuring the controller involves the use of the controller’s native
Ethernet port. It requires the use of a stand-alone laptop or desktop PC equipped
with Ethernet capability, or an Ethernet-networked PC.
Software Requirements
Configuration is typically performed using the standard Microsoft Windows
Internet Explorer browser included with Microsoft Windows. However, any
standard browser may be used.
Hardware Requirements
A connection is required between the controller and the PC that will be used to
configure it. If the controller is already wired to a network, no further hardware is
required.
If a stand-alone PC or laptop is used, an Ethernet Category 5 (Cat 5) crossover
cable will be required to connect the PC to the controller.
Configuring SBC-2000 DSP/CM Controllers 11-1

Figure 11-1 Ethernet and Profibus Ports (SBC-2000 CM)
Ethernet Connector
Profibus Connector
Figure 11-2 Ethernet and Profibus Ports SBC-2000 DSP
Ethernet Connector (rear) Profibus Connector (side)
Establishing an Ethernet Connection

Perform the steps below in order to establish communication between the PC and
controller.
• Record the controller’s IP Address.
IP Address—The IP Address is the address of the controller on a TCP/IP
network. The format is a 32-bit numeric address written as four numbers
separated by periods. Each number can be zero to 255. For example,
192.168.10.176 is the default IP Address for an SBC-2000 DSP or CM
Controller.
The IP Address of each controller on a network must be unique in order for
the PC to find and communicate with it when configuring, or when
communicating from a host device. Since Acrison does not know the
addresses assigned to equipment in a user’s network, Acrison ships
controllers with either the 192.168.10.176 default IP Address, or with IP
11-2 SBC-2000
Figure 11-3 SBC-2000 Configuration Screen--Initial View
Addresses that are numerically in sequence with the default value (typically
when supplying more than one controller in a panel).
The host PC or laptop must have a static IP Address assigned to it that is
within the subnet of the SBC-2000 controller. The controller does not have
DHCP functionality to provide IP addresses. Therefore, if the PC’s TCP/IP
setting is set to “obtain an address automatically” it will be unable to
connect to the controller. To remedy this, temporarily assign the PC a static
IP Address such as 192.168.10.1 and Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0.
The SBC-2000 DSP Controller displays its IP Address on the Data Screen
of its Graphic KDU.
To assist the user in determining an SBC-2000 CM controller’s IP Address
an unconnected controller will automatically blink the two activity LEDs in
its Ethernet connector when power is first applied to the controller, as
follows:
1) Both LEDs will initially light momentarily. The lower LED will then blink
6 times to indicate the beginning of the IP Address cycle.
2) The uppermost LED will flash from 1 to 10 times to indicate the value of
the first digit of the first (leftmost) numerical group. 10 flashes are used
to represent a “0” value.
3) A short pause in the flashes (about 3 flashes in duration) indicates the
end of that digit and the beginning of the next digit.
4) The lower LED will flash once to indicate the end of that digit group and
the beginning of the next group. This can be considered to indicate the
period between each of the four groups.
5) Steps 2 through 4 repeat until all four groups are complete. To repeat
the process, cycle power to the controller.
• If using a stand-alone PC or laptop, connect the Ethernet cable between
the PC and the controller (see Figures 10-1 and 10-2). If networked, verify
that the controller is connected to the network.
• From a standard Windows screen, run Internet Explorer as follows:

1)Click the “Start” button on the bottom toolbar and select “All
Programs” and then “Internet Explorer” from the drop down list.
Alternatively, click on the Internet Explorer icon on the screen.
2) In the box labeled “Address” near the top left of the Internet Explorer
screen type the IP Address recorded previously and hit the “Return”
or “Enter” key. Be sure to include the periods between groups of
numbers in the IP Address.
3) The screen shown in Figure 10-3 will appear.
Configuration Options
The Configuration Screen shown in Figure 10-4 will appear after clicking on the
“Change Settings” button. This screen provides the user access to a number of
settings that control how the SBC-2000 DSP and SBC-2000 CM Controllers
operate. Each of these items is described below. A Help Screen (see Figure 10-5)
is available for each by clicking the appropriate blue description text (JavaScript
must be enabled in the browser).
Serial Channel #0 or Serial Channel #2 Protocol/Baud Rate—Selects the
desired protocol and baud rate combination for each of the two serial channels
in the controller. Channel 0 is not available for the SBC-2000 DSP Controller as
it is permanently assigned to communication with the Graphics KDU Module.
The possible selections for protocol and baud rate for Channel #0 are as
follows:
DB PROTOCOL MODBUS 984 PROTOCOL

DB 19200 CR (Remote Display) MB 19200 8O1
DB 19200 CRLF
DC 19200 CRLF (Remote Display)
The possible selections are as follows

:
DB/DC PROTOCOL MODBUS PROTOCOLS AB DF-1

PROTOCOL
DB 9600 7E1 CR MB984 9600 8O1 DF-1 9600 8N1
DB 19200 7E1 CR (Remote) MB984 19200 8O1 DF-1 19200 8N1
DB 38400 7E1 CR MB984 38400 8O1 DF-1 38400 8N1
DB 57600 7E1 CR MB984 57600 8O1 DF-1 57000 8N1
DB 9600 7E1 CRLF MBRTU 9600 8O1
DB 19200 7E1 CRLF MBRTU 19200 8O1
DB 38400 7E1 CRLF MBRTU 38400 8O1
DB 57600 7E1 CRLF MBRTU 57600 8O1
DC 9600 7E1 CRLF MB APMSI 9600 8O1
DC19200 7E1 CRLF (Rem) MB APMSI 19200 8O1
Fisher EIC 9600 8O1
Fisher EIC 19200 8O1
Bluetooth (for use with optional Bluetooth wireless communications gateway
Legacy Computational Module
To change this setting proceed as follows:
11-4 SBC-2000
• Click on the down arrow on the right side of the drop down box associated
with the Serial Channel desired. A list of the available choices will then be
presented (See Figure 10-4).
• Click on the desired selection. Note that the choices differ for Serial
Channels 0 and 2
Figure 11-4 Configuration Screen—Drop Down List
Serial Channel #0 or Serial Channel #2 Station Address—Enter the Station

Address (1-32) that will be assigned to this controller when operating on
Channel #0 or on Channel #2. Serial communications channels use this Station
Address to identify controllers and functions in the same way that the IP
Address does for Ethernet addressing.
The Station Addresses for Channel #0 and Channel #2 are independent of one
another as these channels are not connected together. However each of the
controllers connected together on a given communication channel must have a
unique Station Address so that each may be individually addressed.
To change the Station Address for Channel #0 or for Channel #2, enter the new
Station Address value in the box associated with the desired channel number.

Figure 11-5 SBC-2000 Configuration Screen w. Help Message
IP ADDRESS and SUBNET MASK

This IP Address and Subnet Mask section of the controller’s Configuration
Screen is intended for use by individuals who are familiar with Ethernet
networks and their settings.
To change the controller’s IP Address or Subnet Mask for its native Ethernet
Port, proceed as follows:
• Enter the desired value in the appropriate box.
The value must be in the format “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. Upon saving a new
configuration the controller’s power must be cycled for the new settings to
become effective. The controller will then respond to the new IP Address, or
Subnet Mask, for all Ethernet communications on the built-in Ethernet Port.
NOTE: This setting and others described here do not affect communications
associated with the Serial Communications Channels, which may also be
configured through Acrison Gateway devices for Ethernet communications.
Separate settings for Serial Channels exist in the associated gateway(s).
GATEWAY—This gateway or router IP address is needed in order to
communicate with other Ethernet segments. The gateway address must be set
to the address of the router that connects those segments and its address must
be within the local network (if used).
FEEDER MODEL or OPERATING MODE—Select Series 400 (L-I-W) or Series
200 feeder. This setting tells the controller which of the two built-in feeder
control programs is to be used. Later revisions include “Remote” as a third
choice to support using an SBC-2000 DSP or DSP/C as a remote keyboard.
LOW RATE GRAPH—This setting (see Figures 10-3 and 10-5) tells the
controller which of the two built-in graphing algorithms to use when displaying
feed rate graphs on Acri-Data or on the Graphics KDU. It is provided for use
when a feeder must operate at very low feed rates, and will almost always be
set to “OFF” or “Normal.” The Low Rate Graph algorithm results in a more
meaningful graph of feeder performance than the normal algorithm would
provide for such applications.
11-6 SBC-2000
Figure 11-6 Configuration Screen—Confirmation Screen
MODBUS /TCP PROTOCOL—Although the native SBC-2000 CM/DSP

Ethernet port automatically supports both Ethernet/IP and Modbus TCP, there
are two versions of the Modbus TCP protocol available. When Modbus TCP
is detected, this setting (see Figures 10-4 and 10-5) tells the controller which
of the two built-in Modbus protocols to use. Although very similar, Modbus
984 supports floating point values while Modbus RTU does not and may
require scaling of values.
PROFIBUS ADDRESS—Profibus slave address (See Appendix H and #4
below).
ANALOG I/O MODULE—Two types of analog expansion modules are
supported in the SBC-2000 CM/DSP. This setting indicates the type of
hardware in use.
A “Reset” button is provided for use in restoring the values to the screen that were
in effect at the time the Configurator was started.
After all changes have been made, click the “Next” button. A Confirmation Screen
will appear that shows the proposed new settings (Figure 10-6) highlighted in
yellow. Click “Save & Exit” to save these settings to the controller’s flash memory,
or click the “Back” key to return to the previous screen without saving changes.
After “Save and Exit” is clicked the screen shown in Figure 10-7 will appear.
Power to the controller must be cycled if the IP Address, IP Mask, Profibus
Address, or Feeder Model was changed.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SCREENS

There are several additional information screens that are available in the
Configurator that provide additional information/functions in these areas: Network
Status, Profibus Status, GSD file creation and Feeder Monitor. These screens are
accessed by clicking on the buttons shown on the left and bottom sides of the
Main Configuration Screen (Figure 10-3). The screens that will appear are shown
below.

1) Network Status: Provides information for I.T. personnel and is typically used in
troubleshooting network issues. This screen automatically refreshes every 15
seconds.
2) Profibus Status
Additional information about the status and performance of the controller’s native
Profibus DP port. See Appendix H for details regarding the operation of the
Profibus port.
11-8 SBC-2000
3) Feeder Monitor: Displays information related to the status of the controller with
which the Configurator is presently communicating, such as run/stop condition,
scale weight, alarms or messages, etc. This screen refreshes automatically every
15 seconds.
4) Get SBC20C16.GSD File: Displays instructions for creating the GSD file that’s
required by the master device. Follow these instructions to retrieve the GSD file’s
content and to save it on the PC as a text file.

The screen shown below shows the contents of the GSD file that is displayed
when the “Display GSD File” button (shown above) is clicked. This is the content
that must be saved, as described in the previous screen.
Default Settings
There are currently 12 settings on the Configuration Screen for user editing, as
shown in Figure 10-5 above.
When the web based configurator is initially started, the screen will show the
presently active values for all the settings as they exist in the controller. In many
cases the values shown will be the "default" values for the configuration settings.
The default values (shown in the table below) can always be restored by pressing
and holding the reset button on the controller for MORE than 5 seconds, but LESS
than 20 seconds. This is a "soft default."
The reset button can also be used to perform a "hard default" of all other
parameters within the controller to their default values. If it is desired to reset all
parameters, including the ones in the table below to their default values, the
button should held for more than 20 seconds.
If the red LED on the controller’s logic board is visible, it will be seen that after 5
seconds the LED stops flashing. This indicates that a "soft default" will occur if the
button is released now. If the button is held depressed beyond the 20 second
point, the LED will start flashing again, indicating that a "hard default" will occur
when the button is released.
On the SBC-2000 DSP, the Reset Button is accessed via the pin hole next to the
USB connector. Use a paper clip or similar device to activate it. On the SBC-2000
CM, the Reset Button is accessed through the pin hole on the front plate below
the Ethernet connector.
11-10 SBC-2000
SETTING DEFAULT VALUE
CH 1 DB 19200 E71 CR
CH1 STN ADDR 1
CH 2 DB 19200 E71 CRLF
CH2 STN ADDR 1
IP ADDRESS 192.168.10.176
IP MASK 255.255.0.0
GATEWAY 0.0.0.0
MODBUS /TCP PROTOCOL 984
LOW RATE GRAPH OFF
PROFIBUS SLAVE ADDRESS 0 (Disabled)
PROFIBUS DATA CONFIGURATION 400 Configuration 1
ANALOG I/O MODULE Acrison
Figure 11-7 SBC-2000 Final Screen
Using Legacy Computational Module with SBC-2000 CM/DSP

SBC-2000 DSP and CM Controllers are designed to use a dedicated Modbus
RTU channel for communication with the Computational Module, motor controller
and any optional I/O expansion options. All earlier Acrison controllers used
separate serial communications channels for connecting the Computational
Module and motor controller to the controller, and operated using a proprietary
Acrison protocol running at 9600 baud. In order to support the new, combined
communication channel, Acrison developed a new version of the Computational
Module for use with SBC-2000 CM/DSP Controllers. This new version is typically
supplied with new equipment sales.
When upgrading from earlier controllers to the SBC-2000 CM/DSP Controllers the
Computational Module is usually replaced as well. However, depending on the
specifics of a particular application, it may be possible to use the existing legacy
Computational Module, thus reducing cost and providing spare parts that may
already exist. This can be accomplished by dedicating Serial Channel #2 to

communication with the Computational Module, while still allowing motor
controller and optional expansion module communications to use the combined
channel. The decision tree below can be used to determine whether Serial
Channel #2 is available.
If it is determined that the channel is available, only a single configuration change
is needed, using Acrison’s Web Configurator described in this chapter. Simply
change the Serial Channel #2 protocol choice to “Legacy Computational Module.”
11-12 SBC-2000
11-14 SBC-2000
APPENDIX
A
CALIBRATION DATA PARAMETERS
APPENDIXA
Indexed List of Entries

Table 0-1, Language Selection on page 4 Table 0-27, Scale Alarm Disable on page 11
Table 0-2, Rate In Minutes on page 4 Table 0-28, Scale Empty on page 11
Table 0-3, Calibration Trim on page 4 Table 0-29, Maximum Scale Weight on page 11
Table 0-4, Proportional on page 4 Table 0-30, Chamber Size on page 11
Table 0-5, Select Programmed Defaults on page 5 Table 0-31, Hopper Size on page 11
Table 0-6, Integral on page 5 Table 0-32, Inferential Totalization on page 12
Table 0-7, Derivative on page 5 Table 0-33, Compensation Selection on page 12
Table 0-8, Auger/Belt/Rotary Select on page 5 Table 0-34, Positive Manual Compensation on page 13
Table 0-9, Acri-Lok Set Point on page 6 Table 0-35, Negative Manual Compensation on page 13
Table 0-10, Acri-Lok Timer on page 6 Table 0-36, Auto Compensation on page 13
Table 0-11, Deviation Set Point on page 6 Table 0-37, Compensation Input Selection on page 14
Table 0-12, Deviation Timer on page 6 Table 0-38, External Fast Start Threshold on page 14
Table 0-13, Scale Signal Averaging on page 7 Table 0-39, Alarm Latch/Unlatch on page 14
Table 0-14, Maximum Feed Rate on page 7 Table 0-40, Batch Mode Configuration on page 15
Table 0-15, High Level Set Point on page 8 Table 0-41, Batch Delay on page 15
Table 0-16, Low Level Set Point on page 8 Table 0-42, Batch-lok Set Point on page 15
Table 0-17, Empty Level Set Point on page 8 Table 0-43, Batch Deviation Set Point on page 15
Table 0-18, Refill Timer on page 8 Table 0-44, Batch Through Refill on page 16
Table 0-19, Refill Delay on page 8 Table 0-45, Refill After Batch on page 16
Table 0-20, Start Band on page 9 Table 0-46, Stop On Empty/RTO on page 16
Table 0-21, Motor Speed Acceleration on page 9 Table 0-47, Settle Delay on page 16
Table 0-22, Maximum Motor Load on page 9 Table 0-48, Dribble Speed Set Point on page 17
Table 0-23, Motor Speed in PCT or RPM on page 9 Table 0-49, Dribble Point on page 17
Table 0-24, Maximum Motor Rpm on page 10 Table 0-50, Ramping Interval on page 17
Table 0-25, Select English/Metric Units on page 10 Table 0-51, Password on page 17
Table 0-26, Scale Full on page 10 Table 0-52, Initialization Delay on page 17
Calibration Data Parameters A-1

Table 0-53, Don't Pace In Refill on page 18 Table 0-90, Analog Input #2 Parameter Select on page 27
Table 0-54, Digital Output #1, #2 on page 18 Table 0-91, Analog Input #1 Span on page 28
Table 0-55, Digital Output #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8 on page 19 Table 0-92, Analog Input #2 Span on page 28
Table 0-56, Digital Input #1 or #2 on page 19 Table 0-93, Analog Output #1 Parameter Select on page 28
Table 0-57, Digital Input #3, #4 on page 20 Table 0-94, Analog Output #2 Parameter Select on page 29
Table 0-58, Serial Input Span on page 20 Table 0-95, Analog Output #3 Parameter Select on page 29
Table 0-59, Run Delay on page 20 Table 0-96, Analog Output #4 Parameter Select on page 29
Table 0-60, Stop Delay on page 20 Table 0-97, Analog Output #1 Span on page 29
Table 0-61, Bumpless Transfer on page 21 Table 0-98, Analog Output #2 Span on page 29
Table 0-62, Feeder Name on page 21 Table 0-99, Analog Output #3 Span on page 29
Table 0-63, Maximum Motor Speed on page 21 Table 0-100, Analog Output #4 Span on page 30
Table 0-64, Batch Timer on page 21 Table 0-101, Motor Controller Select on page 30
Table 0-65, Bulk Density Set Point on page 22 Table 0-102, CONSTANT (260 Weigh Belt) on page 30
Table 0-66, Rezero Cycle Time on page 22 Table 0-103, Max Tach Frequency (260 Weigh Belt) on page 31
Table 0-67, Retention Time on page 22 Table 0-104, IP Address on page 31
Table 0-68, Rezero At Start on page 22 Table 0-105, Subnet Mask on page 31
Table 0-69, Rezero Timer on page 23 Table 0-106, Mac Address (00-D0-6D) on page 31
Table 0-70, Auger Set Pt. #X on page 23 Table 0-107, Keyboard Lock Level on page 32
Table 0-71, Actual Rate #X on page 23 Table 0-108, ICON on page 32
Table 0-72, Sample % Mtr Speed #X on page 24 Table 0-109, Graph Parameter on page 32
Table 0-73, Actual Rate at SPD #X on page 24 Table 0-110, Reducer Set Points 1 and 2 on page 32
Table 0-74, Internal Gravimetric WT/HR. on page 24 Table 0-111, Graph Interval on page 33
Table 0-75, Internal Gravimetric WT/MIN. on page 24 Table 0-112, Date and Time on page 33
Table 0-76, External Gravimetric Set Point on page 25
Table 0-77, Internal Volumetric Set Point on page 25
Table 0-78, External Volumetric Set Point on page 25
Table 0-79, Batch Size on page 25
Table 0-80, Maximum Motor RPM on page 25
Table 0-81, Preset Batches on page 25
Table 0-82, Batch Interval on page 26
Table 0-83, Batch Count on page 26
Table 0-84, Batch Trim on page 26
Table 0-85, Batch Preact on page 26
Table 0-86, Total Fed 1 on page 27
Table 0-87, Total Fed 2 on page 27
Table 0-88, Total Throughput Set Point on page 27
Table 0-89, Analog Input #1 Parameter Select on page 27
A-2 SBC-2000
Calibration Data
Calibration Data parameters must be entered whenever a new feeder is first
connected to the SBC-2000 Controller, when a Digital Weight Resolver is
replaced, or when a new battery is installed. Calibration Data is saved in non-
volatile memory within the SBC-2000 Controller so that in the event of a power
failure, data is not lost. In normal operation, data may be retained for several
years after removal of power.
This chapter should be used as a reference in conjunction with Appendix B of this
manual. Appendix A will provide a detailed description of the parameter, and
Appendix B will provide the programming code needed to access the parameter’s
register address.
Calibration Parameter Descriptions

The following Calibration Data parameter tables describe all of the possible
parameter entries for “Weight-Loss-Differential,” Weigh Belt, Weigh Auger and
Rotary Weigh Feeders, including those entries required for optional features. The
Calibration Data parameter descriptions will define the conditions in which the
particular parameter is used. In addition, it is important to understand that only
those parameters applicable to the SBC-2000 Controller will be listed.
There are various Calibration Data parameters and set points that a feeder may
require. Usage of these depends primarily upon the type of feeder (“Weight-Loss-
Differential”, Weigh Belt, Weigh Auger and Rotary) and the number or type of
options installed.
Typical Calibration Parameter Table
PARAMETER NAME................................................XXXXX.XX
Parameter Type Unit of Measure Minimum Value Maximum Value Default 1 Default 2 & 3
Read/Write LB/ HR, kg/HR 0 3 N/A N/A
The reference table format for each Calibration Data parameter (see above),
starting from top left to right, is as follows:
• The first group of characters indicates the specific manner in which the
parameter entry is labeled when accessing it from an SBC-2000 Keyboard/
Display Unit (optional).
• The Xs and decimal point indicate the maximum number of digits and decimal
places allowed for that particular entry (as displayed on the KDU). Floating
point numbers have a maximum displayed range of eight digits total, including
up to three digits to the right of the decimal point.
Immediately below each Display Message is a table with the parameter type, unit
of measure, minimum and maximum values, Default 1 and Defaults 2 and 3
Values for each Calibration Data parameter. N/A in a table denotes not applicable.
Immediately below the table is a brief explanation of the parameter and its usage.
Please read this section carefully for any specific examples and references
regarding the particular parameter.
In addition,”Help Screens” are available for all set point entries. When the desired
set point has been highlighted, pressing the “#” key will display a Help Screen if
one is available for that parameter. Pressing the “#” key a second time will display
the original Set Points Screen again. Refer to the screen for other options.

Table 0-1 Language Selection
LANG E-0 G-1..........................................X
Read/Write N/A 0 1 N/A N/A
The number entered configures the controller's software to utilize the language labels
selected for display purposes. To select English, enter a 0. To select German, enter a 1.
Table 0-2 Rate In Minutes

RATE IN MINUTES........................................X
Read/Write N/A 0 1 0 0
The SBC-2000 Controller can display feed rates and accept set points in pounds or
kilograms per minute in addition to pounds or kilograms per hour. Enter a zero (OFF) for
the feed rate in hours, or enter a one (ON) for feed rate in minutes.
NOTE:The SBC-2000 Controller does not recalculate any values when labels are changed. The
user must change and verify all Calibration Data parameter entries and set points when
changing labels.
Table 0-3 Calibration Trim

CAL TRIM........................................XXXX.XX
Read/Write See below 0 See Below N/A 0
The value entered is used to trim the actual feed rate to match the selected feed rate. This
is accomplished by operating the feeder in the Internal Gravimetric Mode at the selected
feed rate, taking several samples to establish the actual feed rate of material fed, and then
by entering this actual value as the Calibration Trim. The entered value should be within a
few percent of the Feed Rate Set Point. The SBC-2000 Controller will only accept a
Calibration Trim Value within 25 percent of the Feed Rate Set Point. A difference greater
than 25 percent would indicate a problem in some other area. If a trim is not required, or if
initially starting up a feeder, a zero should be entered.
Table 0-4 Proportional

PROPORTIONAL.......................................XX.XX
Read/Write N/A 0 9999.00 N/A 1.00
The SBC-2000 Controller offers either Proportional/Integral/Derivative (PID) Control or

Standard Control. Standard Control is selected by entering a value of zero in the calibration
entry for Integral. This causes the controller to use the Proportional Value in the same
manner that Gain is used. If PID Control is selected by entering a value other than zero in
the Calibration Data parameter for Integral, the controller uses the Proportional Value in
conjunction with the Integral Value. This entry is used to determine how much the motor
speed will change in response to feed rate variations. In general, the higher the number,
the greater the response.
There is an ideal proportional setting for each feeder/scale/material combination that must
be determined by trial and error. In general, a setting of 2 or 3 can be selected as a starting
point and varied up and down until optimum performance is achieved. This optimum point
A-4 SBC-2000
can be recognized by minimal motor speed variations and a displayed feed rate (in
Gravimetric Mode) within one percent of the selected feed rate.
Table 0-5 Select Programmed Defaults

ENTER DEFAULTS......................................XXX
The number entered selects a series of default (stored in program memory) for calibration
parameters that utilize common values in the majority of applications (reduces initial setup
time). After the selection is entered, the display will revert to its previous indication of zero.
When the default selection is entered, the programmed default values are automatically
transferred to their proper location in data memory, and can be verified by scrolling through
the parameter entry table. The value for a specific parameter may be changed at any time
by accessing the desired parameter and entering the new data.
The available selections are as follows:
• Enter a 1 to select Default 1 values for all parameters except those pertaining to
scale/feeder/material variations. Entering a one after a two has been entered will not
reset the Default 2 Values. These values must be re-entered individually with the
proper entries for the specific application.
• Enter a 2 to select Default 2 values for all parameters including those pertaining to
scale/feeder/material variations. Default 2 is generally selected when an Acrison
Feeder Emulator is utilized to test an SBC-2000 Controller. Default 2 also enters set
points and mode selections.
• Enter a 3 to select Default 3 with Software Feeder Emulation Mode. In this mode, the
SBC-2000 Controller will disable the feeder and/or motor controller (if connected)
and simulate (via software) the operation of a feeder and motor controller. Entering a
2 after a 3 has been entered will disable Software Feeder Emulation Mode.
Table 0-6 Integral

INTEGRAL...........................................XXX
Read/Write Seconds 0 60 0 0
The Integral Value is used in PID Control to compensate for long term variations in feed
rate (consistently higher or lower feed rates). The entered value is in seconds and valid
entries are from 0-60. Entering a zero turns the function off and selects Standard Control.
Table 0-7 Derivative

DERIVATIVE.......................................XXX.XXX
The Derivative value is used in PID Control. Valid entries are from 0-60. Acrison
recommends that this entry be set to zero.
Table 0-8 Auger/Belt/Rotary Select

MODEL................................................X

The number entered configures the SBC-2000 Controller to the specific type of Weigh
Feeder utilized. For a Model 203 Weigh Belt Feeder enter 0. For a Model 203B Weigh
Auger Feeder enter 1. For a Model 260 enter 2. For a Model 203 Weigh Belt Feeder
without a prefeeder, enter 3. For Weigh Auger Feeders without a prefeeder, enter 4. For a
pump with a motor, enter 5. For a pump without a motor, enter a 6. For a Rotary Feeder,
enter 7.
Table 0-9 Acri-Lok Set Point (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

ACRILOK SET PT %.................................XXXXX.X
Read/Write Percent 0 100 10.0 10.0
The Acri-Lok Set Point establishes the allowable instantaneous deviation of feed rate from
the previous value (in one-quarter second) before entering an Acri-Lok condition. Once in
Acri-Lok, the SBC-2000 Controller will cause the feeder to continuously feed in a
Volumetric Mode until the disturbance that triggered Acri-Lok ceases, and for whatever
interval is entered in the Acri-Lok Timer Calibration data parameter (see below). The Acri-
Lok Set Point differs from the Feed Rate Deviation Set Point in that Acri-Lok is based upon
an instantaneous disturbance to the scale, while the Deviation Set Point monitors longer
term feed rate variations. The Acri-Lok Set Point is entered as a number from 0-100, with
the allowable intensity of the scale disturbance proportional to the number. Enter a zero to
disable the Acri-Lok function. Enter the desired percentage; generally, this number is about
10 percent.
Table 0-10 Acri-Lok Timer (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

ACRILOK TIME.........................................XX
This entry selects the number of seconds the SBC-2000 Controller will remain in Acri-Lok
after a scale disturbance. Acri-Lok causes the feeder to remain in a Volumetric Mode
during this interval. However, when operating in External Mode, the feeder will follow an
external signal when in Acri-Lok. The amount of disturbance required to trigger an Acri-Lok
condition is user selectable. Enter a zero to disable the Acri-Lok Timer function.
Table 0-11 Deviation Set Point

DEV SET POINT .....................................XXX.X
This entry establishes the percent deviation of feed rate (plus or minus) from the Feed Rate
Set Point at which an alarm is initiated. This deviation is determined by comparison of the
displayed feed rate to the Feed Rate Set Point. The alarm output will be activated after the
displayed feed rate exceeds the allowable deviation for the amount of time entered as the
Deviation Timer entry. The alarm will remain on until the feed rate returns to acceptable
limits. Enter a zero to disable the Deviation Alarm.
Table 0-12 Deviation Timer

DEV TIMER .........................................XXXX
Read/Write Seconds 0 See Below 30 30
A-6 SBC-2000
This entry sets the amount of time, in seconds, that the feed rate can exceed the Deviation
Set Point, as entered in Table 0-11, before indicating an alarm. In general, a value of 30
seconds is selected.
Table 0-13 Scale Signal Averaging

SCALE AVERAGING.......................................X
Read/Write N/AR 0 3 1 1
This entry selects the number of scale weight samples that are averaged by the SBC-2000
Controller to derive an optimum scale signal. The entry must be a number between 0-3,
with one corresponding to the least number of samples, and three corresponding to the
greatest number of samples. Entering a zero represents no averaging. The normal setting
is one, which is the default value. Entering a number greater than three will revert the entry
to the default value. Entries greater than one may be necessary in cases of extreme plant
vibration, non-typical environmental conditions or material characteristics.
Table 0-14 Maximum Feed Rate

MAX RATE ............................................XX
Read/Write See Below N/A N/A N/A 9000.00
This value represents the maximum amount of product that a particular feeder/material
combination can discharge per hour, and is used for the Fast Start feature that permits the
feeder to instantaneously start on rate.
The value, if known, is entered in pounds or kilograms per hour. For large feeders, this is
the recommended procedure. For small feeders, or when the Maximum Feed Rate is not
known, the SBC-2000 Controller has the capability for determining this rate by running the
feeder at 50 percent motor speed for one minute and 100 percent motor speed for one
minute. The controller will automatically calculate and enter the value. This procedure
should be followed only after initial operation of the feeder has been achieved. The
procedure is as follows:
• Ensure that sufficient material is in the feeder's hopper/tank.
• Access the Feeder Commands Menu, then use the Up Arrow or Down Arrow buttons
to position the cursor over MAX RATE START and then press the Enter button to
confirm your selection.
• Write a “Start Max Rate” command to the SBC-2000 via the host controller
(Parameter Index Code 246).
• The controller will operate the feeder for one minute at 50 percent motor speed and
generate MAX R as the current control mode. At the end of one minute, the SBC-
2000 Controller will automatically enter the calculated feed rate for 50 percent motor
speed then, the motor speed will increase to maximum (100 percent). At the end of
one more minute, the controller will shut itself off, display and automatically enter the
calculated Maximum Feed Rate.
NOTE: In the event that the size of a metering auger is changed, for example, a new Maximum
Feed Rate value corresponding to the changed variable must be entered. If a product with a
different bulk density is used, the Maximum Feed Rate is automatically recalculated when the
new Bulk Density value is entered (see Table 0-65).
If changes in bulk density due to time, temperature, humidity, etc., are detected and the
Compensation Selection (see Table 0-33) is set to Max Feed Rate Compensation, the
SBC-2000 Controller can automatically adjust the Maximum Feed Rate Entry accordingly
for the purpose of maintaining the accuracy of the Fast Start Feed Rate calculation (see
Table 0-20). Thus, the value shown in the Calibration Data parameter table may differ from
the entered value, over time.
NOTE: The operating program calculates this value every 15 seconds while running, if no alarms

are present, and allows a maximum change of 2.5 percent every 15 seconds. However, it is
important to note that this feature is not intended to replace manual entry of a new bulk density
when a product is changed.
Table 0-15 High Level Set Point (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

HIGH LEVEL ........................................XX.X
Read/Write Percent See Below See Below 80.0 80.0
The High Level Set Point is the percentage of the “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeder's
hopper (or tank) level at which the High Level digital output is activated. If a Refill Cycle is in
progress, refill will end at this point. The High Level Set Point is entered as a percentage,
with the average value about 80 percent.
Table 0-16 Low Level Set Point (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

LOW LEVEL .........................................XX.X
The Low Level Set Point is the percentage of the “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeder's
hopper (or tank) level at which the Low Level digital output is activated. If in Auto Refill
Mode, a refill will be initiated at this time. The Low Level Set Point is entered as a
percentage, with the average value about 20 percent.
Table 0-17 Empty Level Set Point (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

EMPTY LEVEL.........................................XX.X
The value entered determines the percentage of the “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeder's

hopper (or tank) level at which the Empty digital output and the Empty alarm output is
energized. Normally, a value of 10 percent is entered for this parameter.
Table 0-18 Refill Timer (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

REFILL TIME..........................................XXX
This entry determines the time, in seconds, that a Refill Cycle is allowed. The Refill Timer
starts timing once a refilling is started. If the Refill Timer times out before reaching the High
Level Set Point (Table 0-15), refill will automatically be terminated. Enter a zero to disable
the Refill Timer. In general, a value of 120 seconds is selected.
Table 0-19 Refill Delay (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

REFILL DELAY..........................................XX
This entry selects the number of seconds the SBC-2000 Controller will wait before initiating
a Fast Start after a refill. It enables the user to select either Standard or Fast Refill Cycles.
A-8 SBC-2000
Enter a zero to select a Standard Refill Cycle, while any other value from 1-99 selects a
Fast Refill Cycle.
Table 0-20 Start Band

START BAND...........................................XX
This entry selects the number of seconds the SBC-2000 Controller will remain in the Fast
Start condition after a run command is initiated. The Fast Start feature allows the controller
to instantaneously start on rate by adjusting the feeder's motor speed to a value based on
the Maximum Feed Rate calculation and the desired Feed Rate Set Point. During the Fast
Start time, the scale signal is calculated and is not immediately usable for control. The Start
Band entry is used to delay the closed-loop gravimetric control during this period of
calculation.
The number entered must be between 3-60 seconds, with the average or typical value
equal to 15 seconds. Any number less than 3 or greater than 60 will not be accepted by the
controller. Numbers greater than 15 may be necessary in cases of non-typical
environmental conditions or material characteristics. Numbers less than 15 may be
necessary in cases of Master/Slave or Ratio/Proportioning Systems.
CAUTION: Most applications cannot use less than an 8-10 second Start Band and still function
properly.
Table 0-21 Motor Speed Acceleration

MOTOR SPD ACCEL.......................................XX
(OBSOLETE) The entered value determines how quickly the feeder motor responds to set
point changes. The higher the number, the faster the response. The Motor Speed
Acceleration is entered as a number from 1-99. In general, a value of 50 is selected. Enter
a zero to disable all motor control serial communications, such as when using an analog
control for the motor.
Table 0-22 Maximum Motor Load

MAX MOTOR LOAD........................................XX
Read/Write Amperes 0 See Below 15 15
(OBSOLETE) The entered value determines the motor current in DC amperes at which
Current Limiting will start. The usual value is 15 for a one horsepower motor, but this value
may be changed if desired.
When the Maximum Motor RPM parameter (see Table 0-24) is 1801 or 3001, the Current
Limiting Entry is represented in 100 milliampere increments instead of 1 ampere
increments. A display of 15 amps would actually imply 1.5 amps. This is intended for use
with small motors that draw less current.
Table 0-23 Motor Speed in PCT or RPM

MTR SPD PCT-0 RPM-1...................................XXX

This entry permits the user to view motor speed in either percent of maximum or in RPM of
the motor (0-1800 typical). The entry defaults to a zero value (percent setting). Entry of a
one will cause the motor speed to be displayed in RPM, based on the value of the
Calibration Data parameter entered in Table 0-63.
Table 0-24 Maximum Motor Rpm

MAX RPM 1800/3000..................................XXXX
Read/Write RPM 1800 or 1801 3000 or 3001 N/A N/A
For SBC-2000 CM/DSP Controllers the entered value is used with certain AC/VF motor
controllers to convert frequency to RPM, primarily for display purposes.
(OBSOLETE) The entered value (1800 or 3000) equals the maximum motor speed in RPM
of the motor in use. The Maximum Motor RPM parameter is utilized by the controller to
calculate motor speed. For domestic applications, the number is always 1800 (or 1801).
The 01 causes the Current Limiting Entry (Table 0-22) to be represented in 100 milliamp
increments instead of 1 amp increments. .
Table 0-25 Select English/Metric Units

SELECT UNITS........................................XXX
Read/Write See Below 0 3 N/A N/A
The number entered configures the SBC-2000 Controller’s software for use with either
English or Metric weight unit labels. The SBC-2000 Controller does not recalculate any
values when weight unit labels are changed.
For use with “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders: for weight unit labels in pounds (LB.),
pounds per hour (LB./H), pounds per cubic foot (LB./CF) and cubic feet (CF), enter a zero.
For weight unit labels in kilograms (KG), kilograms per hour (KG/H), kilograms per cubic
meter (KG/CM) and cubic meters (CM), enter a one. For weight units labels in kilograms
(KG), kilograms per hour (KG/H), kilograms per liter (KG/L) and liters (L), enter a two. For
weight units labels in grams (G), grams per hour (G/H), grams per liter (G/L) and liters (L),
enter a three.
For use with Weigh Belt and Weigh Auger Feeders: for weight unit labels in pounds
(LB), pounds per hour (LB/H), pounds per cubic foot (LB/CF) and cubic feet (CF), enter a
zero. For weight unit labels in kilograms (KG), kilograms per hour (KG/H), kilograms per
cubic meter (KG/CM) and cubic meters (CM), enter a one. For weight unit labels in tons (T),
tons per hour (T/H), tons per cubic foot (T/CF) and cubic feet (CF), enter a two. For weight
units labels in grams (G), grams per hour (G/H), grams per liter (G/L) and liters (L), enter a
three.
Table 0-26 Scale Full

SCALE FULL.......................................XXXXXX
Read/Write Bits N/A N/A N/A 999999
This entry is a six-digit value representing a “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeder's scale

signal with a weight equal to the scale's maximum capacity applied to the scale, or to a
Weigh Belt, Weigh Auger or Rotary Feeder's scale signal with a weight on the scale equal
to the scale's maximum capacity.
A-10 SBC-2000
Table 0-27 Scale Alarm Disable
T/S ALARM.............................................X
For feeders that do not utilize a scale (Acrison's volumetric feeders, for example), the Scale
alarm should be disabled. Valid entries are 0-1. Choose your entry from the selections
shown in the following Table:
Entry Scale Alarm

0 Enabled
1 Disabled
Table 0-28 Scale Empty

SCALE EMPTY.......................................XXXXXX
Read/Write Bits N/A N/A N/A 500000
This entry is a six digit value representing a “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeder's scale

signal with the feeder and supply hopper (or tank) completely empty of material, or with the
Weigh Belt, Weigh Auger or Rotary Feeder completely empty of material.
Table 0-29 Maximum Scale Weight

MAX WEIGHT.......................................XXX.XXX
Read/Write See Below N/A N/A N/A 600.000
The entered value represents the maximum weighing capacity of the scale in weight units.
Table 0-30 Chamber Size (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

CHAMBER SIZE.......................................X.XXX
Read/Write CF, CM, or L N/A N/A N/A 1.000
This entry represents the volume capacity of the “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeder's

metering mechanism, excluding its integral supply hopper (or tank), and must be entered in
cubic feet, cubic meters or liters.
Table 0-31 Hopper Size (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

HOPPER SIZE.......................................XX.XXX
Read/Write CF, CM, or L N/A N/A N/A 1.000
This entry represents the volume capacity of the integral hopper (or tank) used with a
“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeder, excluding the feeding mechanism (chamber). The
volume of the hopper (or tank) in use must be entered in cubic feet, cubic meters or liters.

Table 0-32 Inferential Totalization
MS/FR FACTOR.....................................XXX.XXX
Read/Write N/A See Below See Below N/A N/A
This entry is used by the SBC-2000 Controller only when operating in the Volumetric Mode
and when a scale signal is not present. The entered value is used by the controller to
calculate Inferential Totalization and feed rate for volumetric operation of feeders that are
not connected to a weigh scale. The entered value is typically about 27, and its use is
illustrated in the following formula:
MS  BD  FACTOR
--------------------------------------------------------  14, 400 = FEED RATE/ HR
10, 000, 000
where MS = motor speed and BD = bulk density.

If the value for the Feed Rate Factor is not known, enter a value of 27 and adjust it as
necessary to obtain displayed Total Fed values that are as close as possible to actual
measured samples.
Table 0-33 Compensation Selection

AUTOCOMP MODE.........................................X
The SBC-2000 Controller is capable of calculating four different types of compensations.

Compensation values are utilized in ensuring long-term feed rate accuracy. See
descriptions in Chapter 7 of the SBC-2000 Operating and Instruction Manual. The four
compensation types are as follows:
Bulk Density Compensation is either selected by the operator to be ON (enabled) or OFF
(disabled). If a one or two had been entered for the Compensation Selection, the bulk
density will be recalculated by the controller at 15-second intervals regardless of the entries
for Manual Compensation Value and Automatic Compensation Value. Enter a zero, three,
four, or five for the Compensation Selection to disable Bulk Density Compensation.
Max and Mid-Feed Rate Compensation is either selected by the operator to be ON
(enabled) or OFF (disabled). If a one, two, three, or five had been entered for the
Compensation Selection, the Max and Mid-Feed Rates will be recalculated by the
controller at 15-second intervals regardless of the entries for Manual Compensation value
and Automatic Compensation value. Enter a zero or four in the Compensation Selection to
disable Max and Mid-Feed Rate Compensation.
Head Effect Compensation is either selected by the operator to be ON (enabled) or OFF
(disabled). Enter a zero, two, three, or five in the Compensation Selection to disable
Automatic Head Effect Compensation. Enter a one or four for the Compensation Selection
to enable Automatic Head Effect Compensation. If enabled, a value is entered either
manually by the operator or automatically by the SBC-2000 Controller. For Manual Head
Effect Compensation, the operator calculates the Head Effect Compensation value using
the formula in Section Table 0-36, and enters the resultant value as the Manual
Compensation value. Or, for Automatic Head Effect Compensation, the operator enters a
zero as the Manual Compensation Value and allows the controller to calculate and display
the Automatic Compensation Value (Table 0-36).
If any number other than zero is entered for the Manual Compensation value, the controller
will ignore the Compensation Selection and the Automatic Compensation value, and use
the Manual Compensation value for Manual Head Effect Compensation.
Proportional Compensation is either selected by the operator to be ON (enabled) or OFF
(disabled). If a five had been entered for the Compensation Selection, the Proportional term
A-12 SBC-2000
of the PID loop will automatically be set or reset to 25 any time the feeder enters a Fast
Start mode of operation. The Proportional term will then be automatically incremented if the
Feed Rate error is above 1% and decremented if it is below 1%. The maximum value the
proportional term can reach is 25 while the minimum value is 2.
The following Table summarizes which types of compensation are active with each
possible Compensation Selection Entry.
Auto Compensation Enter a 0 for Enter a 1 for Enter a 2 for Enter a 3 for MAX Enter a 4 for Enter a 5 for
Mode “OFF” “ON” BULK RATE HEAD EFF PROPORTIONAL
Bulk Density
NO YES YES NO NO NO
Compensation
Max and Mid Feed
NO YES YES YES NO YES
Rates
Head Effect
NO YES NO NO YES NO
Compensation
Proportional Value
NO NO NO NO NO YES
Compensation
Table 0-34 Positive Manual Compensation (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

POS MAN COMP........................................XX.X
Read/Write Percent 0 See Below 0.00 0.00
The Manual (Head Effect) Compensation parameter is used to correct for an extreme
fluctuation in a “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeder's output during refill (Volumetric Mode),
caused by products that are sensitive to varying hopper levels. Use the formula in Table 0-
36 to calculate the Manual Compensation Value. If the value is positive, enter a Positive
Manual Compensation Value; if the value is negative, see Table 0-35. When a Positive
Manual Compensation Value is entered, the controller enters a zero for the Negative
Manual Compensation Value.
NOTE: The Compensation feature is only necessary in a small percentage of applications and
therefore, the entry will almost always be 0.
Table 0-35 Negative Manual Compensation (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

NEG MAN COMP.......................................X.XXX
The SBC-2000 Controller's software provides for manual entry of a negative value for
Negative Head Effect. Use the formula in Table 0-36 to calculate the Manual Compensation
Value. If the value is negative, enter a Negative Manual Compensation Value; if the value is
positive, see Table 0-34. When a Negative Manual Compensation Value is entered, the
controller enters a zero for the Positive Manual Compensation Value.
NOTE: The Compensation feature is only necessary in a small percentage of applications and
therefore, the entry will usually be 0.
Table 0-36 Auto Compensation (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

AUTO COMP..........................................X.XX
The Automatic (Head Effect) Compensation Entry is used to correct for an extreme
fluctuation in a “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeder’s output during refill (Volumetric Mode),
caused by products that are sensitive to varying hopper levels. The number entered

represents the percentage difference between the feeder's motor speed with the hopper
nearly full (high level), and the feeder's motor speed with the hopper nearly empty (low
level). To calculate the percentage manually, the user must first determine the variation in
feeder motor speed for a fixed Gravimetric Feed Rate as the hopper (or tank) level varies
from high to low level. The full and empty motor speeds are then converted to the proper
entry form by the following formula and entered accordingly:
(Empty Speed %) – (Full Speed %) 10, 000

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X ----------------------------------------------------------------------
(Empty Speed %) (High Level) –  Low Level 
If Automatic (Head Effect) Compensation has been selected (Table 0-33), the SBC-2000
Controller will calculate the compensation percentage by monitoring the motor speed at the
start and end of each Refill Cycle, using the formula found above. This feature is only
necessary in a very small percentage of “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeder applications and
therefore, the entry will almost always be a zero.
NOTE: If any number other than zero is entered for the Manual Compensation Value, the
controller will ignore the Automatic Compensation Value and use the Manual Compensation
Value.
Table 0-37 Compensation Input Selection (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

COMP INPUT............................................X
Read/Write N/A 0 1 N/A 0
If Automatic Compensation has been selected, the SBC-2000 Controller will use and
monitor either the feeder motor speed or motor command to calculate the compensation
percentage. Enter a zero for motor speed; Enter a one for motor command.
Table 0-38 External Fast Start Threshold (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

EXT THRESHOLD.......................................XX.X
This entry allows the user to select the amount that the Feed Rate Set Point must change
before a Fast Start is triggered. The entry is a percent in the range of 0-100 percent in 0.1
percent increments. This parameter is active and functions in the Internal and External
Gravimetric Modes as follows:
• In the Internal Gravimetric Mode, if the entry is set to zero, a Fast Start will never
occur regardless of the amount that the set point changes. If the entry is set to a non-
zero value (in percent), a new set point must exceed the old set point by this amount
before a Fast Start occurs.
• In the External Gravimetric Mode, if the entry is set to a non-zero value, the
Composite Feed Rate Set Point can change up to this percentage (between two
consecutive quarter-second intervals) before a Fast Start occurs. During refill or Acri-
Lok, normal gravimetric pacing of the feeder to the External Input Signal is disabled.
However, if the External Input Signal exceeds the threshold, the feeder will Fast Start
to the new rate. If this entry is set to zero, the Threshold Value will be a fixed 10
percent.
Table 0-39 Alarm Latch/Unlatch

ALARM LATCH-1 OFF-0....................................X
A-14 SBC-2000
This entry configures the operation of the alarm output and alarm indications of the SBC-
2000 Controller. When Alarm Latching is enabled by entering a one, the alarm output and
alarm indication remain energized (latched). The alarm output can be reset
(acknowledged) anytime. The alarm indication can be reset once the condition no longer
exists. When Alarm Latch is disabled by entering a zero, the alarm output and alarm
indication are reset automatically by the controller when the alarm condition no longer
exists.
Table 0-40 Batch Mode Configuration

BATCH MODE OUT-0 IN-1 WV-2.............................X
This entry configures the SBC-2000 Controller for Batch Mode. For “Weight-Loss-
Differential” Feeders, feeding either volumetrically or gravimetrically to a preset weight,
enter a zero for Batch-out. For applications where product will be weighed into a scale-
mounted hopper [Gain-In-Weight, Acrison Model 403B (D)], enter a one for Batch-in.
Table 0-41 Batch Delay

BATCH DELAY..........................................XXX
This entry represents the delay time until the Batch Complete digital output is enabled by
the SBC-2000 Controller at the end of a Batch Cycle. The Batch Delay is primarily used in
multi-feeder batch applications where the next feeder in the process is to be turned on by
the Batch Complete digital output of the previously operated feeder.
NOTE: For program versions prior to B26 and C02 the SBC-2000 Program included a minimum
three second delay for this entry (scale settling time). The number entered was added to the
minimum delay time to obtain the total Batch Delay Time desired. Enter a zero for a minimum
delay time of three seconds. However, the three second minimum is always recommended.
Table 0-42 Batch-lok Set Point

BATCHLOK SETPT........................................XX
Read/Write Percent 0 100 00 00
The Batch-lok feature provides a means of maintaining the batch accuracy of a “Weight-
Loss-Differential” Feeder or a Model 403B (D) Batch/Dump unit when random or
unintentional scale disturbances are encountered during a batch cycle. The number
entered establishes the allowable instantaneous deviation of the scale weight signal before
entering a lockout condition. If Batch-lok is triggered during a batch, the feeder is
automatically stopped, the display indicates BATCHLOK IN EFFECT and the batch cycle is
held for 15 seconds after the disturbance no longer exists. When the Batch-lok Timer
expires, the display message clears and the batch cycle resumes and continues until Batch
Complete provided there are no additional scale disturbances encountered. The Batch-lok
Set Point is entered as a percentage with the allowable intensity of the scale disturbance
proportional to the number entered. Enter a zero to disable the Batch-lok feature.
Table 0-43 Batch Deviation Set Point

BATCH DEV .........................................XX.X
Read/Write Percent 0 N/A 10.0 10.0

This entry establishes the percent deviation plus or minus from the Batch Size Set Point at
which an Alarm is initiated and the message BATCH DEVIATION ALARM appears on the
display. This deviation is determined by comparison of the displayed Batch Fed to the
Batch Size Set Point when Batch Complete occurs. The Error Message will clear when the
Alarm Acknowledge button is pressed. The Alarm output will remain energized until
acknowledged. Enter a zero to disable the Batch Deviation Alarm.
Table 0-44 Batch Through Refill (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

BATCH THRU REFILL......................................X
This entry is used to determine if refill can occur during a batch if a requested Batch Size
Set Point exceeds the capacity of the “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeder's hopper (or tank),
where the feeder would stop, refill, and then continue the batch. When enabled, the SBC-
2000 Controller will permit the feeder to continue to feed during the Refill Cycle, while
inferentially totalizing. Enter a zero to disable or a one to enable Batch Through Refill.
Table 0-45 Refill After Batch (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

REFILL AFTER BATCH.....................................X
The SBC-2000 Controller optionally allows each feeder's integral supply hopper (or tank) to
be automatically refilled after every completed batch. Enter a zero to disable or a one to
enable Refill after Batch.
Table 0-46 Stop On Empty/RTO (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

STOP ON..............................................X
The SBC-2000 Controller optionally allows for instantaneous shutdown after receiving a
Refill Timer or an Empty Alarm. Valid entries are from 0-3. Enter a 0 to disable
instantaneous shut-down for either condition, enter a 1 to enable Stop on Empty and/or
Refill Time-Out, enter a 2 to enable Stop on Refill Time-Out only, or enter a 3 to enable Stop
on Empty only.
Table 0-47 Settle Delay

SETTLE DELAY..........................................XX
Read/Write Seconds 0 99 N/A 10
The SBC-2000 Controller allows for entry of a Settling Time (delay). This delay occurs
immediately after a Refill Cycle has ended and before a new batch can begin. Enter a zero
to disable Settle Delay. Entering too low a value may cause errors if the scale is still in
motion when a new batch begins.
A-16 SBC-2000
Table 0-48 Dribble Speed Set Point
DRIBBLE SPEE........................................XX.X
Read/Write Percent N/A N/A 5.0 5.0
The Dribble Speed Set Point is used to set the motor speed, in percent, when the Dribble
Point (see below) is reached during an active batch. The value is used in both Gravimetric
and Volumetric Modes. The Dribble Speed Set Point can be changed at any time before, or
during a batch, if necessary.
Table 0-49 Dribble Point

DRIBBLE POINT.....................................XXX.XXX
Read/Write LB/KG 0 N/A 0.000 2.500
The Dribble Point is selected as the weight (in pounds or kilograms) remaining in the batch
at which point the feeder's motor speed is switched to the Dribble Speed Set Point, as
entered in Table 0-48.
Table 0-50 Ramping Interval

RAMP INTERVAL......................................XXX.X
The number entered represents the time, in seconds, it will take for the feed rate output to
reach the desired set point. This ability to slowly increase the feed rate upon a Run
Command is called ramping and is useful in applications where the feed rate must be
increased slowly in order to prevent overloading or jamming of equipment that is receiving
the feeder's output. Ramping ends when the selected interval expires. It begins again only
after the feeder is stopped and the RUN button is again pressed. Ramping can be selected
from 4-999 seconds. A zero must be entered if the ramping feature is not desired.
Table 0-51 Password

PASSWORD...........................................XXXX
Read/Write N/A N/A N/A 1234 1234
This entry allows the user to assign a four digit numeric password to replace the default
password of 1 2 3 4. If a new password is entered, extreme care should be taken to
properly record the new password since it is maintained in a section of memory that has a
data retention time of several years. This fact also requires that care should be exercised
when changing the CPU-1 Module to avoid any confusion arising from the result of an
unknown password.
Table 0-52 Initialization Delay (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

INIT DELAY...........................................XX

This entry allows the user to establish the amount of time after power-up during which refills
cannot occur. This time allows the scale mechanism to settle-out after power-up. This entry
should be left at 4 seconds unless a change is absolutely required.
Table 0-53 Don't Pace In Refill (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

DON’T PACE IN FILL....................................X
The SBC-2000 Controller has the ability to enable or disable pacing an external signal
during refill when a feeder is in the External Gravimetric Mode. Enter a zero to disable
pacing (ON) or a one to enable pacing (OFF), during refill, while in the External Gravimetric
Mode.
Table 0-54 Digital Output #1, #2

DIGITAL OUT 1.........................................XX
Read/Write N/A 0 See Below RUN RUN
SBC-2000 controllers are equipped standard with either 2 (SBC-2000) or 4 (SBC-2000 CM/
DSP) programmable outputs. Each controller Status or Alarm condition is assigned a
selection number. Entries for use with “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders are 0-35; entries
for use with Weigh Belt, Weigh Auger or Rotary Feeders are also 0-20. The following are
considered to be Alarms: Acri-Lok(12), -Dev(20), +Dev(19), Overfill(14), Empty(11), No
Tach(10), Overload(9), No Batch(22), Batch Dev(21) and 260 Belt Mistracking.
The Status or Alarm conditions and their corresponding transparent numbers for “Weight-
Loss-Differential” Feeders are as follows:
No. Status/Alarm No. Status/Alarm No. Status/Alarm

0 Off 1 Refill 2 Low Level
3 High Level 4 Run 5 Stop
6 Batch Complete 7 Batch Delay 8 Batch Running
9 Overload 10 No Tach 11 Empty
12 Acri-Lok 13 No Scale 14 Overfill
15 Alarm* 16 External Mode 17 Scale Alarm
18 Deviation* 19 Deviation (Plus) 20 Deviation (Minus)
21 Batch Deviation 22 No Batch 23 Dribble
24 Refill Timer Expired 25 Batch-Lok 26 Ramping
27 Power On 28 Deviation + - 29 Alarm 2*
30 Volumetric Mode 31 Refill Timer Pulse 32 Batch Mode
33 Fast Start Mode 34 RESERVED 35 Not Dribble
NOTES:
• Deviation (18) provides a contact closure for any deviation (+ or -) independent of +
Dev (19), - Dev (20) or Acri-Lok (12).
• Alarm (15) is activated by Acri-Lok (12), + Dev (19), - Dev (20), Overfill (14), Empty
(11), No Tach (10), or Overload (9).
• Alarm 2 (29) contact energizes for any Alarm except Acri-Lok (12) and Overfill (14).
• The Refill Timer Expired parameter (24) provides a temporary contact closure for 10
seconds after the Refill Timer has timed-out.
• Entering a number greater than 35 will default to 35.
A-18 SBC-2000
The Status or Alarm conditions and their corresponding transparent numbers for Weigh
Belt, Weigh Auger or Rotary Feeders are as follows:
No. Status/Alarm No. Status/Alarm No. Status/Alarm
0 Off 1 Conveyor On 2 Rezeroing
3 No Rezero Pending 4 Run 5 Stop
6 Volumetric Mode 7 Deviation (Plus) 8 Deviation (Minus)
9 Deviation 10 Overload 11 No Tach
12 13 No Scale 14
15 Alarm 16 17
18 19 Power On 20
NOTES:
• Deviation (9) provides a contact closure for any deviation (+ or -) independent of +
Dev (7), - Dev (8).
• Alarm (15) is activated by + Dev (7), - Dev (8), No Tach (11), or Overload (10).
• Alarm 2 (16) contact energizes for any Alarm.
• Entering a number greater than 20 will default to 20.
Table 0-55 Digital Output #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8

DIGITAL OUT 2...................................XXXXXXXXX
Read/Write N/A 0 N/A N/A N/A
This entry sets the function for the six isolated programmable digital outputs associated
with the Digital Expansion Option. Each output is capable of handling up to 35VDC at 500
mA. Operation is identical to Digital Output #1, #2.
Table 0-56 Digital Input #1 or #2

DIGITAL INPUT 1.......................................XX
Read/Write N/A 0 See Below Off Off
This entry assigns a status or condition to an external contact connected to the SBC-2000
Controller’s Digital Input #1 or Digital Input #2. Each status is assigned a selection number.
Available selections differ depending on the controller model and the type of feeder. The
description shown occurs when the contact is closed. Where two actions are indicated, the
first action refers to the contact open condition (e.g. Grav/Vol) and the second to the
contact closed condition.
The status or conditions that may be assigned, and their corresponding selection numbers,
are shown in the following charts. Selections are valid for both Loss-In-Weight and zero
reference feeder models except underlined choices that are zero reference only.
SBC-2000 CM/DSP Controllers

:
No. Status/Condition No. Status/Condition No. Status/Condition
0 Off 1 Remote Run 2 Refill / Conveyor Run
3 Clear Total 4 Alarm Acknowledge 5 Permissive Run
6 Delayed Permissive Run 7 Jog Feeder 8 260 Belt Has Mistracked
9 260 Belt Is Mistracking 10 Grav/Vol Change 11 EGrav (1) / IGrav (0)
12 Continuous / Batch Mode 13 Batch Abort 14 Reducer Set Point 1
15 Reducer Set Point 2 16 Remote w. Bypass 17 Refill OFF
18 EGrav (0) / EVol (1) 19 270 Snapshot Rezero Running
SBC-2000 Controller

:
0 Off 1 Remote Run 2 Refill / Conveyor Run
3 Clear Total 4 Alarm Acknowledge 5 Permissive Run
6 Delayed Permissive Run 7 Jog Feeder 8 260 Belt Has Mistracked
9 260 Belt Is Mistracking 14 Reducer Set Point 1 15 Reducer Set Point 2
Table 0-57 Digital Input #3, #4

DIGITAL IN 5..........................................XX
Read/Write N/A 0 N/A N/A N/Af
Digital Input #3 and #4—The number entered assigns a status or condition to an external
input contact connected to the Digital Input. For the SBC-2000 Controller these options
require the Digital Expansion Option. Digital Inputs #3 and #4 are standard on the SBC-
2000 CM/DSP Controllers. Operation is identical to Digital Input #1, #2 (see Table 0-56).
Table 0-58 Serial Input Span

SERIAL IN SPAN.....................................XXXXX
See Below N/A See Below See Below 0.00 9000
The entered number represents pounds or kilograms per hour (feed rate) or pounds or
kilograms (Batch Fed) that the SBC-2000 Controller recognizes as the maximum when the
Serial Input Signal is at its maximum (normal) or zero (reverse). If the Serial Input feature is
not required, this entry can be ignored.
Table 0-59 Run Delay

RUN DELAY............................................XX
This feature is primarily for use in blending system applications when it is desired to have
one feeder start a predetermined amount of time before another feeder in the system.
This entry enables the user to enter a specified time delay for starting a feeder upon
receiving a start request made via the host communication channel or Remote Run
(Permissive Run) contact. The feeder will start after the entered time has expired. Enter a
zero to disable the Start Delay. The Run button (1) on the SBC-2000 Keyboard/Display Unit
is not affected by this delay.
Table 0-60 Stop Delay

STOP DELAY...........................................XX
This feature is primarily for use in blending system applications or those applications where
it is desired to have one feeder stop a predetermined amount of time after another feeder in
the system.
A-20 SBC-2000
This entry enables the user to enter a specified time delay for stopping a feeder upon
receiving a stop request. The feeder will stop after the entered time has expired. Enter a
zero to disable the Stop Delay.
Table 0-61 Bumpless Transfer

BUMPLESS TRANSFER......................................X
The controller allows bumpless transfer from Internal or External Gravimetric Mode to
Internal Volumetric Mode or from Internal or External Volumetric Mode to Internal
Gravimetric Mode by tracking Feed Rate Set Point changes. For example, this allows the
user to start a feeder in Internal Volumetric Mode, slowly increase the Motor Speed Set
Point to the desired value, and then switch to Internal Gravimetric Mode. While in Internal
Volumetric Mode, the controller had already calculated the equivalent Feed Rate Set Point
at the current motor speed and enters that value when the control mode is changed. Enter
a zero to disable Bumpless Transfer (OFF) or a one to enable Bumpless Transfer (ON).
Table 0-62 Feeder Name

FEEDER ID.............................................X
Read/Write N/A N/A N/A SBC2K SBC2K
This entry allows identification of individual feeders and is especially useful when several
feeders are utilized in a common system. The identification name can be any combination
of alphanumeric characters and spaces, up to a maximum of eight, assigned by the user.
The entered name is held in memory and will be provided whenever this parameter is read.
Table 0-63 Maximum Motor Speed

MAX MOTOR SPD.....................................XXX.X
Read/Write Percent or RPM 0 See Below N/A 100
This entry allows the user to enter a value less than 100 percent (or 1800/3000 if in RPM
Mode) that will act as the maximum motor speed that the motor can attain. If this limit is
reached, the motor will remain at the maximum speed setting, and the message MAXIMUM
SPEED ATTAINED will be generated. The speed limit is disabled by entering a value of
zero or 100 percent (or 1800/3000 if in RPM Mode).
Table 0-64 Batch Timer

BATCH TIMER.........................................XXX
Parameter Type Unit of Measure Minimum Value Maximum Value Default 1 Default 1
Read/Write Minutes 1 999 N/A 1
This entry is used to determine if a batch is completed within a preset time after a start
command has been initiated. The number entered should be greater than the expected
batch time to ensure positive identification of an incomplete batch cycle. Range is 0-999
minutes. If the batch size selected does not complete before the Batch Timer expires, a “No
Batch Alarm” error message will be generated and the controller will energize an Alarm
Output.

Table 0-65 Bulk Density Set Point
BULK DENSITY.....................................XXXX.XX
Read/Write See below N/A N/A N/A 28.00
This entry represents the weight per unit volume of the material to be fed and causes the
Maximum Feed Rate Entry (Table 0-14) to be automatically recalculated when changed.
Bulk density is entered in pounds per cubic foot, kilograms per cubic meter or kilograms per
liter depending on the Calibration Data entry for UM (Table 0-25).
Table 0-66 Rezero Cycle Time

REZERO CYCLE TIME.....................................XX
The value indicates the amount of time a Weigh Belt, Weigh Auger or Rotary Feeder’s
weighing mechanism operates, during rezero, before the rezero sample is taken. The value
is entered in the range of 0-99 seconds, in one second intervals, and must always be
greater than the Retention Time entry (Table 0-67).
Table 0-67 Retention Time

RETENTION TIME.....................................XX.XX
Read/Write Seconds 0 99.99 N/A 5
The value indicates the time that product remains on a Weigh Belt Feeder's Weigh Belt, in
a Weigh Auger Feeder's Weigh Auger or in a Rotary Feeder’s pockets, and is utilized by
the controller in calculating the actual feed rate.
Table 0-68 Rezero At Start

RZ AT RUN/RUNOFF......................................X
The SBC-2000 Controller can be configured to automatically cause a rezero to be

performed whenever a Weigh Belt, Weigh Auger or Rotary Feeder is started. In addition,
the user can select to have the feeder's weighing mechanism respond to a stop command
by either stopping instantaneously or stopping after a short delay which allows the
conveyor mechanism sufficient time to empty its contents before the mechanism is stopped
by the controller. Valid entries are from 0-3. Choose your entry from the selections shown in
the following Table:
ENTRY REZERO AT RUNTIME FEEDER CONVEYOR

0 No Empties then stops
1 Yes Empties then stops
2 No Stops immediately
3 Yes Stops immediately
A-22 SBC-2000
Table 0-69 Rezero Timer
REZERO TIMER......................................XXX.XX
Read/Write Minutes 1 999 N/A 1
The value indicates the interval, in minutes from 1-999, when periodic rezeroing of the
Weigh Belt, Weigh Auger or Rotary Feeder's scale signal is desired. If Automatic Rezero is
selected by entering a Rezero Timer Interval, a rezero request from the timer will not be
honored until the feeder is stopped. At this time, Rezero will occur. Enter a zero to disable
the Auto Rezero Feature.
Table 0-70 Auger Set Pt. #X

AUGER SET PT.........................................#X
Read/Write See Below N/A N/A N/A N/A
This entry is for Weigh Auger and Rotary Weigh Feeders. The values entered are used to
trim the actual feed rate of these feeders to match the selected feed rate. If initially starting
up a feeder, these entries can be skipped until initial calibration is completed, then the
following procedure can be used to determine the value to be entered:
• Enter a zero into all five Set Points and Actual Feed Rates.
• Select five different feed rates that represent the desired operating range. Five
values must be selected.
• Enter each value selected as the Feed Rate Set Point and operate the feeder in the
Internal Gravimetric Mode while taking samples to establish the actual feed rate at
each point. Record both the set points and the actual feed rates measured.
• Enter into SET PT #1 the lowest Feed Rate Set Point used, and enter into ACTUAL
RATE #1, the actual feed rate measured at this set point.
Repeat Steps 1-4 to enter the remaining Feed Rate Set Points used and the actual feed
rates measured, into the corresponding entries.
Table 0-71 Actual Rate #X

ACTUAL RATE #X.................................XXXXXX.XXX
The values entered are used to trim the actual feed rate of a Weigh Auger or Rotary type
feeder to match the selected feed rate. If initially starting up a feeder, these entries can be
skipped until initial calibration is completed, then the following procedure can be used to
determine the value to be entered:
• Enter a zero into all five Set Points and Actual Feed Rates.
• Select five different feed rates which represent the desired operating range. Five
• Enter each value selected as the Feed Rate Set Point and operate the feeder in the
Internal Gravimetric Mode while taking samples to establish the actual feed rate at
each point. Record both the set points and the actual feed rates measured.
• Enter into SET PT #1 the lowest Feed Rate Set Point used, and enter into ACTUAL
RATE #1, the actual feed rate measured at this set point.
Repeat Steps 1-4 to enter the remaining Feed Rate Set Points used and the actual feed
rates measured, into the corresponding entries.

Table 0-72 Sample % Mtr Speed #X
Sample % Mtr Speed X.......................................XX
This entry is only used for certain loss-in-weight feeders and/or materials associated with
non-linear feeding properties. The values entered are used to trim the feed rate of the
feeder to match the selected feed rate set point. If initially starting up a feeder, these entries
can be skipped until initial calibration is completed, then the following procedure can be
used to determine the value to be entered:
• Enter a zero into all five Set Points.
• Select five different motor speeds that represent the desired operating range. Five
• Operate the feeder in the Internal Volumetric Mode for each of the five Sample % Mtr
Speed Set Points while noting the actual feed rate at each point. Record both the set
points and the actual feed rates measured.
• Enter into Sample % Mtr Speed #1 the lowest Motor Set Point used, and enter into
Actual Rate at Speed #1, the actual feed rate at this motor speed.
Repeat Steps 1-4 to enter the remaining Sample % Mtr Speed Set Points used and the
actual feed rates measured, into the corresponding entries.
Table 0-73 Actual Rate at SPD #X

ACTUAL RATE AT SPD X............................XXXXXX.XXX
This entry is for loss-in-weight feeders. See Table 0-72 above for details.
Table 0-74 Internal Gravimetric WT/HR.

INTERNAL GRAVIMETRIC WT/HR.......................XXXXX.XX
Read/Write LB./ HR., kg/HR. 0 999999 N/A 2500.00
The value returned is the currently active value of the desired Internal Gravimetric Feed
Rate Set Point in pounds or kilograms per hour. Enter the desired Feed Rate Set Point in
pounds or kilograms per hour.
Table 0-75 Internal Gravimetric WT/MIN.

INTERNAL GRAVIMETRIC WT/MIN.....................XXXXX.XXX
Read/Write LB./ MIN., kg/MIN. 0 999999 N/A 41.67
The value returned is the currently active value of the desired Internal Gravimetric Feed
Rate Set Point in pounds or kilograms per Min. The SBC-2000 Controller calculates this
value from the value entered above in Table 0-74.
A-24 SBC-2000
Table 0-76 External Gravimetric Set Point
EXT GRAV SET PT %...............................XXX.XXX
Read/Write PERCENT 0 800.000 N/A 100.000
The value displayed is the currently active value of the desired Feed Rate Ratio Set Point,
in conjunction with the Total Throughput Set Point or Input Span. Enter the External
Gravimetric Ratio Set Point as a percentage, from 0.000 to 100.000.
Table 0-77 Internal Volumetric Set Point

INT VOL SET PT %.................................XXX.X
The value displayed is the currently active value of the desired feeder Motor Speed Set
Point, in percent of maximum speed, entered in Table 0-80. The feeder Motor Speed Set
Point is entered as a percentage, from 0.0 to 100.0.
Table 0-78 External Volumetric Set Point

EXT VOL SET PT %..................................XXX.X
The value displayed is the currently active value of the desired Feeder Motor Speed Ratio
Set Point, in percent of maximum speed, entered in Table 0-80, in conjunction with the
span. The Feeder Motor Speed Set Point is entered as a percentage, from 0.0 to 100.0.
Table 0-79 Batch Size

BATCH SIZE...................................XXXXX.XXX
Read/Write LB., KG 0 999999 N/A 15.000
This entry indicates the currently active value of the Batch Size Set Point in pounds or
kilograms.
Table 0-80 Maximum Motor RPM

MAX MOTOR RPM.....................................XXXX
Read/Write RPM 1800 3000 1800 1800
The entered value (1800 or 3000) equals the maximum motor speed in RPM of the motor in
use. The Maximum RPM parameter is utilized by the controller to calculate motor speed.
For domestic applications, the number is always 1800.
Table 0-81 Preset Batches (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

PRESET BATCHES......................................XXX

This entry indicates the currently active value of the number of batches that will run
consecutively, in conjunction with the Batch Interval Entry (see Section Table 0-82), when a
start command is initiated. If running single batches, the minimum entered value is one.
Table 0-82 Batch Interval (“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders)

BATCH INTERVAL..................................XXXXXXXX
This entry represents the time interval between batches when running multiple batches
(see Table 0-39). If running single batches, this entry can be ignored.
Table 0-83 Batch Count

BATCH COUNT......................................XXXXXX
Read/Write N/A N/A 999999 N/A N/A
The SBC-2000 Controller can display the current number of batches completed since last
clearing the counter. Enter a zero to clear the counter.
Table 0-84 Batch Trim

BATCH TRIM......................................XXX.XXX
Read/Write LB. OR KG 0 SEE BELOW 0.000 0.000
The Batch Trim value is determined by operating the feeder in the Batch Mode, either
gravimetrically or volumetrically, by entering a Batch Size Set Point and by taking several
weight samples to establish the actual batch amount fed. If the actual amount fed differs
from the selected Batch Size Set Point, then enter the actual amount fed in pounds or
kilograms. The entered value should be within a few percent of the selected Batch Size Set
Point. The SBC-2000 Controller will only accept a Batch Trim value within 25 percent of the
entered Batch Size Set Point. A value greater than 25 percent would indicate a problem in
some other area. If a trim is not required, enter a zero.
Table 0-85 Batch Preact (“Weight-Loss-Differential” and “Batch/Dump” units)

BATCH PREACT...................................XXXXX.XXX
Read/Write LB. OR KG 0 N/A N/A N/A
The SBC-2000 Controller allows for entry of a Batch Preact parameter. This value
compensates for material in flight from one device to another. The SBC-2000 will subtract
this value in pounds or kilograms from the Batch Size Set Point. This is useful in Batch-In
applications where a volumetric feeder meters its product into a “scale-mounted” hopper or
tank, or in applications where a volumetric feeder or a weigh feeder meters into another
device. For example, if the Batch Size Set Point is 10.000 pounds and the Batch Preact is
0.250 pounds, the SBC-2000 Controller will deliver 9.750 pounds. Enter a zero to disable
Batch Preact.
A-26 SBC-2000
Table 0-86 Total Fed 1
TOTAL FED 1....................................XXXXX.XXX
Read/Write LB or KG 0.000 9,999,999 N/A N/A
The value indicates the amount of material fed, in pounds or kilograms, since the total was
last cleared. Totalization can continue to a maximum of 9,999,999 units before wrapping
back to a 0 value (overflow). The Total Fed Function may be cleared by writing a number to
the controller from the host. The Total Fed value is accurate to six significant digits only.
Therefore it is recommended that it be cleared regularly when running high feed rates in
order to provide the most accurate totalization.
Table 0-87 Total Fed 2

TOTAL FED 2....................................XXXXX.XXX
Read/Write LB or KG 0.000 9,999,9999 N/A N/A
See Total Fed 1 above.
Table 0-88 Total Throughput Set Point

TOTAL THROUGHPUT.................................XXXXX.XX
Read/Write LB./ HR., kg/HR. 0 999999 N/A 0
The active or desired Total Throughput (Feed Rate in weight units per hour) for a system of
feeders, when the controller is in the External Gravimetric Mode. The Total Throughput Set
Point is multiplied by the Ratio Set Point (see Table 0-76). Used with ratio control-type
systems.
Table 0-89 Analog Input #1 Parameter Select

AIN 1 SEL......................................XXXXX.XX
Read/Write N/A 0 See Below 0 0
This entry configures the Analog Input #1 to control one of five possible parameters: Feed
Rate (enter a 1), Batch Size (enter a 2), Motor Speed (enter a 3), Scale (enter a 4), and
Motor Current (enter a 5) [CM/DSP only] in conjunction with the Analog Input #1 Signal
Span Entry (see below). The Scale (enter a 4) parameter is primarily for applications other
than feeder control. It enables the SBC-2000 Controller to use an Analog Input Signal in the
same manner it normally uses a scale signal to provide a rate. When this feature is used,
the scale signal (BITS) shown on the Keyboard/Display Unit is in the range of 0–4095
instead of 0–999,999 as with a Weight Resolver. Values for Scale Empty and Scale Full
must be entered between 0 and 4095.
Table 0-90 Analog Input #2 Parameter Select

AIN 2 SEL......................................XXXXX.XX
Same as Analog Input #1 above, but for Channel 2.

Table 0-91 Analog Input #1 Span
AIN 1 SPAN.....................................XXXXX.XX
Read/Write See Below 0 See Below 0.00 9000.00
The entered number, depending on the Analog Input #1 Parameter Selection (see above),
represents the weight units per hour [LB/H, KG/H (Feed Rate)] or weight units [LB, KG
(Batch Fed)] or Motor Speed (percent) or Motor Current (Amps) that the controller
recognizes as the maximum value when the External Input Signal is at its maximum.
Table 0-92 Analog Input #2 Span

AIN 2 SPAN.....................................XXXXX.XX
Same as Analog Input #1 Span above, but for Channel 2.
Table 0-93 Analog Output #1 Parameter Select

AOUT 1 SEL.....................................XXXXX.XX
This entry configures Analog Output #1 to be proportional to one of the parameters shown
in the following chart. The motor command parameter represents the resultant corrective
signal after comparing the desired feed rate to the actual feed rate. Entries for use with
“Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders are 0–12; entries for use with Weigh Belt and/or Weigh
Auger Feeders are 0–4. The selectable parameters and their corresponding entry numbers
for “Weight-Loss-Differential” Feeders are:
No. Status/Con dition No. Status/Cond ition No . Status/Con dition

0 Analog Not Used 1 Feed Rate (Lb/H) 2 Total F ed #1 (Lb)
3 Batch Fed (Lbs) 4 Motor Speed 5 Motor C ommand (%)
6 Scale Weight (%) 7 Hopper Level (% ) 8 Set Point (Lb/H or %)
9 Batch Size (Lb) 10 Comp Set Pt (Lb/H) 11 Total F ed #2 (Lb)
12 Motor Current (A) 13 Fast Feed Rate
The selectable parameters and their corresponding entry numbers for Rotary Feeders,
Weigh Belt Feeders and/or Weigh Auger Feeders are:

0 Analog Not Used 1 Feed Rate (Lb/H) 2 Total Fed 1 (Lb)
3 Batch Fed (Lb) 4 Motor Speed (%) 5 Motor Command
6 Scale Weight (%) 7 Set Point (Lb/H or %)
A-28 SBC-2000
AOUT 2 SEL.....................................XXXXX.XX
Same as Analog Output #1 above, but for Channel 2.

AOUT 3 SEL.....................................XXXXX.XX

AOUT 4 SEL.....................................XXXXX.XX
Table 0-97 Analog Output #1 Span

AOUT 1 SPAN....................................XXXXX.XX
The entered number, depending on the Analog Output #1 Parameter Selection (see
above), represents the weight units per hour [LB/H, KG/H (Feed Rate)] or weight units [LB,
KG (Batch Fed)] or Motor Speed (percent) that the controller recognizes as the maximum
value when the Output Signal is at its maximum.

Same as Analog Output #1 Span above, but for Channel 2.


Table 0-101 Motor Controller Select

MTR PROTOCOL........................................1
When the volumetric motor controller is interfaced to the SBC-2000 using serial
communication, this entry is used to select the type and model of motor controller being
used. The selection determines the serial protocol to be used. The following selections are
currently available:
SBC-2000 CM/DSP Motor Controllers SBC-2000 Motor Controllers

0 Motor Controller does not interface serially 0 Motor Controller does not interface serially
1 Allen Bradley PowerFlex 40 1 Acrison 060 w/ CM-DSP Interface Module
2 Allen Bradley PowerFlex 70 or 700 Standard 2 Allen Bradley PowerFlex 40
3 Telemechanique / Square-D / Altivar Models 28, 31, 312 3 Allen Bradley PowerFlex 70 or 700
4 W eg Model CFW 09 4 Telemechanique / Square-D / Altivar Models 28, 31, 312
5 Yaskawa F7, G7 5 W EG CFW 09
6 ABB ACS 350/550 6 Yaskawa V7/G7
7 Telemechanique / Square-D / Altivar Model 71 7 Yaskawa V1000, A1000
8 Delta VFD-E
9 Yaskawa V7
10 Acrison 060 w/ CM-DSP Interface Module
11 Allen Bradley Powerflex 70 (Enhanced)
12 Allen Bradley PowerFlex 750
13 Yaskawa V1000, A1000
14 Allen Bradley PowerFlex 40-P
15 Allen Bradley PowerFlex 525
Table 0-102 CONSTANT (260 Weigh Belt)

CONSTANT..........................................XXX
Read/Write N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
This Operational Data Entry appears in place of Retention Time (A-67) if using a Model 260
Weigh Belt Weigher/Feeder. The value for Constant (K) represents the amount of time the
weighed material is on the belt, and is used by the SBC-2000 Controller to calculate feed
rate. Since the Constant Value is determined by Acrison for every application and is
entered at the factory, there should be no need to change the value. However, if changes
A-30 SBC-2000
are made to the mechanics of the weigher/feeder, the value for Constant may have to be
recalculated. The following formula can be used to determine the approximate value of K.
Verification is made by either taking timed samples of the actual feeder output, weighing
them, computing the actual feed rate and comparing the actual feed rate to the displayed
feed rate, or by the use of test chain weights supplied by the factory for this purpose. The
value of K is directly proportional to feed rate; therefore, if the feed rate is too high, K must
be decreased, and if the feed rate is too low, K must be increased.
K = (Maximum RPM of Pulley) X (Pulley Circumference) X 0.0173
where “Pulley” is the pulley at the inlet end of the feeder.
Operational Data Entries that refer to the rezeroing feature of the SBC-2000 Controller,
Rezero Timer and Rezero At Run Time, are disabled. These entries appear in the
Operational Data Table, but entering any value will have no effect on the operation of the
SBC-2000 Controller.
Table 0-103 Max Tach Frequency (260 Weigh Belt)

BELT TACH.........................................XXX
Read/Write Hz N/A N/A N/A N/A
This Model 260 Weigh Belt Operational Data Entry specifies the maximum value, in Hertz,
of the Tail Pulley Tachometer when the belt is running at 100% speed. This input is used
instead of reading the belt motor speed in order to provide higher accuracy than is provided
by the motor speed because of the possibility of belt slippage.
Table 0-104 IP Address

IP ADDRESS............................XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
(SBC-2000 DSP and CM Controllers) The Internet Protocol Address assigned to this
controller’s native Ethernet Port. This entry must be unique on the network to which it is
connected. Changes to this value will become effective after the controller’s power is
cycled. This setting can be set to a default value of “192.168.10.176” with a hard reset.
Table 0-105 Subnet Mask

SUBNET MASK...........................XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
(SBC-2000 DSP and CM Controllers) The Subnet Mask value associated with this
controller’s native Ethernet Port. Changes to this value will become effective after power is
cycled. This setting can be set to a default value of “255.255.255.0” with a hard reset.
Table 0-106 Mac Address (00-D0-6D)

MAC ADDRESS (00-D0-6D).......................XX-XX-XX
Read/Write N/A 00-00-00 99-99-99 N/A N/A

(SBC-2000 DSP and CM Controllers) The 12 digit Media Access Control (MAC)
Address value assigned to this controller by Acrison and associated with this controller’s
native Ethernet Port. This value should not be changed. Only the last 6 digits of the 12 digit
MAC Address may be entered. The value range for each digit is decimal 0 through 9.
Hexadecimal value entry is not supported. Changes to this value will become effective after
power is cycled.
Table 0-107 Keyboard Lock Level

KEYBOARD LOCK....................................X
This entry selects one of three possible Keyboard Lock conditions for the Graphics KDU
used with the SBC-2000 DSP and for remote or Addressable Keyboards.
Entering a “0” allows total access to parameters, including the clearing of the Total Fed #1
and #2 values and permits changing Operational Data values while in the Run mode.
Entering a “1” (Locked) prevents entering/changing any parameter or operating mode while
permitting display of all parameters. Entering a “2” prevents clearing of the Total Fed #1
and #2 values while permitting all other parameters and modes to be altered.
Table 0-108 ICON

ICON ..............................................X
The icon that appears on the Main Screen of the SBC-2000 DSP Graphic Display (for a
loss-in-weight feeder only) can be selected to be a screw-type feeding mechanism, or a
liquid pump symbol. This entry has no other effect on operation,
To select the screw-type feeding mechanism symbol, enter a “0.” To select a pump symbol
enter a “1.”
Table 0-109 Graph Parameter

GRAPH PARAMETER....................................X
The Main Screen of the SBC-2000 DSP Graphic Display provides a graph of a selectable
parameter. This GRAPH PARAMETER entry is the setting that selects which parameter to
graph. See also GRAPH INTERVAL below. There are six selections available:
Table 0-110 Reducer Set Points 1 and 2

REDUCER SET POINT 1/2 ................................XXX
Read/Write Percent 0 100 100 100
A-32 SBC-2000
No. Description
0 Feed Rate Error in %
1 Motor Speed in %
2 Motor Current in % G raph Interval Sam pling G raph Param eter
Entry Interval
3 Hopper Level in % Feed Rate O ther
4 Scale Weight in % 0 O ff N/A N/A
5 External Input in % 1 15 Sec +- 4% 0-100%
2 30 Sec +- 4% 0-100%
3 60 Sec +- 4% 0-100%
4 90 Sec +- 4% 0-100%
5 15 Sec. +- 20% 0-100%
6 30 Sec. +- 20% 0-100%
7 60 Sec. +- 20% 0-100%
8 90 Sec. +- 20% 0-100%
The entered number represents the percentage of the original value that the Feed Rate Set
Point is changed to while the associated Digital Input contact is closed. For example, a
value of 10 will cause the Feed Rate Set Point to change to 10% of its original value.
Opening the contact restores the original Feed Rate Set Point. If both Reducer Set Point 1
and 2 are used, the effect on the Feed Rate Set Point is the sum of the two. A 100% value
disables this function. A zero value will cause the Feed Rate Set Point to be zero, stopping
the feeder.
Table 0-111 Graph Interval

GRAPH INTERVAL....................................X
This GRAPH INTERVAL entry is used to control three graphing functions as follows:
1) When the entry is set to “0” graphing is turned off and the graph box on the SBC-2000
DSP Graphic Display is displayed as an empty box with the word “OFF” at the mid point
of the left side of the box.
2) When the GRAPH PARAMETER setting (above) is set to Feed Rate Error, this GRAPH
INTERVAL setting is used to select both the interval between graphed samples and the
graph axis setting. Entering a GRAPH INTERVAL value between 1 and 4 will select the
+-4% range while values between 5 and 8 will set the range to +-20% as shown in the
chart below.
3) When the GRAPH PARAMETER entry is set to select a parameter other than Feed Rate
Error, the graph axis will automatically be set to 0-100% and only the sampling interval is
selected with the GRAPH INTERVAL.
Table 0-112 Date and Time

DATE TIME................................XXXXXXXXXXXX
Read/Write Nonet 12 digits 12 digits N/A N/A
This parameter is associated with the SBC-2000 DSP/C color KDU. It is used to set or read
the time and date for the internal real time clock chip in that controller.
The entered or read value will always be 12 digits as follows (no spaces):
MMDDYYHHMMSS
MM is month in 2 digits 01 to 12.

DD is day in 2 digits 01 to 31.
YY is year in 2 digits 10-99.
HH is hour in 24 hour format 00 to 23.
MM is minute in 2 digits 0-59.
SS is second in 2 digits 0-59.
A-34 SBC-2000
Table 0-113 Controller to display this parameter.List of all available Commands
Command Description
This command starts the feeder motor of the metering mechanism following normal
Start Feeder system checks for the required mode selections and parameters.
Stop Feeder The STOP command stops the feeder motor and stops the current batch. Press the RUN
key to restart (continue) the batch.
Select Continuous Mode Set the current operating mode to Continuous operations.
Select Batch Mode Sets the current operating mode to Batch operations.
Select Internal Gravimetric Switches the controller to the Internal Gravimetric Mode.
Select External Gravimetric Switches the controller to the External Gravimetric Mode.
Select Internal Volumetric Switches the controller to the Internal Volumetric Mode.
Select External Volumetric Switches the controller to the External Volumetric Mode.
Select External Fast Mode Switches the controller to the External Fast Start Mode.
Initiates a Refill Cycle provided the level in the supply hopper (or tank) is below the High
Start a Refill [W-L-D]
Level Set Point Entry (see Table 0-15).
Stop a Refill [W-L-D] Initiates a stop of any Refill Cycle in progress.
Start Rezero Initiates a Rezero Cycle (replaces Refill Mode with Zero-Reference feeder).
Abort Rezero Pending Aborts scheduled Rezero Cycle (replaces Refill Mode with Zero-Reference feeder).
Auto Refill Mode [W-L-D] Specifies the Automatic Refill Mode.
Man Refill Mode [W-L-D] Specifies the Manual Refill Mode.
Acknowledges any alarm that is pending by clearing the alarm message and alarm
Alarm Acknowledge indicator, if the cause of the alarm has been properly restored to its normal condition.
Emergency Stop Immediately stops feeder motor. Unlike a normal stop, is not subject ancillary features
such as Stop Delay.
Batch Abort function that cancels any batch in progress at any time. This command
Cancel Batch in Progress
aborts the current batch; terminates a series of batches that may be in progress.
The controller enters a mode where scaling factors can be used for each of the
Select "Scaling Factors" Mode parameters (protocols that do not support floating point values).
Exit “Scaling Factors” Mode Exits the Scaling Mode.
Clear “Scaling Factors” Clears all scaling factors from memory.
Start Max Rate Initiates 100% motor speed for calibration.
Initiates Parameter Remap Mode (refer to Table 4-3, Parameter Remapping—Example

Enter “Parameter Remap” Mode of procedure on page 7).
Exit “Parameter Remap” Mode Exits Parameter Remap Mode (refer to Table 4-3, Parameter Remapping—Example of
procedure on page 7).
Clear Remapped Parameters Clears remapped parameters.

Table 0-114 Read-Only Data parameters
Data Parameter Description
Feed Rate (R) The current value of the feed rate whenever the feeder is operating.
Motor Speed (R) The current value of the actual feeder motor speed in percent of maximum speed.
Motor Current (R) The present value of the actual feeder motor armature current in DC amps. If feeder has
a fractional horsepower motor, the display may be indicated in 100 mA increments.
Motor Command (R) Display of current data being sent to the Motor Controller.
The current material levels in the integral supply hopper (or tank) in percent of
Hopper Level (R) [W-L-D]
maximum capacity.
Weight in % (R) The current scale weight in percent of maximum scale capacity.
Weight in LBS. (R) The current scale weight in pounds per cubic ft.
Error Message (R) Generated Text Error Message (refer to Appendix B).
Weight (R) The current scale weight in weight units.
RPM (R) The current value of the actual feeder motor speed in RPM.
The current value of the scale signal received from the Weight Resolver Computational
Resolver (R) Module, in the range 1-1,048,576.
Refill Mode [W-L-D] The current active Refill Mode (manual or auto).
Feeder Status Request (R) Request made by the host that causes the SBC-2000 to initiate a series bytes that
define the status of the controller (refer to Appendix B).
Request made by the host that causes the SBC-2000 to initiate a second series of bytes
Feeder Status Request 2 (R)
that define the status of the controller (refer to Appendix B).
Batch Fed The current value of the Batch Fed in weight units.
Equal to the number of batches remaining. The value for Remain counts down from the
Batch Remain value for the Preset Number of Batches to zero in increments of one.
A-36 SBC-2000
APPENDIX
B
PARAMETER CODES AND STATUS BYTES
APPENDIXB
Parameter Index Codes

During communication, the host will read/write to the register addresses of
different parameters. However, based on the protocol being used by both the host
and controller, each register address (Parameter Index Code) may have a
different reference that must be specified as the devices communicate. Figure B-1
is a snapshot of Table B-1 which lists the different reference codes (protocol
specific) for each parameter. This table allows the user to easily establish what
the specific code is for their particular application or protocol.
Figure B-1 Excerpt Appendix B; Table B-1
For Example The “Mean” parameter (Parameter Index Code—32) is always read or written
using the same parameter code. However, the format may “look” different
depending on the Protocol being used (see Figure B-1 above):
• Modbus RTU recognizes “Mean” as Register/Coil 40032
• ASCII DB addresses “Mean” using Hex code 20
• Allen Bradley DF1 recognizes “Mean” as Element # F8:32
In addition, the specifics of the exact message format for the request/command
data will vary according to the protocol. This will include things such as:
• Different types of headers (i.e., message size, data type, or “start bytes”)
• “Raw” vs. coded data
• The use of error check or “end bytes”
Note: A complete discussion regarding reading and writing values to the

controller is provided in Chapter 4. Please reference this chapter for further
information. Note too that not all parameters appear in all controller models.
Parameter Codes and Status Bytes B-1

Table B-1 Parameter Index Codes (Register Addresses)
SDLC Modbus Modbus
Para. ASCII; MB-RTU A-B Data Modbus MB 984
Feeder and/or System Parameters Index Type Read/ Siemens; RTU RTU/32 Highway Register Register
Write DB in Register Reg./ DH Plus Footnote
Code Hex) Register /Coil Coil Element# /Coil /Coil
/Coil
Mean 32 F R 20 40032 40032 40032 F8:32 70032 40032
Coefficient of Variation (CV) 33 F R 21 40033 40034 40033 F8:33 70034 40034
Standard Deviation of Feed Rate 34 F R 22 40034 40036 40034 F8:34 70036 40036
Stop Delay 36 B R/W 24 40036 40040 40036 F8:36 70040 40040 2
Batch Through Refill 37 B R/W 25 40037 40042 40037 F8:37 70042 40042 2
Status 2 (Word 1) 39 S R 27 40039 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3
Feeder Status 2 Request 39 B R 27 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 40046
Status 2 (Word 2) 40 S R 28 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3/6
Bumpless Mode 41 B R/W 29 40041 40050 40041 F8:41 70050 40050
Refill After Batch 42 B R/W 2A 40042 40052 40042 F8:42 70052 40052
Stop If Empty 43 B R/W 2B 40043 40054 40043 F8:43 70054 40054
Rate per Minute 44 B R/W 2C 40044 40056 40044 F8:44 70056 40056
Don't Pace 46 B R/W 2E 40046 40060 40046 F8:46 70060 40060
Batch Preact 47 F R/W 2F 40047 40062 40047 F8:47 70062 40062
Settle Delay 48 B R/W 30 40048 40064 40048 F8:48 70064 40064
Total Throughput Set Point 54 b R/W 35 40053 40074 40053 F8:54 70076 40076
Motor Command 55 N/A R 37 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Total Fed 2 56 F R/W 38 40056 40080 40056 F8:56 70080 40080 4
Motor Controller Select 57 B R/W 39 40057 40082 40057 F8:57 70082 40082 16
Set Maximum Motor Speed 60 F R/W 3C 40060 40088 40060 F8:60 70088 40088
Analog In 2 Span (Ext Vol) 63 F R/W 3F 40063 40094 40063 F8:63 70094 40094
Averaged Feed Rate 64 F R 40 40064 40096 40064 F8:64 70096 40096
Remap Parameter #1 68 B or F R/W 44 40068 40104 40132 F8:68 70104 40104 14/15
Remap Parameter #7 74 B or F R/W 4A 40074 40116 40138 F8:74 70116 40116 14/15
Remap Parameter #8 75 B or F R/W 4B 40075 40118 40139 F8:75 70118 40118 14/15
Remap Parameter #9 76 B or F R/W 4C 40076 40120 40140 F8:76 70120 40120 14/15
Remap Parameter #10 77 B or F R/W 4D 40077 40122 40141 F8:77 70122 40122 14/15
Remap Parameter #11 78 B or F R/W 4E 40078 40124 40142 F8:78 70124 40124 14/15
Remap Parameter #12 79 B or F R/W 4F 40079 40126 40143 F8:79 70126 40126 14/15
Composite Set Point Source 84 B R/W 54 40084 40136 40148 F8:84 70136 40136
Analog In 2 Select 85 B R/W 55 40085 40138 40149 F8:85 70138 40138
Analog In 2 Span (Ext Grav) 86 F R/W 56 40086 40140 40150 F8:86 70140 40140
Analog In 2 Span (Ext Vol) 87 F R/W 57 40087 40142 40151 F8:87 70142 40142
B-2 SBC-2000
SDLC Modbus Modbus A-B Data
Para. Read/ Siemens; ASCII; RTU/32 MB-RTU Modbus MB 984
Feeder and/or System Parameters Index Type RTU Reg./ Highway Register Register Footnote
Code Write DB in Register Register Coil DH Plus
Hex) /Coil Element# /Coil /Coil
/Coil
Scale Factor 2 91 B R/W 5B 40091 N/A 40155 N/A N/A N/A
Feed Rate Set Point (Int. Grav.) 92 F R/W 5C 40092 40152 40156 F8:92 70152 40152
Ratio Set Point (Ext. Grav.) 93 F R/W 5D 40093 40154 40157 F8:93 70154 40154
Motor Speed Set Point (Int. Vol.) 94 F R/W 5E 40094 40156 40158 F8:94 70156 40156
Ratio—Speed Set Point (Ext. Vol.) 95 F R/W 5F 40095 40158 40159 F8:95 70158 40158
Resolver 96 F R 60 40096 40160 40160 F8:96 70160 40160
Batch Size Set Point 97 F R/W 61 40097 40162 40161 F8:97 70162 40162
Scale Factor 1 98 B R/W 62 40098 N/A 40226 N/A N/A N/A 2
Feed Rate 99 F R 63 40099 40166 40227 F8:99 70166 40166
Total Fed 100 F R/W 64 40100 40168 40228 F8:100 70168 40168 4
Motor Speed 101 F R 65 40101 40170 40229 F8:101 70170 40170
Motor Current 102 F R 66 40102 40172 40230 F8:102 70172 40172
External Input Value 103 F R 67 40103 40174 40231 F8:103 70174 40174
Composite Set Point 104 F R 68 40104 40176 40232 F8:104 70176 40176
Composite Volumetric Set Point 105 F R 69 40105 40178 40233 F8:105 70178 40178
Batch Count 106 F R/W 6A 40106 40180 40234 F8:106 70180 40180
Batch Trim 107 F R/W 6B 40107 40182 40235 F8:107 70182 40182
Batch Fed 108 F R 6C 40108 40184 40236 F8:108 70184 40184
Label Select 109 B R/W 6D 40109 40186 40237 F8:109 70186 40186
Proportional 110 F R/W 6E 40110 40188 40238 F8:110 70188 40188
Calibration Trim 111 F R/W 6F 40111 40190 40239 F8:111 70190 40190
Scale Empty 112 F R/W 70 40112 40192 40240 F8:112 70192 40192
Scale Full 113 F R/W 71 40113 40194 40241 F8:113 70194 40194
Max Scale Weight 114 F R/W 72 40114 40196 40242 F8:114 70196 40196
Max Feed Rate 115 F R/W 73 40115 40198 40243 F8:115 70198 40198
Deviation Set Point 116 F R/W 74 40116 40200 40244 F8:116 70200 40200
Feed Rate Deviation Timer 117 B R/W 75 40117 40202 40245 F8:117 70202 40202
Motor Acceleration 118 F R/W 76 40118 40204 40246 F8:118 70204 40204
Motor Current Limit 119 F R/W 77 40119 40206 40247 F8:119 70206 40206
Motor Max RPM 120 F R/W 78 40120 40208 40248 F8:120 70208 40208
No Tach Disable 121 B R/W 79 40121 40210 40249 F8:121 70210 40210
Scale Averaging 122 B R/W 7A 40122 40212 40250 F8:122 70212 40212
External Serial Input Span 126 F R/W 7E 40126 40220 40254 F8:126 70220 40220
Alarm Latch 130 B R/W 82 40130 40228 40258 F8:130 70228 40228
Digital Output 1 131 B R/W 83 40131 40230 40323 F8:131 70230 40230
Digital Output 2 132 B R/W 84 40132 40232 40324 F8:132 70232 40232
Batch Deviation 134 F R/W 86 40134 40236 40326 F8:134 70236 40236
No Batch Timer 135 B R/W 87 40135 40238 40327 F8:135 70238 40238
Analog In 1 Select 136 B R/W 88 40136 40240 40328 F8:136 70240 40240
Analog In 1 Span (Ext Grav) 137 F R/W 89 40137 40242 40329 F8:137 70242 40242
Analog Out 1 Select 138 B R/W 8A 40138 40244 40330 F8:138 70244 40244
Analog Out 1 Span 139 F R/W 8B 40139 40246 40331 F8:139 70246 40246
Analog Out 2 Select 140 B R/W 8C 40140 40248 40332 F8:140 70248 40248

/Coil
Analog Out 2 Span 141 F R/W 8D 40141 40250 40333 F8:141 70250 40250
Digital Input 1 146 B R/W 92 40146 40260 40338 F8:146 70260 40260
Digital Input 2 147 B R/W 93 40147 40262 40339 F8:147 70262 40262
Feeder Name 151 T R/W 97 N/A N/A N/A N/A 50500 50500 5/13
Feeder Status Request (Word 1) 152 S R 98 00152 N/A N/A F8:152 N/A N/A
Feeder Status Request/Commands 152 B R/W 98 N/A 40272 N/A N/A N/A 40272
Remapped Feeder Status Request 152 B R 98 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Error Message 153 T R 99 N/A N/A N/A N/A 50505 50505 5/10/11
Feeder Status Request (Word 2) 153 S R 99 00153 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 10
Hopper Level 154 F R 9A 40154 40276 40346 F8:154 70276 40276
Scale Weight % 155 F R 9B 40155 40278 40347 F8:155 70278 40278
Scale Weight (Lb.) 156 F R 9C 40156 40280 40348 F8:156 70280 40280
Acri-Lok Set Point 157 F R/W 9D 40157 40282 40349 F8:157 70282 40282
Dribble Speed 158 F R/W 9E 40158 40284 40350 F8:158 70284 40284
Dribble Point 159 F R/W 9F 40159 40286 40351 F8:159 70286 40286
Preset Number of Batches 160 F R/W A0 40160 40288 40352 F8:160 70288 40288
Batches Remaining 161 B R A1 40161 40290 40353 F8:161 70290 40290
Batch Interval 162 F R/W A2 40162 40292 40354 F8:162 70292 40292
Bulk Density 163 F R/W A3 40163 40294 40355 F8:163 70294 40294
Hopper Size / Belt Pulley Speed 165 F R/W A5 40165 40298 40421 F8:165 70298 40298
Chamber Size / Tail Pulley KHz 166 F R/W A6 40166 40300 40422 F8:166 70300 40300
Ramp Interval 167 F R/W A7 40167 40302 40423 F8:167 70302 40302
Empty Set Point 168 F R/W A8 40168 40304 40424 F8:168 70304 40304
Low Level 169 F R/W A9 40169 40306 40425 F8:169 70306 40306
High Level 170 F R/W AA 40170 40308 40426 F8:170 70308 40308
Refill Timer 171 B R/W AB 40171 40310 40427 F8:171 70310 40310
Batch-in/Out Mode (Batch Config) 172 B R/W AC 40172 40312 40428 F8:172 70312 40312
Batch Delay Timer 173 B R/W AD 40173 40314 40429 F8:173 70314 40314
Batchlok Set Point 174 F R/W AE 40174 40316 40430 F8:174 70316 40316
Compensation Auto/Man 175 B R/W AF 40175 40318 40431 F8:175 70318 40318
Positive Manual Compensation 176 F R/W B0 40176 40320 40432 F8:176 70320 40320
Start Band 177 B R/W B1 40177 40322 40433 F8:177 70322 40322
Acri-Lok Timer 178 B R/W B2 40178 40324 40434 F8:178 70324 40324
Auto Comp Value 179 F R/W B3 40179 40326 40435 F8:179 70326 40326
Refill Delay 180 B R/W B4 40180 40328 40436 F8:180 70328 40328
Rezero Time 184 B R/W B8 40184 40336 40440 F8:184 70336 40336
Belt Retention Time 185 F R/W B9 40185 40338 40441 F8:185 70338 40338
Auger Set Point #1 186 F R/W BA 40186 40340 40442 F8:186 70340 40340
Actual Rate #1 187 F R/W BB 40187 40342 40443 F8:187 70342 40342
Auger Set Point #2 188 F R/W BC 40188 40344 40444 F8:188 70344 40344
Actual Rate #2 189 F R/W BD 40189 40346 40445 F8:189 70346 40346
Auger Set Point #3 190 F R/W BE 40190 40348 40446 F8:190 70348 40348
Actual Rate #3 191 F R/W BF 40191 40350 40447 F8:191 70350 40350
B-4 SBC-2000
/Coil
Auger Set Point #4 192 F R/W C0 40192 40352 40448 F8:192 70352 40352
Actual Rate #4 193 F R/W C1 40193 40354 40449 F8:193 70354 40354
Auger Set Point #5 194 F R/W C2 40194 40356 40450 F8:194 70356 40356
Actual Rate #5 195 F R/W C3 40195 40358 40451 F8:195 70358 40358
Auger/Belt Select 196 B R/W C4 40196 40360 40452 F8:196 70360 40360
Rezero at Start 197 B R/W C5 40197 40362 40517 F8:197 70362 40362
Rezero Cycle Time 198 B R/W C6 40198 40364 40518 F8:198 70364 40364
Neg Manual Comp / Constant 199 F R/W C7 40199 40366 40519 F8:199 70366 40366
Password 202 T R/W CA N/A N/A N/A N/A 50545 50545 5/12
Motor Speed Display Select 207 B R/W CF 40207 40382 40527 F8:207 70382 40382
External Threshold 209 F R/W D1 40209 40386 40529 F8:209 70386 40386
Rate/Min Set Point 212 F R/W D4 40212 40392 40532 F8:212 70392 40392
Language Select 213 B R/W D5 40213 40394 40533 F8:213 70394 40394
Start Delay 219 B R/W DB 40219 40406 40539 F8:219 70406 40406
Integral 220 B R/W DC 40220 40408 40540 F8:220 70408 40408
Set Defaults 221 B R/W DD 40221 40410 40541 F8:221 70410 40410
Inferential Totalization 222 F R/W DE 40222 40412 40542 F8:222 70412 40412
Derivative 223 F R/W DF 40223 40414 40543 F8:223 70414 40414
Select Internal Gravimetric Mode 224 C W E0 00224 00224 00224 B3:224/0 00224 00224
Select External Gravimetric Mode 225 C W E1 00225 00225 00225 B3:224/1 00225 00225
Select Internal Volumetric Mode 226 C W E2 00226 00226 00226 B3:224/2 00226 00226
Select External Volumetric Mode 227 C W E3 00227 00227 00227 B3:224/3 00227 00227
Select Continuous Mode 228 C W E4 00228 00228 00228 B3:224/4 00228 00228
Select Batch Mode 229 C W E5 00229 00229 00229 B3:224/5 00229 00229
Start Feeder 230 C W E6 00230 00230 00230 B3:224/6 00230 00230
Stop Feeder 231 C W E7 00231 00231 00231 B3:224/7 00231 00231
Alarm Acknowledge 234 C W EA 00234 00234 00234 B3:224/10 00234 00234
Cancel a Batch in Progress 235 C W EB 00235 00235 00235 B3:224/11 00235 00235
Select Auto Refill Mode 236 C W EC 00236 00236 00236 B3:224/12 00236 00236
Abort Rezero Pending 236 C W EC 00236 00236 00236 B3:224/12 00236 00236
Select Manual Refill Mode 237 C W ED 00237 00237 00237 B3:224/13 00237 00237
Start a Refill 238 C W EE 00238 00238 00238 B3:224/14 00238 00238
Stop a Refill 239 C W EF 00239 00239 00239 B3:224/15 00239 00239
Start Rezero 240 C W F0 00240 00240 00240 B3:225/0 00240 00240
Emergency Stop 241 C W F1 00241 00241 00241 B3:225/1 00241 00241
Select External Fast Mode 242 C W F2 00242 00242 00242 B3:225/2 00242 00242 2
Select “Scaling Factors” Mode 243 C W F3 00243 N/A 00243 N/A N/A N/A 3/2
Exit “Scaling Factors” Mode 244 C W F4 00244 N/A 00244 N/A N/A N/A 3/2
Clear Scaling Factor 3 to Zero 245 C W F5 00245 N/A 00245 N/A N/A N/A 3/2
Start Max Rate 246 C W F6 00246 00246 00246 B3:225/6 00246 00246
Enter “Parameter Remap” Mode 248 C W F8 00248 00248 00248 B3:225/8 00248 00248 15
Exit “Parameter Remap” Mode 249 C W F9 00249 00249 00249 B3:225/9 00249 00249
Clear Remapped Parameters 250 C W FA 00250 00250 00250 B3:225/10 00250 00250

/Coil
Graph Interval 0F25 F R/W F8:337 40710
Reserved 0F26 C W F8:338 40712
Reserved 0F27 C W F8:339 40714
Remap Parameter #1, S0, E-Net, PB 0F28 F R/W F8:340 40716
Remap Parameter #3, S0, E-Net, PB 0F2A F R/W F8:342 40720
Remap Parameter #4, S0, E-Net, PB 0F2B F R/W F8:343 40722
Remap Parameter #5, S0, E-Net, PB 0F2C F R/W F8:344 40724
Remap Parameter #6, S0, E-Net, PB 0F2D F R/W F8:345 40726
Remap Parameter #7, S0, E-Net, PB 0F2E F R/W F8:346 40728
Remap Parameter #8, S0, E-Net, PB 0F2F F R/W F8:347 40730
Remap Parameter #1, S2 0F38 F R/W F8:356 40748
Remap Parameter #3, S2 0F3A F R/W F8:358 40752
Remap Parameter #4, S2 0F3B F R/W F8:359 40754
Remap Parameter #5, S2 0F3C F R/W F8:360 40756
Remap Parameter #6, S2 0F3D F R/W F8:361 40758
Remap Parameter #7, S2 0F3E F R/W F8:362 40760
Remap Parameter #8, S2 0F3F F R/W F8:363 40762
Reserved 0F48 F R/W F8:372 40780
Motor Protocol (DSP, CM) 0F49 F R/W F8:373 40782 16
S2 Protocol and Baud Rate 0F4A F R/W F8:374 40784
S2 Station Number 0F4B F R/W F8:375 40786
I.P. Address 0F4C T R/W ST2:376 40788 16
I.P. Subnet Mask 0F4D T R/W ST2:377 40790 16
Select 400 or 200 Series 0F4E F R/W F8:378 40792 16
MAC Address 0F4F T R ST2:379 40794 16
B-6 SBC-2000
/Coil
Analog Output #3 Select 0F50 F R/W F8:380 40796
Analog Output #3 Span 0F51 F R/W F8:381 40798
Analog Output #3 Delay (Sec) 0F52 F R/W F8:382 40800
Analog Output #4 Select 0F53 F R/W F8:383 40802
Analog Output #4 Span 0F54 F R/W F8:384 40804
Analog Output #4 Delay (Sec) 0F55 F R/W F8:385 40806
S0 Protocol and Baud Rate 0F56 T R/W F8:386 40808
S0 Station Number 0F57 F R/W F8:387 40810
Graph Parameter 0F58 F R/W F8:388 40812
ICON 0F59 F R/W F8:389 40814
FootNotes
1. Applications for use with Acrison’s DB and 1771-DB Protocols only.
2. Applicable for use with any of Acrison’s integer-based protocols.
3. Applicable for use with Acrison’s SDLC protocol only.
4. Entering any value will cause the “Total Fed” to be cleared to zero.
5. Applicable for use with any of Acrison’s ASCII-based protocols.
6. Applicable for use with Acrison’s 3964R Protocol only.
7. Applicable for use with Acrison’s MB-RTU Protocol version 09 or later.
8. Parameter returns four 4-bit words.
9. Parameter returns eight 16-bit words.
10. Parameter returns sixteen 16-bit words.
11. Please see Table B2 for references to feeder status request, Status 2 request and feeder status
and commands figure.
12. Modbus APMSI parameter returns 4 registers of text.
15. Only use Parameter Remap Mode for controller initialization. Do not remap parameters while the
feeders are operating.
16. Power must be cycled for change to take effect.
.
Note: Certain host devices, when used with a Modbus protocol variant may
decrement the address reference (which is sent to or received from the Acrison
controller) by one. If this occurs, the user should increment all the table register/
coil addresses by one for that particular host device/Modbus protocol
combination.
Controller Status Bytes

The request for Feeder Status 1 or Status 2 will cause the SBC-2000 Controller to
send a series of bytes defining the present status of the controller, which vary by
protocol. The figures in this section define the proper bit and byte order. Figures
reflect the most current controller programs from Acrison as of this writing.
Table B-2 Index of Feeder Status Request Formats for Protocols.

MB-RTU
Allen- PLCG/
ACRISON ASCII DB Bradley Modbus Modbus Siemens Fisher EIC Modbus DHP, & A-B DH, MB 984
PROTOCOL RTU ASCII 3964R RTU/32 DH Plus
DA Modbus
APMSI
Table B-4
Table B-4 Table B-8 Table B-8
Feeder Status Table B-3 Table B-3 Table B-5 Table B-6 Table B-7 Table B-10 Table B-11
Requests Table B-5 Table B-10 Table B-10
Table B-10
Remapped
Feeder Status Table B-9 Table B-9 Table B-9 Table B-9 Table B-9 Table B-9 Table B-9 Table B-9 Table B-9 Table B-9
Request

Table B-3 Feeder Status 1 & 2 Requests for the ASCII DB and A-B DA Protocols
Status 1 Request (98H)
S Not Feeder Feeder High Auto Manual Low Refill

Byte 1 Dribble On Off Level Refill Refill Level On
E Internal Batch External Batch Batch Internal Externa l Batch
Byte 2
Grav. Mode Grav. Running Delay Vol . Vol. Complete
No 1
R Byte 3 Overfill Acri-Lok Empty No Tach Deviation Fault Overload
Scale
I
Byte 4 EM7 EM6 EM5 E M4 EM3 EM2 EM1 EM0
E
S
Ma x Rte Speed in Batch General
Byte 1 Units-2 Un its-1 Units-0 Batch Abort
Mode RP M Deviation Alarm
4 Reset Minute Send Re fill Max Motor No Batch
Byte 2 Fast Start Autotuning
Log Mode Log Timer Sp eed Timer
0 Message Scale Remap
Byte 3 Al arm2 060 Hand Jog
Pending Factor 3 Mode
0 AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive
Byte 4 Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Code Code Code Code Code Code Code Code
Byte 1 Internal Batch E xternal Feeder Feeder Internal External Batch

S Grav. Mode Grav. On Off Vol. Vol. Complete
Byte 2 No Rezero No Auto
Rezeroing No Tach1 Deviation Fault Overload
E Pending Scale Rezero
Byte 3
R EM7 EM6 EM5 EM4 EM3 EM2 EM1 EM0
I Status 2 Request (27H)

E Byte 1 Ma x Rte Speed in Batch General Batch
Units-2 Un its-1 Units-0
Mode RP M Deviation Alarm Abort
S
Byte 2 Reset Minute Send Conveyor Max Motor No Batch
Fast Start
Log Mode Log On Sp eed Timer
2
Byte 3 Alarm 2 060 Hand
Mis- Track
Jog
Message Scale Remap
Track Fault Pending Factor 3 Mode
0
AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive
0 Byte 4 Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1—No Tach available for Acrison Model 060 and ACR300A SCR/DC motor controllers only.
2—VFAC Drive fault codes only available from controllers supporting them.
B-8 SBC-2000
Table B-4 Feeder Status 1 Requests for the Modbus RTU and Modbus ASCII Protocols
Feeder Status Request (32 Coil Read at 00152)

E Internal Batch External Batch Batch Internal External Batch
Byte 2 Grav. Mode Grav. Running Delay Vol. Vol. Complete
R No 1
Byte 3 Overfill
Scale
Acri-Lok Empty No Tach Deviation Fault Overload
I Byte 4 EM72 EM62 EM52 EM42 EM32 EM22 EM12 EM02
E
Feeder Status Request Word 1: 16 Coil Read at 00152
4 Byte 2 Grav. Mode Grav. Running Delay Vol. Vol. Complete
0 Feeder Status Request Word 2: 16 Coil Read at 00153
0 No
Empty No Tach1 Deviation
Byte 3 Overfill
Scale
Acri-Lok Fault Overload
2
EM62 2 2 2 2 2
Byte 4 EM7 EM 5 EM4 EM3 EM2 EM1 EM02
Feeder Status Request (32 Coil Read at 00152)
Internal Batch External Feeder Feeder Internal External Batch

Byte 1 Grav. Mode Grav. On Off Vol. Vol. Complete
S
No Rezero No Auto No
Byte 2 Pending Scale Rezero
Rezeroing
Tach1
Deviation Fault Overload
E
R
Byte 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I
Feeder Status Request (Word 1: 16 Coil Read at 00152)
E
Internal Batch External Feeder Feeder External Batch
S Byte 1 Grav. Mode Grav. On Off
Internal Vol.
Vol. Complete
No Rezero No Auto
Byte 2 Rezeroing No Tach1 Deviation Fault Overload
Pending Scale Rezero
2
Feeder Status Request (Word 2: 16 Coil Read at 00153)
0
0 Byte 3 EM72 EM62 EM52 EM42 EM32 EM22 EM12 EM02
Byte 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1— N o Tach available for A crison M odel 060 and A C R300A SC R /D C m otor controllers only.
2— EM 0-EM 7 are binary-coded Error M essages. R efer to Table B 12.

Table B-5 Feeder Status 2 Requests for the Modbus RTU and Modbus ASCII Protocols
Feeder Status 2 Request (32 Coil Read at 00039)

Max Rte Speed in Batch Gen eral
Byte 1 Units-2 Units-1 Units-0 Batch Abo rt
Mode RPM Deviation Alarm
S Reset Minute Send Refill Max Motor No Batch
Log Mode Log Timer Speed Timer
E Message Scale Remap
Byte 3 Alarm2 060 Hand Jog
Pending Factor 3 Mo de
R AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive
Byte 4 Fault Fault Fau lt Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
I Code2 Code2 Code2 Code2 Code2 Code2 Code2 Code2
E Feeder Status 2 Request Word 1: 16 Coil Read at 00039
S Max Rte Speed in Batch General

Byte 1 Mode
Units-2 Units-1 Units-0
RPM Deviation Alarm
Batch Abort
Reset Minute Send Refil l Max Motor No Batch
Byte 2 Log Mode
Fast Start
Log Timer Speed Timer
Autotuning
4
Feeder Status 2 Request Word 2: 16 Coil Read at 00040
0
Message Scale Remap
0 Byte 3 Alarm 2 0 60 Hand Jog
AC Drive AC Dri ve AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive
Byte 4 Fault Fau lt Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Feeder Status 2 Request (32 Coil Read at 00039)

Max Rte Speed in Batch General
Byte 1 Units-2 Units-1 Units-0 Batch Abort
Mode RPM Deviation Alarm
S Reset Minute Send Conveyor Max Motor No Batch
Byte 2 Log Mode
Fast Start
Log On Speed Timer
E Mis- Track Message Scale Remap
Byte 3 Alarm 2 0 60 Hand
Track Fault
Jog
R AC Drive AC Dri ve AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive
Byte 4 Fault Fau lt Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
I Code Code Code Code Code Code Code Code
E Feeder Status 2 Request (Word 1: 16 Coil Read at 00039)
Max Rte Speed in Batch General Batch

S Byte 1 Mode
Units-2 Units-1 Units-0
RPM Deviation Alarm Abort
Minute Conveyor Max Mo tor No Batch
Byte 2 Mode
Fast Start
On Speed Timer
2
0 Feeder Status 2 Request (Word 2: 16 Coil Read at 00040)
0 Mis- Track Message Scale Remap

Byte 3 Alarm 2 0 60 Hand
Track Fault
Jog
AC Drive AC Dri ve AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive
Byte 4 Fault Fau lt Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Faul t
Code2 Code2 Code2 Code2 Code2 Code2 Code2 Code2
2—VFAC Drive fault codes only available from controllers supporting them.
B-10 SBC-2000
Table B-6 Feeder Status Request for Siemens 3964R Protocol
F eeder Status 1 Requ est Word 1 (98H)

Not Feeder Feeder High Auto Manual Low Refill
MS Byte
Dribble On Off Level Refill Refill Level On
Internal Batch External Batch Batch Internal Externa l Batch
LS Byte Grav. Mode Grav. Running Delay Vol . Vol. Complete
F eeder Status 1 Requ est Word 2 (59H)

S No 1
E MS Byte Overfill
Scale
Acri-Lok Empty No Tach Deviation Fault Overload
R LS Byte EM7
2
EM6
2
EM5
2
EM4
2
EM3
2
EM2
2
EM1
2
EM0
2
I
E
S F eeder Status 1 Requ est Word 3 (5AH)
MS Byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4
LS Byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
Feeder Statu s 2 Request Word 1 (16 Coil Read at 00039)
Max Rate Speed in Batch General

Byte 1 Mode
RP M Deviation Alarm
Batch Abort
Mo tor
Reset Minute Send Re fill No Batch
Byte 2 Fast Start Sp eed
Log Mode Log Timer Alarm
Ma x
Feeder Statu s 2 Request Word 2 (16 Coil Read at 00040)
Byte 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Byte 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Feeder Status 1 Requ est Word 1 (98H)
Internal Batch E xternal Feeder Feeder Internal Externa l Batch

MS Byte
Grav. Mode Grav. On Off Vol . Vol. Complete
No Rezero No Auto No
S LS Byte Pending Scale Rezero
Rezeroing
Tach
1 Deviation Fault Overload
E
R Feeder Status 1 Requ est Word 2 (59H)
I
E 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
S MS Byte EM7 EM6 EM5 E M4 EM3 EM2 EM1 EM0
LS Byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2
Feeder Status 1 Requ est Word 3 (5AH)
0
0
MS Byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
LS Byte 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table B-7 Feeder Status 1 Request for Fisher EIC Protocol

S
E Not Feeder Feeder High Auto Manual Low Refill
R Byte 1 Dribble On Off Level Refill Refill Level On
I
E Byte 2
S Grav. Mode Grav. Running Delay Vol. Vol. Complete
4 No
Byte 3 Overfill Acri-Lok Empty No Tach1 Deviation Fault Overload
0 Scale
0
Internal Batch External Feeder Feeder Internal External Batch

S Byte 1 Grav. Mode Grav. On Off Vol. Vol. Complete
E
R
I No Rezero No Auto
Byte 2 Rezeroing No Tach1 Deviation Fault Overload
E Pending Scale Rezero
S
2
0
0 Byte 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B-12 SBC-2000
Table B-8 Feeder Status Requests for Modbus RTU-32 and MB-984 Protocols
Status 1 Requ est (98H) Register 40272

Byte 1
Dribble On Off Level Refill Refill Level On
E Internal Batch External Batch Batch Internal Externa l Batch
Byte 2
Grav. Mode Grav. Running Delay Vol . Vol. Complete
No 1
R Byte 3 Overfill Acri-Lok Empty No Tach Deviation Fault Overload
Scale
I 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
E
Status 2 Requ est (32 Coil Read at 00039)
S
Ma x Rte Speed in Batch General
Byte 1 Units-2 Un its-1 Units-0 Batch Abort
Mode RP M Deviation Alarm
4 Reset Minute Send Re fill Max Motor No Batch
Log Mode Log Timer Sp eed Timer
0 Message Scale Remap
Byte 3 Alarm 2 060 Hand Jog
0 AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive
Byte 4 Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Byte 1 Internal Batch E xternal Feeder Feeder Internal External Batch

S Grav. Mode Grav. On Off Vol. Vol. Complete
Byte 2 No Rezero No Auto 1
E Rezeroing No Tach Deviation Fault Overload
Pending Scale Rezero
Byte 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
R EM7 EM6 EM5 E M4 EM3 EM2 E M1 EM0
I Status 2 Request (27H)

E Byte 1 Ma x Rte Speed in Batch General Batch
Mode RP M Deviation Alarm Abort
S
Byte 2 Reset Minute Send Conveyor Max Motor No Batch
Fast Start
Log Mode Log On Sp eed Timer
2
Byte 3 Mis- Track Message Scale Remap
Alarm 2 060 Hand Jog
Track Fault Pending Factor 3 Mode
0
AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive AC Drive
0 Byte 4
Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault Fault
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 — N o T a c h a v a ila b le fo r A c riso n M o d e l 0 6 0 a n d A C R 3 0 0 A S C R /D C m o to r c o n tro lle rs o n ly .

2 — V F A C D riv e F a u lt C o d e s o n ly a v a ila b le fro m c o n tro lle rs th a t su p p o rt th e m .
3 — E M 0 -E M 7 a re b in a ry -c o d e d E rro r M e ssa g e s. R e fe r to T a b le B 1 2 .

Table B-9 Remapped Feeder Status Request (All Protocols)
Remapped Feeder Status Request (98H) – Series 400

Bat Mode Grav Int Mode Auto Refill Refill On
Not Batch (1) Mode (1) (1) (1) (1) Run (1)
Byte 1 Dribble Complete Cont Vol Mode Ext Mode Man Refill Refill Off Stop (0)
Mode (0) (0) (0) (0) (0)
General General Overfill or Low

Byte 2 Acrilok Overfill Empty
Message Alarm Empty Level
High level
Byte 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 Dev No Scale
Remapped Feeder Status Request (98H) – Series 200
Bat Mode Grav Int Mode

Not Auto
Batch (1) Mode (1) (1) Rezero in Run (1)
Byte 1 Rezero
Complete Cont Vol Mode Ext Mode
Rezero
Progress Stop (0)
Pending Mode
Mode (0) (0) (0)
General General
Byte 2 N/A N/A N/A
Message Alarm
N/A N/A N/A
Byte 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 Dev No Scale
B-14 SBC-2000
Table B-10 Status Request Tables (Modbus RTU, RTU/32, RTU PLCG/DHP, 984 and APMSI)
Feeder Status 1 Table—Series 400 Feeder Status 1 Table—Series 200

Not in Dribble Mode . . . . . 9A . . 00154 Internal Gravimetric Mode. . 9A . . 00154
Feeder is On . . . . . . . . 9B . . 00155 Batch Mode. . . . . . . . . 9B . . 00155
Feeder is Off . . . . . . . . 9C . . 00156 External Gravimetric. . .. . 9C . . 00156
High Level Alarm. . . . . . . 9D . . 00157 Feeder is On . . . . . . . . 9D . . 00157
In Auto Refill Mode . . . . . 9E . . 00158 Feeder is Off . . . . . . . 9E . . 00158
In Manual Refill Mode . . . . 9F . . 00159 Internal Volumetric Mode . . 9F . . 00159
Low Level Alarm . . . . . . . A0 . . 00160 External Volumetric Mode . . A0 . . 00160
Refill is On. . . . . . . . . A1 . . 00161 Batch is Completed . . . . . A1 . . 00161
Internal Gravimetric Mode . . A2 . . 00162 No Rezero Pending . . . . . A2 . . 00162
Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . A3 . . 00163 No Scale Alarm . . . . . . . A3 . . 00163
External Gravimetric Mode . . A4 . . 00164 Auto Rezero Mode . . . . . . A4 . . 00164
A Batch is Running. . . . . . A6 . . 00165 Rezeroing. . . . . . . . . . A5 . . 00165
Batch Delay Mode. . . . . . . A6 . . 00166 No Tach Alarm. . . . . . . . A6 . . 00166
Internal Volumetric Mode. . . A7 . . 00167 Deviation Alarm. . . . . . . A7 . . 00167
External Volumetric Mode. . . A8 . . 00168 Fault Alarm. . . . . . . . . A8 . . 00168
Batch is Completed. . . . . . A9 . . 00169 Overload Alarm . . . . . . . A9 . . 00169
Overfill Alarm. . . . . . . . AA . . 00170 Error Message Bit 7 . . . . AA . . 00170
No Scale Alarm. . . . . . . . AB . . 00171 Error Message Bit 6 . . . . AB . . 00171
Acri-Lok Alarm. . . . . . . . AC . . 00172 Error Message Bit 5 . . . . AC . . 00172
Empty Alarm . . . . . . . . . AD . . 00173 Error Message Bit 4 . . . . AD . . 00173
No Tach Alarm . . . . . . . . AE . . 00174 Error Message Bit 3. . . . . AE . . 00174
Deviation Alarm . . . . . . . AF . . 00175 Error Message Bit 2. . . . . AF . . 00175
Fault Alarm . . . . . . . . . B0 . . 00176 Error Message Bit 1. . . . . B0 . . 00176
Overload Alarm. . . . . . . . B1 . . 00177 Error Message Bit 0. . . . . B1 . . 00177
Error Message Bit 7 . . . . . B2 . . 00178 For Future Use . . . . . . . B2 . . 00178

In Max Rate . . . . . . . . . 66 . . 00102 In Max Rate . . . . . . . . . 66 . . 00102
Display Units Bit 2 . . . . . 67 . . 00103 Display Units Bit 2 . . . . . 67 . . 00103
Motor Speed is in RPM . . . . 6A . . 00106 Motor Speed is in RPM . . . . 6A . . 00106
Batch Deviation Alarm . . . . 6B . . 00107 Batch Deviation Alarm . . . . 6B . . 00107
General Alarm . . . . . . . . 6C . . 00108 General Alarm . . . . . . . . 6C . . 00108
Batch is Aborted. . . . . . . 6D . . 00109 Batch is Aborted. . . . . . . 6D . . 00109
Reset Log . . . . . . . . . 6E . . 00110 Reset Log . . . . . . . . . 6E . . 00110
Minute Mode . . . . . . . . . 6F . . 00111 Minute Mode . . . . . . . . . 6F . . 00111
Fast Start Mode . . . . . . . 70 . . 00112 Fast Start Mode . . . . . . . 70 . . 0112
Send Log . . . . . . . . . . 71 . . 00113 Send Log . . . . . . . . . . 71 . . 00113
Refill Timer Expired . . . . 72 . . 00114 Conveyor On . . . . . . . . . 72 . . 00114
Maximum Motor Speed . . . . . 73 . . 00115 Maximum Motor Speed . . . . . 73 . . 00115
No Batch Timer Expired . . . 74 . . 00116 No Batch Timer Expired . . . 74 . . 00116
In Autotuning Mode . . . . . 75 . . 00117 For Future Use . . . . . . . 75 . . 00117
Alarm2. . . . . . . . . . . . 76 . . 00118 Alarm 2 . . . . . . . . . . 76 . . 00118
060 Hand Mode . . . . . . . 77 . . 00119 060 Hand Mode . . . . . . . 77 . . 00119
For Future Use . . . . . . . 78 . . 00120 Mistrack . . . . . . . . . . 78 . . 00120
For Future Use . . . . . . . 79 . . 00121 Track Fault . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 00121
Jog . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A . . 00122 Jog . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A . . 00122
Message Pending . . . . . . . 7B . . 00123 Message Pending . . . . . . . 7B . . 00123
Scale Factor 3 Mode . . . . . 7C . . 00124 Scale Factor 3 Mode . . . . . 7C . . 00124
Remapping Mode . . . . . . . 7D . . 00125 Remapping Mode . . . . . . . 7D . . 00125
VFAC Motor Fault Code Bit 8 . 7E . . 00126 VFAC Motor Fault Code Bit 8 . 7E . . 00126
VFAC Motor Fault Code Bit 7 . 7F . . 00127 VFAC Motor Fault Code Bit 7 . 7F . . 00127
VFAC Motor Fault Code Bit 6 . 80 . . 00128 VFAC Motor Fault Code Bit 6 . 80 . . 00128

Table B-11 Feeder Status Request Tables (Allen-Bradley DH/DHP)

Not in Dribble Mode . . . . 9A . .B3:154/0 Internal Gravimetric Mode. . 9A . .B3:154/0
Feeder is On . . . . . . . . 9B . .B3:154/1 Batch Mode. . . . . . . . . 9B . .B3:154/1
Feeder is Off. . . . . . . . 9C . .B3:154/2 External Gravimetric. . .. . 9C . .B3:154/2
High Level Alarm . . . . . . 9D . .B3:154/3 Feeder is On . . . . . . . . 9D . .B3:154/3
In Auto Refill Mode . . . . 9E . .B3:154/4 Feeder is Off . . . . . . . 9E . .B3:154/4
In Manual Refill Mode . . . 9F . .B3:154/5 Internal Volumetric Mode . . 9F . .B3:154/5
Low Level Alarm . . . . . . A0 . .B3:154/6 External Volumetric Mode . . A0 . .B3:154/6
Refill is On . . . . . . . . A1 . .B3:154/7 Batch is Completed . . . . . A1 . .B3:154/7
Internal Gravimetric Mode. . A2 . .B3:154/8 No Rezero Pending. . . . . . A2 . .B3:154/8
Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . A3 . .B3:154/9 No Scale Alarm . . . . . . . A3 . .B3:154/9
External Gravimetric Mode. . A4. .B3:154/10 Auto Rezero Mode . . . . . . A4. .B3:154/10
A Batch is Running . . . . . A6. .B3:154/11 Rezeroing . . . . . . . . . A5. .B3:154/11
Batch Delay Mode . . . . . . A6. .B3:154/12 No Tach Alarm . . . . . . . A6. .B3:154/12
Internal Volumetric Mode . . A7. .B3:154/13 Deviation Alarm . . . . . . A7. .B3:154/13
External Volumetric Mode . . A8. .B3:154/14 Fault Alarm . . . . . . . . A8. .B3:154/14
Batch is Completed . . . . . A9. .B3:154/15 Overload Alarm . . . . . . . A9. .B3:154/15
Overfill Alarm . . . . . . . AA. .B3:155/0 Error Message Bit 7 . . . . AA . .B3:155/0
No Scale Alarm . . . . . . . AB . .B3:155/1 Error Message Bit 6 . . . . AB . .B3:155/1
Acri-Lok Alarm . . . . . . . AC . .B3:155/2 Error Message Bit 5 . . . . AC . .B3:155/2
Empty Alarm . . . . . . . . AD . .B3:155/3 Error Message Bit 4 . . . . AD . .B3:155/3
No Tach Alarm . . . . . . . AE . .B3:155/4 Error Message Bit 3 . . . . AE . .B3:155/4
Deviation Alarm . . . . . . AF . .B3:155/5 Error Message Bit 2 . . . . AF . .B3:155/5
Fault Alarm . . . . . . . . B0 . .B3:155/6 Error Message Bit 1 . . . . B0 . .B3:155/6
Overload Alarm. . . . . . . B1 . .B3:155/7 Error Message Bit 0 . . . . B1 . .B3:155/7
Error Message Bit 7 . . . . B2 . .B3:155/8 For Future Use . . . . . . . B2 . .B3:155/8
Error Message Bit 6 . . . . B3 . .B3:155/9 For Future Use . . . . . . . B3 . .B3:155/9
Error Message Bit 5 . . . . B4. .B3:155/10 For Future Use . . . . . . . B4. .B3:155/10

In Max Rate . . . . . . . . 66 . .B3:102/0 In Max Rate . . . . . . . . 66 . .B3:102/0
Display Units Bit 2 . . . . 67 . .B3:102/1 Display Units Bit 2 . . . . 67 . .B3:102/1
Display Units Bit 1 . . . . 68 . B3:102/2 Display Units Bit 1 . . . . 68 . .B3:102/2
Display Units Bit 0 . . . . 69 . .B3:102/3 Display Units Bit 0 . . . . 69 . .B3:102/3
Motor Speed is in RPM . . . 6A. . B3:102/4 Motor Speed is in RPM . . . 6A . .B3:102/4
Batch Deviation Alarm . . . 6B. . B3:102/5 Batch Deviation Alarm . . . 6B . .B3:102/5
General Alarm . . . . . . . 6C. . B3:102/6 General Alarm . . . . . . . 6C . .B3:102/6
Batch is Aborted . . . . . . 6D. . B3:102/7 Batch is Aborted . . . . . . 6D . .B3:102/7
Reset Log. . . . . . . . . . 6E. . B3:102/8 Reset Log. . . . . . . . . . 6E. . B3:102/8
Minute Mode . . . . . . . . 6F . .B3:102/9 Minute Mode . . . . . . . . 6F . .B3:102/9
Fast Start Mode . . . . . . 70 . B3:102/10 Fast Start Mode . . . . . . 70 . B3:102/10
Send Log . . . . . . . . . . 71 . B3:102/11 Send Log . . . . . . . . . . 71 . B3:102/11
Refill Timer Expired . . . . 72 . B3:102/12 Conveyor On . . . . . . . . 72 . B3:102/12
Maximum Motor Speed . . . . 73 . B3:102/13 Maximum Motor Speed . . . . 73 . B3:102/13
No Batch Timer Expired . . . 74 . B3:102/14 No Batch Timer Expired . . . 74 . B3:102/14
In Autotuning Mode . . . . . 75 . B3:102/15 For Future Use . . . . . . . 75 . B3:102/15
Alarm2 . . . . . . . . . . . 76 . .B3:103/0 Alarm 2. . . . . . . . . . . 76 . .B3:103/0
060 Hand Mode . . . . . . . 77 . .B3:103/1 060 Hand Mode . . . . . . . 77 . .B3:103/1
For Future Use . . . . . . . 78 . .B3:103/2 Mistrack . . . . . . . . . . 78 . .B3:103/2
For Future Use . . . . . . . 79 . .B3:103/3 Track Fault. . . . . . . . . 79 . .B3:103/3
Jog . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A. . B3:103/4 Jog . . . . . . . . . . . . 7A . .B3:103/4
Message Pending . . . . . . 7B. . B3:103/5 Message Pending . . . . . . 7B . .B3:103/5
Scale Factor 3 Mode . . . . 7C. . B3:103/6 Scale Factor 3 Mode . . . . 7C . .B3:103/6
Remapping Mode . . . . . . . 7D. . B3:103/7 Remapping Mode . . . . . . . 7D . .B3:103/7
VFAC Motor Fault Code Bit 8 .7E. . B3:103/8 VFAC Motor Fault Code Bit 8 .7E . .B3:103/8
VFAC Motor Fault Code Bit 7 .7F . B3:103/9 VFAC Motor Fault Code Bit 7 .7F . .B3:103/9
VFAC Motor Fault Code Bit 6 .80 . B3:103/10 VFAC Motor Fault Code Bit 6 .80 . B3:103/10
B-16 SBC-2000
Table B-12 SBC-2000 Error and Status Messages
Message No. EM7 EM6 EM5 EM4 EM3 EM2 EM1 EM0
Overfill—Can’t Batch 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Scale Entries Reversed 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
Hi/Lo Levels Reversed 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
Perm 1 Run —-Open 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Batch Too Large 6 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
Refill Timer Expired 8 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
Mtr. Controller—No Comm 9 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
Conveyor Not Running 10 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
Mtr Controller Stopped 11 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
Batch Deviation 12 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
Batch Timer Alarm 13 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
Lost Scale Signal 14 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
Value Out Of Range 15 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Not Changeable In Run 16 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
Settling Period—Wait 17 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
Batchlok Protection On 18 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
Remote Run Enabled 19 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
Batch Trim Over 25 Pct 20 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
Delayed Run 21 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
Delayed Stop 22 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
Belt Roller No Tach 23 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
Permissive 2 Run—Open 24 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
Tune—No Low Rate 27 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
Reset 28 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
Tune—No Slope 29 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
Low Rate Out Of Limits 30 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
High Rate Out Of Limits 31 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

Max Speed Reached 32 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Profibus Init Failure 33 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
Current Loop Is Open 34 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
Digital Module No Comm 35 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
Analog Module No Comm 36 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
Setpoint Exceeds Max F.R. 37 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
Recipe Data Is Invalid 38 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
Feeder Must Be Stopped 39 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
Bind Failure 40 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
Listen Failure 41 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
Incorrect Format 42 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Belt Has Mis-Tracked 43 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
Belt Is Mis-Tracking 44 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
Belt Must Be Cleared 45 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1
Remote Already In Use 46 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0

32-Bit (Coil) Commands
In addition to individual coil writes some protocols include 32-bit write capability,
as shown below.
1 When used with an MD-II-MFC Controller this command stops all on-line feeders.
2 When used with an MD-II-MFC Controller this command starts all on-line feeders.
Modbus RTU/32 and MB 984

Feeder Commands
Select Select Select Select Select Ext. Select Int.

Stop Start
Byte 1 Feeder Feeder
Batch Cont. Ext. Vol. Int. Vol. Grav. Grav.
Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode
Select
Select Cancel
Auto. Alarm Strt a Cal Start a
Byte 2 Stop Refill Start Refill Man. Refill
Refill
batch in
Ack printout printout
Mode. progress
Mode.
Select Clear Clear Select
Start Max Emerg. Start
Byte 3 parameter remapped parameter N/A
Rate
Ext Fast
Stop Rezero
Map mode parameter Map mode Mode
Byte 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Fisher EIC Protocol (Series 400 and 200)
Select
1 2 Select Select Select
Register 1 Stop Start Select Int. Ext. Select Int.
Batch Cont. Ext. Vol.
(40320) MSB Feeder Feeder Vol. Mode Grav. Grav. Mode
Mode Mode Mode
Mode
Select
Select Cancel
Register 1 Start Man. Strt a Cal Start a
Stop Refill Auto. Refill batch in Alarm Ack
(40320) LSB Refill Refill printout printout
Mode. progress
Mode.
Save MFC Clear Clear
Register 2 Start Start Max Select Ext Emerg.
System Total Total Start Rezero
(40321) MSB Autotune Rate Fast Mode Stop
Parameters Fed 2 Fed 1
Stop
Start MFC
Register 2 MFC
0 0 0 0 0 0 System
(40321) LSB System
Feeders
Feeders

B-20 SBC-2000
Quick Start Guides
DSP
STEP 2: MAKE CONNECTIONS
Quick Start Guide Connections to the SBC-2000 DSP Controller are made through the controller’s
two Terminal Block Assemblies TB1 and TB2 and through the built-in Ethernet
SBC-2000 DSP CONTROLLER
Port. The connections are shown in the diagrams below.
Follow this guide to quickly install your new controller. In most cases any wiring directly to the module will have been performed at the
factory. However, when supplied loose, SBC-2000 DSP Controllers are usually
STEP 1: VERIFY PROPER JUMPER SETTINGS wired by the user in accordance with wiring diagrams supplied by Acrison.
The SBC-2000 DSP Controller is equipped with a number of jumpers that have
been factory-set to their default positions or, if factory-wired, to the positions
required for proper operation. If the controller was not factory-wired and tested 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TB1
verify that the jumpers are properly positioned for the intended use.
+5 C +5I I R R T T D D Digital.Outputs are
O C x x x x O O O.C. rated 20 VDC
Jumpers (jumper numbers are screened in bold text) numbered 1 through 12 M O D D D D C 4 @ 2mA maximum.
plus 19 and 20 are associated with flash programming of the operating programs M + - + - O +
for both the Keyboard/Display Unit and the main operating program of the M
controller. For normal operation jumpers 1, 3, 6, 8, 10, 11 and 20 should be Control Channel
selected as shown in the diagram below.
The jumper labeled “JMP13” allows the speaker to be disabled, if desired. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 TB2
JMP13 is shown with the speaker enabled.
D D D R R T T D D D D D
O O O x x x x I I I I I
LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
3 2 1 D D D D C 4 3 2 1
+ + + + - + - O - - - -
The diagram below shows the location of various connectors and jumpers on the M Digital Inputs are
SBC-2000 DSP Controller: dry contact closure
Serial Channel 2
STEP 3: CONFIGURE THE CONTROLLER

The SBC-2000 DSP Controller has several user-configurable options associated
with its operation. If the controller was wired and tested at the factory these
J4 PS 1 options have most likely been set to match user preferences. If not, factory
default values will have been provided that may need to be changed. The chart
below shows the default values for the configuration parameters. These values
can be restored by holding-in the Reset Switch for 10 seconds.
Setting Value
20 11 10 8 6 3 1 CH0 Protocol & Speed DB 19200
JMP13 CH0 Station Address 1
CH2 Protocol & Speed DB 19200
Ethernet Port CH2 Station Address 1
19 12 9 7 5 4 2 IP Address 192.168.10.176
1 10 1 12 IP Mask 255.255.255.0
Password 1234
Feeder Type 4 (LIW)
TB2 TB1 USB
A detailed explanation of the procedure for configuring an SBC-2000 DSP
Reset Switch Controller is provided in Chapter 10 of the SBC-2000 O&I Manual.
Note: The USB connector is only used for flash programming.
302-0695/9-2005 Rev
CM STEP 3: MAKE CONNECTIONS
Quick Start Guide Connections to the SBC-2000 CM Controller are made through the module’s 32-
pin connector J3. The connections are shown in the diagrams below.
SBC-2000 CM Controller
In most cases any wiring directly to the module will have been performed at the
Follow this guide to quickly install your new controller.
factory. However, when supplied loose, SBC-2000 CM Controllers are usually
wired by the user in accordance with wiring diagrams supplied by Acrison. While
STEP 1: VERIFY PROPER JUMPER SETTINGS
Acrison supplies both the mating connector and loose pins with the module,
The SBC-2000 CM Controller is equipped with a number of jumpers that have wiring by the customer may require the purchase of a crimping tool and/or
been factory-set to their default positions or, if factory-wired, to the positions soldering equipment. A crimping tool such as the Harting Model #09 99 000
required for proper operation. If the controller was not factory-wired and tested 0077, equipped with Locator Tool #09 99 000 0086, is suitable for this purpose.
the jumpers should be checked to verify that they are properly positioned for the
intended use.
J3
C24 C22 C20 C18 C16 C14 C12 C10 C8 C6 A26 A24 A22 A20
Jumpers J6-J11 are associated with the Control Channel and are normally set to
the “RS-422” selection. The “Loop” selection is reserved for custom program
T T R R T T R R T T R R
operation. J11 and J12 are associated with flash programming of the operating x x x x x x x x x x x x
program and must be positioned as shown for normal operation. D D D D D D D D D D D D
+ - + - + - + - + - + -
LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
The diagram below shows the location of various connectors and jumpers on the Channel 0 Channel 2 Control Channel
SBC-2000 CM Controller: J3
A28 A8 A6 A4 A2 A16 A14 A12 A10 C30 C32 C4 C2
Ethernet Port
D D D D D D D D D +5I +5
O O O O O I I I I
Reset Switch DI
C 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Dig. Outputs are O.C.
O + + + + - - - - COM rated 20 VDC @ 2mA.
M Dig. Inputs are dry
contact closure.
JMP11 STEP 4: CONFIGURE THE CONTROLLER
The SBC-2000 CM Controller has several user-configurable options associated
with its operation, as shown below. If the controller was wired and tested at the
factory these options have most likely been preset to match user preferences. If
Loop RS422 not, default values will have been provided, which may need to be changed. The
chart below shows the default values for the configuration parameters. These
J3 Pins values can be restored by holding-in the Reset Switch for 10 seconds.
C
J7-J11 A Setting Value
CH0 Station Address 1
JMP12
J
CH2 Station Address 1
Pin 32 J3 Pin 2
IP Address 192.168.10.176
IP Mask 255.255.255.0
STEP 2: INSTALL THE CONTROLLER Password 1234
The SBC-2000 CM Controller can be supplied loose or pre-wired in a card rack Feeder Type 4 (LIW)
or on a plate. If pre-wired at the factory it will usually be supplied in a card rack
and be associated with a specific card rack position for its installation. Consult A detailed explanation of the procedure for configuring an SBC-2000 CM
the Acrison drawings that were supplied with the controller for the proper card Controller is provided in Chapter 10 of the SBC-2000 O&I Manual.
rack location and wiring.
302-0694/9-2005 Rev
SBC
Quick Start Guide (Rev D) Set 5 Jumpers for Current Loop or RS-422/485 Protocol
SBC-2000 CONTROL MODULE
C7 Current Loop (Default)
Follow this guide to quickly install your new control module.
RS-422/485
STEP 1: VERIFY PROPER PROTOCOLS
Your SBC-2000 Control Module has two separate serial communications J6 J5 J4 J3 J1
channels which were pre-configured at the factory to operate with specific
communications protocols. These protocols must match the ones in the devices
this module will communicate with. The labels on U5 and U6 (typical label shown
STEP 3: INSTALL AND WIRE THE MODULE IN THE CARD RACK
below) identify the protocols and the baud rates available on this module. The
desired baud rate is selected on DIP switches SW1 and SW2. The SBC-2000 Control Module can be supplied loose, or prewired in a card rack
or on a plate. If prewired at the factory it will be associated with a specific card
© 2003 ACRISON, Inc. rack position for its installation. Consult the drawings which were supplied with
400-0247 D the controller to determine the proper location and wiring.
Protocol DB576 SBC/702/060
Description 19.2K/57.6K 7/E/1 Baud Rates Connections to the SBC-2000 Control Module are made through the module’s
32-pin connector J2 shown below.
STEP 2: VERIFY PROPER DIP SWITCH SETTINGS In most cases any wiring directly to the module will have been performed at the
DIP switches SW1 and SW2 have been factory-set to their default positions as factory. However, when supplied loose, the SBC-2000 Control Modules are wired
shown below. Please verify that the switches are properly positioned for your by the user in accordance with diagrams provided by Acrison. While Acrison
use. NOTE: you must select a unique Station Address for every communication supplies both the mating connector and loose pins with the module, wiring by the
module operating on the same serial communication channel (see module customer may require the purchase of a crimping tool and/or soldering
diagram below). On this module both DIP switches may be set to the same equipment. A crimping tool such as the Harting Model #09 99 000 0077,
address if they are used on different channels. equipped with Locator Tool #09 99 000 0086, is suitable for this purpose.
J2
C32 C30 C24 C22 C20 C18 C16 C14 C12 C10 C8 C6 C4 C2
Binary Value Baud
1 2 4 8 16 Rate TR TR
+5I T T R R T T R R +5
ON High
x x x x x x x x
Low D D D D D D D D
+ - + - + - + -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The default SW1 and SW2 DIP Switch settings are STATION #1, High Speed, as
Serial 1 Serial 2
shown above. The Station Address will be the sum of the binary values of switches 1
through 5 which are set to their ON positions. J2
The baud rate for user communication is protocol dependent. Most protocols provide A32 A30 A28 A26 A24 A22 A20 A18 A16 A14 A12 A10 A8 A6 A4 A2
a choice of one of two baud rates as is indicated on the U5 and U6 labels (see
above). Set switch number 6, labeled “Baud Rate” to the ON position to select the
S S M M M M D D D D D D D D
higher of the available baud rates, or OFF for the lower baud rate.
C C C C C C I I I I O O O O
Switches 7 and 8 (“TR”) on each DIP Switch are used to turn terminating resistors on + - T T R R 1 1 2 2 1 1 2 2
the RS-422/RS-485 communications lines on or off. If terminating resistors are not + - + - + - + - + - + -
required the jumpers should be set to the “OFF” position (Default). Only the
communication module farthest from the host device will normally require terminating
SC=Scale Connections J2 Pins Dig. Outputs are O.C.
resistors.
MCT=Mtr Ctrl Transmit rated 20 VDC @ 2mA.
SW1 is associated with Channel #2 and the lower front plate LED, while SW2 is MCR=Mtr Ctrl Receive C Dig. Inputs are dry
DI, DO=Digital In & Out A contact closure.
associated with Channel #1 and the upper LED.
302-0656/9-2005 Rev B
APPENDIX
D
ETHERNET/IP TO SBC-2000 INTERFACING
APPENDIXB
Overview
This section is a guide to aid in interfacing Acrison's SBC-2000 CM and DSP
Feeder Controllers to a “host” supporting Allen Bradley's Ethernet/IP. The guide
should be used in conjunction with the actual Operating and Instruction manual
supplied with the Host.
Because of the complex nature of the subject matter, a certain level of knowledge
regarding Local Area Networks (LAN), TCP/IP and Ethernet is required.
Additionally the user should be familiar with the Allen Bradley Ethernet/IP and
DF1(PCCC) protocols. In general, this manual will:
• Give an overview of the interface topology and the major interface

components.
• Provide a synopsis of the Ethernet/IP, CIP and PCCC protocols.
• Show network device configuration and give host examples.
Users requiring information on any third-party software, equipment or software

protocols should reference the appropriate specification and/or vendor manual.
Note: The Acrison SBC-2000 controller family does not require an EDS file.
General Network
Acrison’s SBC-2000 DSP and CM assemblies have built in RJ-45 jacks and can
be connected directly to an Ethernet LAN. The basic SBC-2000 module requires
an Ethernet gateway to connect to a LAN. The figure below is a general Ethernet/
IP network diagram showing some connections between a “host” PC or PLC and
various Acrison setups. The diagram shows the PC and PLC connected to a
corporate LAN. Often Automation Engineers will spec an Ethernet Router or
Switch to keep the Control LAN Ethernet traffic separate from corporate traffic.
D-1
Figure D-1 Example—Ethernet Configuration
Ethernet Port Specifications
Parameter Description
Hardware Interface Ethernet 2.0/IEEE 802.3
Transmission Speed 10MBaud
Connectors RJ45(10BaseT)
Ethernet/IP
Ethernet networking has become a prominent communication protocol worldwide.
It's low cost, high reliability and high speed has induced Allen Bradley to develop
an automation industry “standard” called Ethernet/IP (where IP stands for
Industrial Protocol). This protocol rides on top of TCP/IP, which uses Ethernet as
the hardware/datalink media. Allen Bradley has made the Ethernet/IP protocol an
“open Protocol”. Details of the protocol are available from the Open DeviceNet
Vendor Association website (www.ODVA.com) and from Allen Bradley. Allen
Bradley’s Ethernet/IP protocol was designed around the “CIP” (Control and
Information Protocol) that is used on ControlNet and Devicenet. Additionally,
messaging capability was added to support PCCC encapsulation.
This manual assumes that the reader is familiar with Ethernet/ IP and the PCCC
and CIP protocols.
Acrison supports the following error messages:
STS CODE
No CODE (No error) 0x00
Address doesn't point to something usable 0x0F 0x06
File is wrong size 0x0F 0x07
Transaction size too large 0x0F 0x0A
D-2 SBC-2000
Bad condition/Resource N/A 0x0F 0x0C
Illegal Command 0x0F 0x10
Illegal Data type 0x0F 0x11
HOST Configuration Examples (ControlLogix)

The following pages provide several screen examples illustrating some key
actions associated with configuring the Host PLC, DCS or PC. The example
screens were developed using RSLogix 5000 and are associated with both PCCC
and CIP protocols.
When examining these screens please refer to Appendix B of the SBC-2000
Family User Guide. Within the charts provided in Appendix B four columns are
applicable to Ethernet/IP (see excerpt below):
1) Column 1 (Feeder and/or System Parameters). This column contains the
name of the parameter or function. A complete description of each parameter
can be found in the SBC-2000 Family User Guide in Appendix A.
2) Column 3 (Type): Specifies the data type for the parameter. The data type for
PCCC and CIP protocols is always floating point so this column can be
ignored.
3) Column 4 (Read/Write). Specifies whether this parameter’s value can be
modified (R/W), or whether it is read-only (R), or write-only (W).
4) Column 5 (SDLC . . . Hex). This is the Attribute Code for use in accessing this
particular parameter in CIP protocol.
5) Column 9 (A-B Data Highway). The Ethernet/IP PCCC Codes follow the
same Index values as this column. The only exceptions are the Commands
(B3:224) that have different bit values than those in this column. See “PCCC:
Typed Write Binary on page 7.
Figure D-2 Excerpt From Appendix B; Table B-2
D-3
Message Examples
:
PCCC: Typed Read (16 parameters, Floating Point)
Using a PLC-5, SLC500 or ControlLogix PLC as a master, the message

instruction should be used. Above is an example of a Typed Read as setup in
RSLogix 5000
The message instruction reads16 floating point parameters from the Acrison
controller starting at parameter number 68 (This will read the 16 remap
parameters). The destination table address is F8:68. The F indicates that it is
Floating point data type. The adjacent 8 also indicates this. Sixteen parameters
are the maximum number of parameters that can be read at a time.
D-4 SBC-2000
.
PCCC: Typed Read (Binary)
The above example is also a Typed read. The destination table address is
B3:154. The B indicates that it is Binary data type. There are four word
parameters that are available to be read as Binary, they are (Status 1) parameter
numbers 154 & 155 and Status 2 (parameter numbers 102 & 103).
Some Hosts, RSView as an example, will allow reading binary data in the form of
bits or “coils” in the form B3:154/1. This will return bit 1 of the Status register (the
ON indicator in series 400 controllers).
If using RSView be aware that the driver will attempt to read a full block of data of
the same type. So a request of B3:102 and B3:154 will be an attempt to read 52
parameters which is beyond the Acrison driver's size restrictions.
Alternatively, the Remapped Status request can be used. Reference Appendix B.
D-5
PCCC: Typed Write (Floating Point)
The message instruction above writes the floating point value as defined by FdrArray[0] (in this case 2222)
to the Acrison controller parameter number 92 (This is the feed rate setpoint).
D-6 SBC-2000
PCCC: Typed Write (Binary)
The above example is also a Typed write. This time the parameter quantity is one
and the data type is Binary. The destination table address is B3:224. The B
indicates that it is Binary data type. The 224 is the Coil Command word. The bit
values of the commands are as follows:
Hex Decimal Operation

1 1 Internal Grav
2 2 External Grav
4 4 Internal Vol
8 8 External Vol
10 16 Continuous
20 32 Batch
40 64 Start
80 128 Stop
100 256 Acknowledge
200 512 Batch Abort
400 1024 Auto Refill
800 2048 Man Refill
1000 4096 Refill On
2000 8192 Refill Off
D-7
CIP: Read A Parameter
Using a ControlLogix PLC as the master, the message instruction is configured as

type "CIP Generic."
The Service Type is set as "Get Attribute Single," which is Service Code 0x0E.
For all CIP operations. The CLASS is set to 0x64, the INSTANCE is set to 1, and
the ATTRIBUTE is set to the specific Acrison parameter the user wishes to read.
The DESTINATION is set to a tag of type REAL. Upon execution of the message
instruction, the tag will contain the desired value. In the example, ATTRIBUTE is
set as 0x5D, which is the parameter code for Ratio Set Point.
D-8 SBC-2000
CIP: Write A Parameter
Using a ControlLogix PLC as the master, the message instruction is configured as

type "CIP Generic."
The Service Type is set as "Set Attribute Single," which is Service Code 0x10. For
all CIP operations. The CLASS is set to 0x64, the INSTANCE is set to 1, and the
ATTRIBUTE is set to the specific Acrison parameter the user wishes to write. The
SOURCE ELEMENT is set to a tag of type REAL, with a SOURCE LENGTH of
Four (4) bytes. Upon execution of the message instruction, the tag will be set to
the Acrison Controller and will be set to the value contained in the tag. In the
example, ATTRIBUTE is set as 0x5C, which is the parameter code for Feed Rate
Set Point.
D-9
Shown is an example of the tag used in the previous examples. Controller tag
"fr_UP" is declared as type REAL, which makes the style floating point. The value,
25.0, would have been read from the controller using the "Get Attribute Single"
method, or written to the controller using the "Set Attribute Single" method.
D-10 SBC-2000
Creating a Background Scanning Job on ControlLogix
Background Scanning allows the ControlLogix PLC to automatically read and

write 16 parameters with no intervention or program logic on the user's part.
Values are automatically transferred from an array of 16 tags (16 each in and out,
32 total). The block of data is remapable, and can be any value the Acrison SBC-
2000 controller provides (except text parameters), and status/commands.
In the following examples, an Allen Bradley 1756-ENBT Ethernet/IP
Communications Bridge was used as the Ethernet Device. Use of third party
devices may require a different configuration.
With your project defined, and the ControlLogix in an OFFLINE condition, scroll
down in the left pane until you reach I/O CONFIGURATION. The branch should
either be open, or if not, open it by clicking on the "+" sign. With the branch open,
select the 1756 module, and right click on in. A fly-out menu will appear, click
"New Module..."
D-11
From the "Select Module Type" window that appears, scroll down the list and
select module type "ETHERNET-MODULE", which will have the description
"Generic Ethernet Module. Click OK.
D-12 SBC-2000
At this point, a new branch will appear under the 1756-ENBT, shown as
ETHERNET-MODULE. Double-click this device, and a properties window will
appear. At this point, the user should enter data into the following fields:
Name: This is a "name" you associate with the scanner. This name will then be
used to create the tags used by the scanner. Typically the name of the controller
is used in this field.
Description: This is a text box used to give any description you want to the device.
It will show in the "Description" field of the device. Typically you can use the IP
address as the description, as shown in the example images. It is sometimes
helpful to use the name of the feeder controller in this field.
Comm Format: Select "Data - REAL". The values to be transferred are floating
point.
IP Address: Enter the IP Address of the SBC-2000 controller you will be
communicating with.
Under "Connection Parameters", the Assembly Instance for Input is 100, length
16. For Output it is 112, length 16. For Configuration 150, length 0.
Click "Next>>"
D-13
The "Requested Packet Interval" should be set to 250ms or greater. The SBC-
2000 Controller has an internal period of 250ms. Setting this value to less than
250ms will give a connection error. Values of 250ms - 500ms would be typical.
If it is desired to inhibit communications on this channel for whatever reason,
check the "Inhibit Module" box, otherwise leave it unchecked.
Click "Finish>>"
This completes the configuration for background scanning.
D-14 SBC-2000
Once the scanner is configured, the ControlLogix will automatically create three
(3) arrays using the "name" you assigned to the scanner. As shown in the
example image, the scanner was named "SBC2000_1", so three arrays, named
"SBC2000_1:I", "SBC2000_1:O", and "SBC2000_1:C" are created. Of these, only
the "I" and "O" arrays are used. The "I" and "O" arrays each contain 16 data fields
of type "Real" (.Data[0] through .Data[15]). The "I" array is data being read from
the controller, the "O" array is data being written to the controller.
The values presented are controlled by the Remap parameters for "Serial
Channel 0/Ethernet". Any numerical value may be remapped (no text parameters
may be remapped, such as Feeder Name) and all parameters are presented as
floating point values. One special exception to this is Feeder Status on the "I" side
and Commands on the "O" side. The remap parameter code for Feeder Status/
Commands is 152 and is typically used in position .Data[15] (Remap 16 on the
SBC2000).
D-15
Remapped Feeder Status & Commands
Remapped Feeder Status
Remapped Feeder Status is a binary encoded decimal number in “real” format. Since the format of the
values presented in the remap block are all of the same type, that being IEEE Floating Point, status could
not be transmitted in binary.
Each block below represents a decimal “weighting” based on the powers of two. Internally a host device
can either converted the real back to a binary form and test via individual bits, or a subtractive method can
be used on the floating value.
[128] [64] [32] [16] [8] [4] [2] [1]

Dribble Batch Batch (1) Grav (1) Int (1) Auto (1) Refill Run (1)
Complete Cont (0) Vol (0) Ext (0) Refill ON (1) Stop (0)
Man (0) OFF (0)
[32768] [16384] [8192] [4096] [2048] [1024] [512] [256]

Acrilok Overfill Empty General General Overfill or Low High
Message Alarm Empty Level Level
[524288] [264144] [131072] [65536]

Alarm2 Ext Fast Deviation No Scale
For example, the following number, 281, would represent the following conditions:
256 - High Level

16 - Grav Mode
8 - Internal (Vol mode since [16] = 0)
1 - Running
256 + 16 + 8 + 1 = 281
Note that only Status 1 (code 152) may be remapped. Feeder Status 2 (code 39) may not be remapped.
Commands
When writing to the Remapped Feeder Status Register this takes on the function of a
Command Write. The binary encoded decimal format is similar in idea. The host device
creates an IEEE Float value based on the table shown below to perform command action:
[128] [64] [32] [16] [8] [4] [2] [1]

Vol(1) Alarm Ack Refill Refill Batch Batch(1) Man(1) Run(1)
Grav(0) Off On Abort Cont (0) Auto(0) Stop(0)
[256]
External(1)
Internal(0)
In its simplest form, sending a “1” to the Command Write Register would start the feeder,
but keep in mind that it would also perform the following: Refill to Auto Mode,
Continuous Mode, Gravimetric Mode, Internal Mode. If this is not what was intended
(say the feeder is in Internal Volumetric Mode, Manual Refill) then a Feeder Start
command would be 131, Stop would be 130, 128 + 2 to keep the mode in Volumetric and
Manual Refill +1 to Run.
D-16 SBC-2000
Status and Commands Example
The following example program demonstrates how to properly use the status data
coming from the feeder, and to send a commands to the feeder. In this example,
to start and stop it, and to initiate a refill.
The example uses what is referred to as “scanning” on the Ethernet channel,

since the PLC handles all of this by itself “in the background” and makes the data
available in predefined tags for program use.
Figure D-3 shows the ladder diagram for this program. Note the status data
arrives as a REAL value in “SBC2000:I.Data[15]” (which is the Ethernet Input
Data Array). The MOV instruction on line 0 converts this REAL value to a 32 bit
DINT called “Int_Status”. Once this is done “Int_Status” can be bit addressed
throughout the ladder. The run status bit is at “Int_Status.0", which you can see
being referenced on lines 1 and 3. “Int_Status” is expanded on Figure D-5 to show
its individual bits, and what they represent.
Lines 2 and 4 of Figure D-3 show a method of starting and stopping the feeder by
setting and clearing bit 0 of the INT command word “Command_Bits.”
Line 5 monitors the Low Level Status Bit at “Int_Status.9”, and if the controller is in
Manual Refill Mode (“Int_Status.2”). If this is true, it sets bit 4 of “Command_Bits”
which initiates a Refill. “Command_Bits” is expanded on Figure D-4 to show its
individual bits and what they represent.
On line 6, a MOV instruction is used to convert the INT value of “Command_Bits”

to the REAL value at “SBC2000:O.Data[15]” (The command value in the Ethernet
Output Array).
Figures D-4 and D-5 show the expanded contents of the various controller tags
containing the input data, output data, status, and command bits.
D-17
Figure D-3 Example—Ladder Diagram
Figure D-4 Example—Command Tags
D-18 SBC-2000
Figure D-5 Example—Data & Status Tags
D-19
D-20 SBC-2000
APPENDIX
E
UPDATING SBC FIRMWARE
APPENDIXB
Overview
This section will explain in detail how to flashload the SBC controller with new
firmware. This appendix will explain:
• The 3 possible files that may require updates

• How to determine the your present version SBC programs
• How to load programs via Ethernet
• How to load programs via the USB cable
WARNING: During the Flashloading process the existing firmware will be

erased and written over. If the process is not completed the Controller may
not be functional. Additionally it should be assumed that the
communications and calibration settings will be lost therefore steps should
be taken to record important values. Improperly flashing a program can
permanently damage the controller.
General Information
The SBC-2000 series of controllers contains Flash memory. This type of memory
is nonvolatile, yet erasable, allowing the programs to be field upgraded using
standard PCs. There are two methods of upgrading the firmware in the SBC-2000
controllers: via Ethernet and via USB.
There are several items that are required for this process. First, a PC running
Microsoft Windows 2000, or later, with access to the internet. Second, either an
Ethernet cable or a USB-A to USB-Mini B cable, depending on the method used.
Last, the proper program hex file as described below.
There are two distinct programs in the SBC-2000 CM Controller and three in the
SBC-2000 DSP Controller. The SBC-2000 CM Controller has both a controller
program and a Flashloader program. The SBC-2000 DSP Controller has a
controller program, a Flashloader program and a display program. The
Flashloader program allows the loading of the controller firmware using Ethernet
(via TFTP). In general the Flashloader program as shipped will rarely, if ever,
change. The controller program and the display program will have occasional
updates. Since the controller program will be the file that will most probably need
E-1
updating the Flashloader was created to make reloading as user friendly as
possible.
Only the controller program can be upgraded using the Ethernet jack. The display
and Flashloader programs can only be updated using the USB port. (The
controller program can also be updated via the USB port). Both methods will be
described in this section.
The revision A hardware version of SBC-2000 CM and DSP Controllers used
different program numbers based upon a difference in memory configuration. The
firmware part numbers are listed below, where the “_” will be the latest revision
letter.
Firmware Part Numbers
Board Revision Firmware Description Filename

A Controller Program 4040040_.hex
A Flashloader Program 4040044_.hex
All Display Program 4040041_.hex
B or later Controller Program 4040042_.hex
B or later Flashloader Program 4040043_.hex
It is recommended that the required part numbers be checked to confirm that they
are the latest version. The revision level of the Flashloader and controller
programs can be determined by running the SBC Configurator. This is done by
entering the I.P. address of the controller in the address bar of any browser (MS
Internet Explorer works fine -- see Chapter 10). The controller will send back a
password page which also shows the version numbers. To determine the version
number of the display program (SBC-2000 DSP only) simply watch the display
screen when powering up. The version number of the display program will appear
on the screen during the first 2 seconds of power-up.
Flashloading the SBC Controller Program via Ethernet

Flashloading a new SBC-2000 CM or DSP controller program via Ethernet is done
using the TFTP protocol. Acrison’s Flashloader Program acts as a TFTP server
and will respond to commands from a TFTP client. Microsoft’s Windows 2000 and
Windows XP have a TFTP Client as part of their standard operating load. It is very
limited since it uses command line instructions and does not have a progress
indicator. Klever offers a free TFTP client called “PumpKIN.” The use of both
TFTP clients is described below. PumpKIN is described first as it offers a GUI type
interface.
Loading using PumpKIN

1) It is assumed that the TFTP Client program PumpKIN has already been loaded
on the PC. (If not, install it from one of the two sites listed below):
PumpKIN download locations:
• Klever web site: hiip://kin.klever.net/pumpkin/binaries
• Acrison FTP site FTP://65.112.109.15/Utilities (Logon user name is
"utilities" and password is "utility").
2) Connect setup as shown in Figure 1.

3) Start the PumpKIN program on the PC.
-2 SBC-2000
Figure 1 - Ethernet Cable Connections
4) With the IP address of the controller known (shipped as 192.168.10.176),

select the Put command. Enter the file name: 4040042_. hex for rev B boards
or higher (4040040_.hex for rev A boards). If the file path is long the button to
the right can be used for browsing to locate the file. Enter the IP address of the
controller under "Remote Host.".
5) Hold down the button while applying power to the Controller. The on-board
heartbeat LED, D7, will flash at double the normal rate indicating that the board
is in flash load mode.
6) Click on "OK". After a short time the program will start transferring the file to the
SBC. The onboard heartbeat LED, D7, will flash at half the normal rate
indicating that the board is in the process of flashloading.
7) The new program has been loaded. Exit PumpKIN.
Figure 2 -- TFTP Transfer in Progress
E-3
Figure 3 -- PumpKIN Transfer Successfully Completed
Loading using Microsoft TFTP Client

1.) Connect setup as shown.
2.) Open a DOS Window.
Figure 4 -- Opening a DOS Window
-4 SBC-2000
3) Hold down the Reset Button of the controller while applying power to the it. The
onboard heartbeat LED, D7, will flash at double the normal rate indicating that
the board is in flashloading mode.
4) Type "TFTP -i", the IP address of the controller, "PUT" then the new hex file:
4040042_. hex for rev B boards or higher (4040040_.hex for rev A boards)
then hit <return>
Example:
C:\ TFTP -i 192.168.10.176 PUT d:\4040042c.hex
.
Figure 5 -- Transferring using a Command Line
5) After a short time the program will start transferring the file to the controller. The
onboard heartbeat LED, D7, will flash at half the normal rate indicating that the
board is in the process of flashloading. After about two minutes the command
prompt will appear indicating that the download is complete. If the prompt does
not return after 4 minutes repeat steps 1-4.
6) The new firmware has been loaded. Exit the Command Prompt screen
E-5
Figure 6 -- Transfer Successful using Command Line
Flashloading the Controller via USB

Loading the Controller Program via a USB port
Note: Communicating to the controller via USB may require
downloading USB drivers (See below).
1) It is assumed that MTK2 program has already been loaded on the PC. (If not,
install mtkinstall-2_4_04.exe).
Download sites:
• Dallas-Maxim:
hiip://files.dalsemi.com/microcontroller/dev_tool_software/mtk/
• Acrison FTP site FTP://65.112.109.15/Utilities/ (Logon user name is
2) It is also assumed that USB drivers have already been loaded onto the PC. (If
not, install CP210x_VCP_Win2K_XP.exe).
Download sites:
• Silabs site:
• http:/www.silabs.com/tgwWebApp/public/web_content/products/
microcontrollers/USB/en/mcu_vcp.htm/
• Acrison FTP site FTP://65.112.109.15/ (Logon user name is "utilities" and
password is "utility").
3) Set the jumpers Jmp11, Jmp12, Jmp13 and Jmp14 on the SBC-2000 CM
Controller to the position marked “PGM” or, on the SBC-2000 DSP Controller,
move the jumpers to positions 2,4,5,7,9,11 and 19 as shown on the adjacent
silkscreen.
-6 SBC-2000
4) Connect setup as shown. The USB cable is Acrison p/n135-0911.
5) Apply power to the Controller
Figure 7 -- Cabling for USB Transfers
Figure 8 -- MTK Device Selection
E-7
Figure 9 -- MTK Pull-down for Configuring the Serial Port
Figure 10 -- MTK Port Configuration Pop-Up
-8 SBC-2000
Figure 11 -- Pull-down to Open MTK Serial Port
6) Start MTK2 program on the PC.

7) From the "Select Device" box select "TINI/DS80C400" then "OK".
8) Select "Options" then "Configure Serial Port". Select an available COM Port
and speed (the controller will operate at up to 115,200 baud).
9) Select "Tini" then "Open COM _". The window should turn white and the status
Figure 12 -- MTK Pull-down to Load Hex File
E-9
Figure 13 -- MTK File Download Selection
line at the bottom of the window will read "Com x Open".

10)Select "File", "Load Hex File" and browse to locate the latest file. The filename
will be 4040042_.hex for rev B boards or higher (4040040_.hex for rev A
boards only), where the “_” will be the revision letter. The screen will indicate
"Loading Banks 40 to 44." Then "Load complete" will be displayed.
11)Select "Tini" then "close " the serial port. Exit MTK.
12)Power down and move jumpers Jmp11, Jmp12, Jmp13 and Jmp14 on the
SBC-2000 CM Controller to the “RUN” position or, on the SBC-2000 DSP
Controller, return the jumpers to positions 1,3,6,8,10,11 and 20 as shown on
the silkscreen adjacent to the jumpers.
-10 SBC-2000
Figure 14 -- MTK Download Status
Flashloading the Flashloader Program via a USB port

Repeat the steps of the “Flashloading the Controller Program via a USB port” section
except load the Flashloader program. The filename will be 4040043x.hex for rev B
boards or higher (4040044_.hex for rev A boards only). The screen will indicate
"Loading Bank 58" and then "Load complete."
Power-down and return the jumpers to the RUN position as described in step 12
above.
Flashloading the Display Program via a USB port (DSP only)

Note: Communicating to the SBC via USB may require downloading
USB drivers (See Flashloading the Controller Program via a USB port step 2).
1) It is assumed that the FlashMagic program has already been loaded on the PC.
(If not, download FlashMagic.exe).
Download sites:
• ESAcademy:www.esacademy.com/software/flashmagic/fmfree.htm/
• Acrison FTP site FTP://65.112.109.15/Utilities/ (Logon user name is
2) Set the jumpers to the PROGRAM mode positions 2,4,6,8,10,12, and 20.
3) Connect setup as shown and apply power to the controller.
5) Start Flash Magic Program on the PC.
E-11
Figure 15 -- Cabling for USB Transfers
Figure 16 -- Flash Magic File Download Selection
6) Enter the filename (select the file 4040041_.hex for the display program).
7) Configure the settings as shown above.
8) Select “Start”.The screen will indicate the device is being erased then loaded.
9) TO AVOID DAMAGING THE CONTROLLER DO NOT INTERRUPT THE
FLASHING PROCESS OR DISCONNECT THE CABLE UNTIL THE WORD
“Finished” APPEARS AT THE BOTTOM LEFT PORTION OF THE SCREEN.
10)Exit Flash Magic.
11)Power down and install jumpers at 1,3,6,8,10,11,20 as indicated on the
silkscreen adjacent to the jumpers, to return to RUN mode.
-12 SBC-2000
12)The display program has been upgraded. Note the screen on power-up to
verify the program version.
Figure 17 -- Flash Magic Screen Settings
E-13
-14 SBC-2000
APPENDIX
F
ALARMS AND ERROR MESSAGES
APPENDIXB
Overview
SBC-2000 Family controllers provide two types of alerts to the operator when a
malfunction or misoperation has occurred, or is likely to occur. Alerts that signal
the need for immediate attention are called “Alarms” while less urgent alerts are
“Messages.” Each type of alert is treated differently by the SBC-2000. For alarm
display descriptions for the SBC-2000 MFC please refer to the Acri-Data O&I
Manual.
Alarms
The Alarms Table below lists the conditions that are considered alarms by the
controller. These alarm conditions will be displayed on the Keyboard Display Unit
(KDU) of the SBC-2000 DSP Controller as described above and are available in
Status Bytes 1 and/or 2 to host equipment communicating with any SBC-2000
Family controller (see Appendix B). In addition, alarms can cause the activation of
the controller’s digital output contacts (see Chapter 5). The occurrence of any of
the alarms will also set the General Alarm, also available in Status 2.
Alarms can be specified to either “self-clear,” when the condition that caused the
alarm no longer exists, or to be latched until cleared by the operator, by setting the
Alarm Latch calibration entry in the controller (see Appendix A).
Alarms appear on the SBC-2000 DSP screen with a bell symbol and an
abbreviation as shown in Figure F-1.
Figure F-1 Main Screen—No Tach Alarm
F-1
Alarms Table
Alarm Description
No Scale or The signal from the feeder’s scale is no longer present (occurs only when
Scale Alarm, or the feeder is operating in gravimetric mode). Stops the feeder.
Lost Scale Sig.
Acri-Lok An unexpected scale disturbance has been detected that exceeds the
user-specified limit and the controller has changed to volumetric mode
until the scale settles (occurs only when the feeder is operating in
gravimetric mode).
Overload The motor controller current has exceeded the allowable limit.
Deviation The feed rate has varied from the set point by an amount that exceeded
the user-specified limit (plus or minus) for the time period selected.
Overfill The scale has reached or exceeded100% of its capacity, or (L-I-W
feeders) the supply hopper is over 100% full.
Empty (L-I-W feeders). The supply hopper has reached the level specified by the
user as “Empty.”
No Tach If the feeder’s metering auger motor is equipped with a tachometer this
alarm will occur if the controller fails to detect an output from it when the
feeder is running.
Batch Deviation At the completion of a batch the amount of material fed is compared to the
desired batch size. If the amount fed exceeds the allowable limit this alarm
is activated.
Mistracking (Model 260 Weigh Belts). If the weigh belt mistracks by activating the limit
switch this alarm is activated.
No Batch Timer A batch has failed to complete before the time allowed for it in the No
Batch Timer calibration entry
Messages
Messages are similar to alarms but are displayed differently and generally have
less immediate importance. There are many more messages than alarms.
Messages do not set the General Alarm and are displayed as a separate box as
shown in Figure F-2. Some messages require manual clearing while others self-
clear.
Host devices communicating with SBC-2000 controllers can determine when a
message is available and what the message is using Status 1 as shown in
Appendix B, page B-20. The “Message Available” bit is in Status 2.
Figure F-2 Main Screen—Message
F-2 SBC-2000
Error Messages Table
Message Description
Overfill--Can’t Batch Can not start a batch if the hopper level or the scale weight is at
or above 100%.
Scale Entries Reversed The Scale Empty and Scale Full calibration values are reversed.
Hi/Low Levels Reversed The supply hopper High Level and Low Level calibration values
are reversed (L-I-W feeders).
Perm X Run--Open The Permissive Run contact number X has opened. “X” is a
number from 1 to 8.
Batch Too Large For loss-in-weight batching indicates that there is insufficient
material in the supply hopper for the requested batch size. For
gain-in-weight batching indicates that the requested batch size
exceeds the capacity of the scale.
Refill Timer Expired Indicates that a refill cycle has now taken longer than the time
specified in the Refill Timer calibration entry.
Mtr Controller No Comm Communication has been lost between the SBC-2000 controller
and the feeder’s metering auger motor controller.
Mtr Controller Stopped The feeder’s metering auger motor has stopped unexpectedly.
Value Out of Range The value just entered is outside the acceptable range for this
parameter.
Not Changeable in Run The controller can not accept changes to this parameter while
the feeder is running.
BatchLok Indicates that the controller has stopped the batch for 5 seconds
due to an unexpected scale disturbance and will automatically
restart after that interval.
Remote Run Enabled Indicates that the controller is set to be started from a contact
closure input, not from the Run button.
Batch Trim over 25% The controller can not accept a value for batch trim that is greater
than 25% of the batch size.
Delayed Run Message is displayed if an attempt is made to start the feeder
during the Start Delay Interval.
Delayed Stop Message is displayed if an attempt is made to stop the feeder
during the Stop Delay Interval.
Max Speed Reached Indicates that the feeder’s metering auger motor has reached the
maximum speed set in the Max Motor Speed calibration setting.
Hi Rate out of Limits Indicates that the Autotuning Cycle determined that the high feed
rate was out of the allowable range.
Low Rate out of Limits Indicates that the Autotuning Cycle determined that the low feed
rate was out of the allowable range.
Set Point Exceeds MFR The current Feed Rate Set Point exceeds the calibration entry for
Maximum Feed Rate.
Tune--No Low Rate The controller could not establish a valid low rate during the
Autotune Cycle.
Tune--No Slope Indicates that the controller could not find the slope during the
Autotune Cycle.
F-3
F-4 SBC-2000
APPENDIX
G
MOTOR CONTROLLER SETTINGS
APPENDIXB
Overview
Both SCR/DC and VFAC motor controllers may be used with Acrison’s SBC-2000
CM/DSP controllers. Acrison has included provisions in the SBC-2000 CM/DSP
controllers for using a variety of motor controllers from a number of different motor
controller manufacturers.
Motor controller settings vary widely from one manufacturer to another. When
purchased from Acrison the motor controllers are properly configured in the
factory. However, some customers prefer to provide the motor controllers
themselves. In order to ensure that those motor controllers are properly
configured for use with SBC-2000 CM/DSP controllers, this Appendix lists those
settings.
Settings assume the use of the standard Modbus interface. Analog interfaces may
be configured differently.
This appendix lists settings for the following motor controller models, in the order
shown:
• Allen Bradley PowerFlex 40
• Allen Bradley PowerFlex 70, 700, 750
• Telemecanique / Square-D / Altivar Model 28, 31, 312
• Telemecanique / Square-D / Altivar Model 71
• ABB ACS 350, 550
• Delta VFD-E
• Weg Model CFW09
• Yaskawa V7
• Yaskawa F7
• Allen Bradley PowerFlex 525
G-1
Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 70 & 700
20-COMM-H Adapter Hardware Settings:
Set the node address switches to: 01
Set the Network Protocol to: RTU
20-COMM-H Adapter Software Settings
Parameter Description Setting Value
5003 Net Address 1 Address
5005 Net Baud Rate 2 19.2kbps
5007 Parity 0 None
5010 Checksum Type 2 CRC-16-1
5011 Network Timeout 5 Seconds
5015 Comm Fault Action 1 Stop
5030 Stop Bits 1 2
In order for the above changes to take effect, the 20-COMM-H adapter
must be reset. This can be accomplished by going to parameter 5014
and entering a value of 1. The display will briefly show fault “F085”, then
clear after reset is complete.
Drive Software Settings:
C090 Speed Ref A Sel 22 DPI Port 5
D155 Stop Mode A 0 Coast
E190 Direction Mode 2 Reverse Dis
Additional Typical Drive Parameter Settings:
B041 Motor NP Volts VAC
B042 Motor NP FLA Amps
B043 Motor NP Hertz Hz
B044 Motor NP RPM RPM
B045 Motor NP Power kW/HP
B046 Mtr NP Pwr Units 0 or 1 0=HP
G-2 SBC-2000
1=kW
B053 Motor Cntl Sel 0 Sensrls Vect
B055 Maximum Freq 60 Hz
C083 Overspeed Limit 0 Hz
D140 Accel Time 1 1 Seconds
D142 Decel Time 1 1 Seconds
Telemecanique - SquareD Altivar 28 & 31/312
Communication Parameter Settings:
CON-Add Node Address 1 Address
CON-tbr Baud Rate 19.2 kbps
Set-ACC Acceleration Time 1 Seconds
Set-dEC Deceleration Time 1 Seconds
drc-UnS Nameplate Volts V
drC-FrS Nameplate Frequency Hz
Once communications is established with the Altivar, an automatic fault

timeout is engaged within the controller. If communications is lost for 7
seconds, the display will flash "SLF" (Serial Line Fault). This indicator will
continue to flash even after communications is re-established and it can
not be cleared from the Altivar keypad. This error can only be cleared by
either sending a reset fault code to the motor controller (this can be done
by sending an Alarm Ack to SBC-2000) or by cycling the power of the
motor controller.
G-3
Telemecanique - SquareD Altivar 71
Parameter Description/Display Setting Value
1.9 Modbus Address 1 Address
1.9 Modbus baud rate 19.2 kbps
1.9 Modbus format 8n1
1.9 Modbus time out 10 Seconds
1.9 Scan.IN1 address 3201 1st word
1.9 Scan.IN2 address 8604 2nd word
1.9 Scan.IN3 address 3204 3rd word
1.9 Scan.IN4 address 7121 4th word
1.9 Scan.IN5 address 3202 5th word
1.9 Scan. IN6-8 addresses all 0 6th-8th word
1.9 Scan Out1 address 8501 1st word
1.9 Scan.Out2 address 8502 2nd word
1.9 Scan.Out3-8 address all 0 3rd-8th word
1.6 Ref.1 channel Modbus
1.6 Profile I/O profile
1.6 Cmd switching ch1 active
1.6 Cmd channel 1 Modbus
1.6 Cmd channel 2 Modbus
1.8 Fault Reset C101
1.8 Modbus fault mgt Fast stop
Parameter Description/Display Setting Value/Display
1.3 Acceleration 1 Second
1.3 Deceleration 1 Second
1.4 Standard mot. freq Hz
1.4 Rated motor power kW/HP
G-4 SBC-2000
1.4 Rated motor volt. Volt
1.4 Rated mot. current Amp
1.4 Rated motor freq. Hz
1.4 Rated motor speed rpm
ABB ACS350* & ACS550
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM
1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL 0 EXT1
1103 REF1 SELECT 8 COMM
1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM
1608 START ENABLE 1 0 NOT SEL
1609 START ENABLE 2 0 NOT SEL
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 1 FAULT
3019 COMM FAULT TIME 8 SECONDS
5302 EFB STATION ID 1 ADDRESS
5303 EFB BAUD RATE 19.2 KB/S
5304 EFB PARITY 0 8N1
5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 ABB DRV LIM
9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS
9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 ABB STANDARD
9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT V
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR A
9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Hz
9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED RPM
9909 MOTOR NOM POWER KW/HP
G-5
* The ACS350 keeps the address 247 active all the time. This
conflicts with the use of the AcroMag Current Out module, which
uses the same address. This model should not be used if the
AcroMag is required.
Delta VFD-E
02.00 Reference 3 RS-485
02.01 Commands 4 RS-485
02.04 Reverse 1 Disable Reverse
09.00 Modbus 1 Address
09.01 Baud 2 19.2kbps
09.02 Fault Mode 2 Stop Comm Time
09.03 Comm Timeout 7 Seconds
09.04 Comm Protocol 3 MB-RTU 8N2
Parameter Description Setting Value/Display
01.09 Accelerate 1 Seconds
01.10 Decelerate 1 Decel Sec.
G-6 SBC-2000
WEG CFW 09
P133 Minimum Speed 0
P157 IxT Overload curve As required
P202 Control Type 3 Sensorless
P208 Ref Scale Factor 1800 As required
P209 Phase Loss Detection 1 On
P210 Decimal Point 0
P211 Zero Speed Disable 1 On
P220 LOC/REM Selection 0 LOC
P221 Local Speed Reference 9 Serial
P223 Local FWD/REV Sel. 0 FWD
P224 Local STOP/START 2 Serial
P225 Local JOG 0 Disable
P279 RL1 Function 0 Not Used
P280 RL2 Function 0 Not Used
P308 Unit Address 1
P309 Fieldbus 0 Inactive
P312 Protocol 1 MB-RTU 19.2k 8-N
P314 Serial Watchdog 5 Seconds
P400 Nameplate Voltage V
P401 Nameplate Current Amp
P402 Nameplate Speed
P403 Nameplate Frequency Hz
P404 Nameplate Power
P406 Ventilation
G-7
Yaskawa V7
n001 Parameter Enable 4 Allow
n003 Operation Method 2 Modbus
n004 Reference 6 Serial Comm
n005 Stop Method 1 Coast to Stop
n006 Reverse Prohibit 1 Reversed Disable
n037 Elect. Thermal Protect 1 Standard Rating
n057 Multifunction Output 1 During Running
n151 MB Timeout Detection 0 Coast to stop
n152 MB Frequency Ref 1 0.01Hz
n153 MB Slave Address 1
n154 MB Baud Rate 3 19.2Kbps
n156 MB Parity Selection 2 No
Recycle power to drive for changes to take effect.
Yaskawa F7 / Yaskawa G7
Parameter Description Setting Value/Display
b1-01 Freq. Ref. Selection 2 Serial Comm
b1-02 Start Source 2 Serial comm
H5-01 Serial Comm 1 Address
H5-02 Serial Baud Rate 19.2 Kbps
H5-03 Serial Comm Parity 0 No
H5-04 Serial Fault Select 0 Ramp to Stop
H5-05 Serial Fault Detect 1 Enable
Recycle power to the drive for changes to take effect.
G-8 SBC-2000
Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 525

P046 Start Source 1 3 Serial/DSI
P045 Stop Mode 5 Coast
P047 Speed Reference 3 Serial/DSI
A544 Reverse Disable 1 Rev Disabled
C123 Comm Data Rate 4 19.2Kbps
C124 Comm Node Addr 1 Address
C125 Comm Loss Action 2 Stop
C126 Comm Loss Time 5 Seconds
C127 Comm Format 0 MB RTU 8-N-1

P031 Motor NP Volts VAC
P032 Motor NP Hertz Hz
P041 Accel Time 1 1 Seconds
P042 Decel Time 1 1 Seconds
P039 Torque Perf Mode 0 V/Hz
Settings when drive is used in Hand/Auto configuration:

P048 Start Source 2 2 DigInTrmBlk
P049 Speed Reference 2 5 or 6 5=0-10V
6=4-20mA
t062 DigIn TermBlk 02 48 2-Wire FWD
t067 DigIn TermBlk 07 5 Spd + Strt 2
Hand: Start/Stop contact to Terminal #2&7 and with analog speed

control (Source 2). Auto: Start/Stop and speed control is via the
Comm Port with no contact to Terminal #2&7 (Source 1).
G-9
G-10 SBC-2000
APPENDIX
H
PROFIBUS DP SETTINGS
APPENDIXB
Overview
In early 2009, SBC-2000 CM/DSP Family Controllers were updated to include a
standard Profibus DP port in addition to the other communications capabilities
previously included with these controllers.
In order to use the Profibus channel it must first be turned on in the controller. This
is accomplished using Acrison’s Configurator (see Chapter 11) by entering a
Profibus Station Number greater than zero. A zero is the default value, which
turns the Profibus channel off.
GSD FILE
Communication between a Profibus master device, such as a PLC, and a Profibus
slave device (the SBC-2000 CM/DSP Controller in this case) requires a unique
information file (GSD file) that describes for the master what the capabilities of the
slave device are. Acrison’s GSD file for the SBC-2000 CM/DSP’s native Profibus
DP port is “SBC20C16.GSD,” which can be obtained through Acrison’s
Configurator (see Chapter 10). It can also be obtained from Acrison’s Field
Service Department.
BASIC SPECIFICATIONS
Description Value
DP Slave Type SBC2000
Device Identification Number 0X0C16
Max Speed 12 MHz
Connector DB-9 Female
Data Types
The data packet transferred between the Profibus-DP Master and the controller is
comprised of parameterized data. Currently these parameters include 3 types:
Commands, Floating Point and Status.
The data is always transferred in “buffer consistent,” or “whole length” format,

meaning that data is transferred on the Profibus link such that partial segments of
data can not be interrupted. This is important when transmitting floating point
data. Data is transferred in 32 byte, or less, segments (but always in multiples of
4, to make up the remainder for the total length). Since each data type consists of
4 bytes, no individual parameter can be split in the middle. In the case of a floating
H-1
point value, if less than the entire 4 byte entity were transmitted, it could result in
an incorrect value from one cyclic transmission to the next.
• Commands: This 4 byte block is only for Master writes (output). There is only
one command “block,” which contains 32 bits. The command block is bit oriented,
with each bit representing a command from the Master to the Slave. The relation-
ship of bit to command is defined in the table below. While 32 bits have been allo-
cated in the command block, only the first 15 bits are defined, with the remaining
bits reserved for future expansion. The bits should be treated as momentary in
that the command action only occurs when the bit goes from a 0 to a 1. Once the
status data indicates the desired command action has occurred, the bit should be
reset.
COMMAND PARAMETER
Byte Offset Bit Command
Byte 0 0 Alarm Acknowledge
Byte 0 1 Start Feeder
Byte 0 2 Stop Feeder
Byte 0 3 Start Refill
Byte 0 4 Stop Refill
Byte 0 5 Cancel Batch
Byte 0 6 Int Grav Mode
Byte 0 7 Ext Grav Mode
Byte 1 0 Int Vol Mode

Byte 1 1 Ext Vol Mode
Byte 1 2 Continuous Mode
Byte 1 3 Batch Mode
Byte 1 4 Auto Refill Mode
Byte 1 5 Manual Refill Mode
Byte 1 6 Emergency Stop
• Status: These parameters also use 4 byte blocks and are used for Master read-
ing (Input) only. There are two status “blocks” assigned at this time. The status
blocks, like the command block, are bit oriented. The relationship of bit to status is
defined in the tables below.
Status1 Parameter Bytes
Bit Parameter 400 Series Parameter 200 Series Byte Offset

0 Refill On Batch Complete Byte 0
1 Low Level External Volumetric Byte 0
2 Manual Refill Mode Internal Volumetric Byte 0
3 Auto Refill Mode Feeder OFF Byte 0
4 High Level Feeder ON Byte 0
5 Feeder Off External Gravimetric Byte 0
6 Feeder On Batch Mode Byte 0
7 Not in Dribble Mode Internal Gravimetric Byte 0
0 Batch Complete Overload Byte 1

1 External Volumetric Fault Byte 1
2 Internal Volumetric Feed Rate Deviation Byte 1
H-2 SBC-2000
3 Batch Delay No Tach Reading Byte 1
4 Batch Running Rezeroing Byte 1
5 External Gravimetric Auto Rezero Byte 1
6 Batch Mode No Scale Byte 1
7 Internal Gravimetric No Rezero Pending Byte 1
0 Motor Overload EM0 Byte 2

1 Fault EM1 Byte 2
2 Feed Rate Deviation EM2 Byte 2
3 No Tach Reading EM3 Byte 2
4 Empty EM4 Byte 2
5 Acrilok EM5 Byte 2
6 No Scale EM6 Byte 2
7 Hopper OverFill EM7 Byte 2
0 EM0 Byte 3
1 EM1 Byte 3
2 EM2 Byte 3
3 EM3 Byte 3
4 EM4 Byte 3
5 EM5 Byte 3
6 EM6 Byte 3
7 EM7 Byte 3
Status 2 Parameter Bytes

0 Batch Abort Batch Abort Byte 0
1 General Alarm General Alarm Byte 0
2 Batch Deviation Batch Deviation Byte 0
3 Speed in RPM Speed in RPM Byte 0
4 Units 0 Units 0 Byte 0
7 Max Rate Mode Max Rate Mode Byte 0
0 Auto Tune Mode Auto Tune Mode Byte 1

1 No Batch Alarm No Batch Alarm Byte 1
2 Max Motor Speed attained Max Motor Speed attained Byte 1
3 Refill Timer Expired Refill Timer Expired Byte 1
4 Reserved Reserved Byte 1
5 Fast Start Fast Start Byte 1
6 Minute Mode Minute Mode Byte 1
0 Remap Mode Remap Mode Byte 2

1 Scale Factor 3 Scale Factor 3 Byte 2
2 Message Pending Message Pending Byte 2
3 Jog Jog Byte 2
6 Hand Hand Byte 2
7 Alarm 2 Reserved Byte 2
H-3
0 Fault Code 0 (A/C Drive) Fault Code 0 (A/C Drive) Byte 3

• Floating Point parameters: Each of these parameters is always allocated 4

bytes. They are used for sending and reading data. Data is transferred in IEEE
standard format, meaning that the highest memory location holds the least signifi-
cant byte.
Example: In Configuration “400 Configuration 1” Bytes 8, 9, 10 and 11 are allo-

cated to the Feed Rate Set Point Parameter External Gravimetric
Byte 8=0x42, Byte 9= 0xC6, Byte 10= 0x00, Byte 11 = 0x00
This follows the standard IEEE format which would equal: 42 C6 00 00 or “99.”
Configurations
At this writing there are seven data configurations that are supported by the SBC-
2000 CM/DSP Controller using Profibus DP; three for loss-in-weight (Series 400)
feeders, three for zero reference (Series 200) feeders and one supporting only
remapped parameters, as shown below. The selection is made by the master
prior to operation.
Table H-1 Series 400 Fixed Configuration 1

Input Area Output Area
Data Description Type Address Data Description Type Address
Status #1 S 0 Commands C 0
Status #2 S 4 Feed Rate Set Point (Ext Grav) F 4
Feed Rate Set Point (Ext Grav) F 8 Feed Rate Set Point (Int Grav) F 8
Feed Rate Set Point (Int Grav) F 12 Bulk Density F 12
Feed Rate F 16 High Level F 16
Bulk Density F 20 Low Level F 20
High Level F 24 Empty Level F 24
Low Level F 28 Proportional F 28
Empty Level F 32 Integral F 32
Hopper Level F 36 Max Feed Rate F 36
Proportional F 40 Total Fed F 40
Integral F 44 Total Fed 2 F 44
Max Feed Rate F 48 Total Throughput F 48
Total Fed F 52 Run Recipe F 52
Total Fed 2 F 56
Motor Speed F 60
Motor Current F 64
Scale Weight (Lb.) F 68
STATUS (S) FLOATING POINT (F) BINARY (B) COMMAND (C)
Total 72 Total 56
H-4 SBC-2000
Feed Rate Set Point (Int Grav) F 12 Feed Rate Set Point (Int Vol) F 12
Feed Rate Set Point (Int Vol) F 16 Bulk Density F 16
Total Fed 2 F 60 Batch Size Set Point F 60
Motor Speed F 64 Batch Preact F 64
Motor Current F 68 Batch Deviation F 68
Scale Weight (Lb.) F 72 Dribble Point F 72
Batch Fed F 76 Dribble Speed F 76
Batch Size Set Point F 80
Batch Preact F 84
Batch Deviation F 88
Dribble Point F 92
Dribble Speed F 96
Total 100 Total 80
.
Feed Rate Set Point (Int Grav) F 12 Rezero Cycle Time F 12
Feed Rate F 16 Retention Time F 16
Rezero Cycle Time F 20 Rezero Interval F 20
Retention Time F 24 Rezero at Run F 24
Rezero Interval F 28 Proportional F 28
Rezero at Run F 32 Integral F 32
Proportional F 36 Max Feed Rate F 36
Integral F 40 Total Fed F 40
Max Feed Rate F 44 Total Fed 2 F 44
Total Fed F 48 Total Throughput F 48
Total Fed 2 F 52 Run Recipe F 52
Motor Speed F 56
Motor Current F 60
Scale Weight (Lb.) F 64
Total 68 Total 56
H-5
Feed Rate Set Point (Int Vol) F 16 Rezero Cycle Time F 16
260 Constant F 40 Max Feed Rate F 40
Batch Size Set Point F 80 Belt Tach Hz. F 80
Batch Preact F 84 260 Constant F 84
Batch Deviation F 88
Dribble Point F 92
Dribble Speed F 96
Belt Tach Hz. F 100
Total 104 Total 88
H-6 SBC-2000
Table H-5 16 I/O Remapped Parameters

Status #2 S 4 Remap Parameter #1, S0, E-Net, PB F or B 4
Remap Parameter #1, S0, E-Net, PB F or B 8 Remap Parameter #2, S0, E-Net, PB F or B 8
Remap Parameter #16, S0, E-Net, PB F or B 68
Any parameter of type “F” or type “B” may be remapped, in the index code range of 32-223
See Chapter 4 and Table H-8 for a description of Parameter Remapping
Total 72 Total 68
H-7
.
Table H-6 Series 400 Fixed + Remapped Configuration

Feed Rate Set Point (Int Vol) F 16 Bulk Density F 16
Batch Size Set Point F 80 Remap Parameter #1, S0, E-Net, PB F or B 80
Batch Preact F 84 Remap Parameter #2, S0, E-Net, PB F or B 84
Batch Deviation F 88 Remap Parameter #3, S0, E-Net, PB F or B 88
Dribble Point F 92 Remap Parameter #4, S0, E-Net, PB F or B 92
Dribble Speed F 96 Remap Parameter #5, S0, E-Net, PB F or B 96
See Chapter 4 and Tabel H-8 for a description of Parameter Remapping )
Total 164 Total 144
H-8 SBC-2000
.
Table H-7 Series 200 Fixed + Remapped Configuration
Feed Rate Set Point (Int Vol) F 16 Rezero Cycle Time F 16
260 Constant F 40 Max Feed Rate F 40
Batch Size Set Point F 80 Belt Tach Hz. F 80
Batch Preact F 84 260 Constant F 84
Batch Deviation F 88 Remap Parameter #1, S0, E-Net, PB F or B 88
Dribble Point F 92 Remap Parameter #2, S0, E-Net, PB F or B 92
Dribble Speed F 96 Remap Parameter #3, S0, E-Net, PB F or B 96
Belt Tach Hz. F 100 Remap Parameter #4, S0, E-Net, PB F or B 100
See Chapter 4 and Table H-8 for a description of Parameter Remapping )
Total 168 Total 152
H-9
Table H-8 Default Remap Parameters
Register Addresses
Remap Default Parameter Parameter Parameter
Register Index Code
Address 400 / 200 Series 400 Series 200
68 99 Feed Rate
69 100 Total Fed #1
70 101 Motor Speed
71 102 Motor Current
72 154 / 165 Hopper Level Belt Pulley Speed
73 155 Scale Weight (%)
74 163 / 156 Bulk Density Scale Weight (Wt)
75 115 Max Feed Rate
76 164 Mid Feed Rate N/A
77 110 Proportional
78 220 Integral
79 92 Feed Rate Set Point—Int Grav.
80 93 Feed Rate Set Point—Ext Grav.
81 94 Motor Speed Set Point—Int.
82 95 Motor Speed Set Point—Ext.
83 152 Feeder Status Request
Profinet Gateway
Acrison’s Profinet Gateway provides a means for connecting a Profinet Master to
as many as 20 Acrison controllers. The gateway converts the Profinet protocol to
Modbus protocol for connection to an available serial port on the controller.
When shipped from Acrison the gateway is set to a default configuration. It can be
changed using the software that is provided with the gateway.
The screen captures that are provided are examples of various settings
associated with Acrison’s default configuration and are for reference only. Please
refer to the documentation provided separately for the gateway and its software
for instructions on its use.
H-10 SBC-2000
The ABC Configuration Tool is software that comes with the gateway to program/
configure the FieldBus (Profinet) and Subnet (serial) sides of the ABC.
In this image, the Fieldbus settings are shown. From here the IP Address, Subnet
Mask, and other network settings may be set.
H-11
“Sub-Network” refers to the serial network that the ABC unit is connected to and
is converting data to/from in the Fieldbus Network (Profinet in this case). On this
screen the baud rate and other properties of the Sub-Network are set.
On the left page under the Sub-Network branch are all the defined parameters that
the AnyBus Communicator exchanges with the Sub-Network device.
H-12 SBC-2000
Each defined parameter has a property set associated with it. For each “Query” the
defined parameters are shown here. These are the default parameters, and no
changes are needed.
H-13
For each “Write” the defined parameters are specified here. The “Update Mode”
must be changed to “On Data Change” for each write parameter. The default is
“Cyclically,” which would constantly write the parameter from the AnyBus
Communicator to the SBC-2000, which is not desirable. Parameter values should
only be written to the controller when they change.
H-14 SBC-2000
The Sub-Network Monitor screen shows the mapping (used bytes) of the input
and output areas.
H-15
The Station Monitor displays actual data in the AnyBus Communicator internal
memory that is being transferred between the two networks. The IN area shows
data that is being read from the Sub-Network device, and the OUT area shows
data that is being sent to (or has already been sent to) the Sub-Network device.
H-16 SBC-2000
ProfinetCommander in operation. ProfinetCommander is a PC based Profinet test
program used to test, verify, and commission Profinet networks. In this view, you
can see the data returned in the first 13 input areas. Each input relates directly to
an SBC-2000 controller data field. In this example, the first field is STATUS 1,
and the data “00 00 81 A8” decodes as follows:
A8 = 10101000 = Not in Dribble, Feeder OFF, Auto Refill
81 = 10000001 = Internal Grav, Batch Complete
The third field “42 C8 00 00” is the IEEE-754 floating point representation of the
EXT GRAV setpoint, which is currently set to 100.0.
H-17
H-18 SBC-2000
WARRANTY
ACRISON, INC., (hereinafter referred to as ACRISON) warrants the equipment (complete new equipment) to be free from defects in
material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year [five (5) years for the entire weighing mechanism of an Acrison weigh feeder] from
the date of shipment to or for the buyer. The obligation of ACRISON under this warranty is expressly limited to the repairing or replacing of
any part or parts that are proved to the satisfaction of ACRISON to have failed prematurely or because of a fault in workmanship or
materials. All such replacement parts shall be shipped F.O.B., ACRISON'S factory; this warranty does not include the installation or freight
charges of such replacement part(s). The new equipment warranty is not transferable and applies only to the original buyer of the
equipment.
Parts replaced under ACRISON'S new equipment warranty automatically fall into the new equipment warranty period for that of the original
(new) equipment which is one (1) year from the date of shipment of the original (new) equipment... not the shipment date of replacement
parts covered under ACRISON'S new equipment warranty.
ACRISON warrants spare and replacement parts (not parts replaced under its new equipment warranty) for a period of ninety (90) days
from the date of shipment of the parts, whether or not such parts are shipped with the original (new) equipment.
ACRISON warrants repaired parts (not parts replaced under its new equipment warranty) for a period of thirty (30) days from the date of
shipment of such repaired parts.
ACRISON shall not be liable for any inconvenience, loss of use, or any other consequential loss, damage or injury arising from any cause
whatsoever associated with the equipment. Back-charges of any nature relative to work performed on the equipment at any time by the
buyer, user, or a contractor authorized by the buyer or user will not, under any circumstances, be accepted without the prior written
consent of ACRISON.
ACRISON warrants that all the equipment being shipped herewith has been manufactured in accordance with all applicable federal laws,
rules and regulations. In addition, ACRISON reserves the right to correct and/or modify any area of design or construction which is
considered not to be in accordance with any specific safety ordinance unbeknown to ACRISON within sixty (60) days of notification in
writing by the user, with any costs for such work at the user's expense.
ACRISON shall have no obligation under this warranty for any equipment or parts which have not received proper maintenance service, or
which have been subject to any misuse, abuse, negligence, accident, improper installation, deterioration by chemical action, act of God,
repair or alteration in any way, so as in the final judgment of ACRISON, to adversely affect the performance or reliability of the equipment
or parts.
NOTE: In order for precision weighing equipment to operate properly, the supporting structure for same must be designed and
constructed In accordance with sound engineering practices and be sufficiently rigid to not only adequately support the
equipment, but also, to ensure that the effects of rotating or vibrating machinery, operating in close proximity to the weighing
equipment, remain within tolerable levels so as not to adversely affect performance.
No employee, agent or representative of ACRISON shall have any right or authority to vary or alter the terms of this warranty.
This warranty does not include any representation that the equipment shipped herewith is fit for the particular purpose intended by the
buyer, unless ACRISON agrees in writing that, (a) the equipment is based on the recommendation of ACRISON for a specific particular
purpose, (b) the buyer is relying on the expertise of ACRISON in making the recommendation and, (c) the equipment is, in fact, used for
the specified purpose, in which event, ACRISON warrants that the equipment is fit for that specified particular purpose.
EQUIPMENT SAFETY: With respect to operation of ACRISON equipment, it is the buyer's or user's responsibility to define and
provide any safety device(s) or associated safety device(s)...(other than that which is furnished by ACRISON as standard)...which may be
necessary and/or required, and to establish safety procedures and operational instructions to safeguard the operator(s) during
maintenance, cleaning, or any use of the equipment whatsoever, and to subsequently ensure that the equipment is operated in
conformance with all applicable safety procedures, laws, regulations and instructions. It is also the buyer's or user's responsibility to
enforce all safety regulations and operational instructions and to maintain the equipment in a safe condition (guards in place, warning,
caution and/or important labels affixed, electrical boxes secure, interlocks operational, etc.). In particular, all warning, caution and/or
important labels must be maintained in a readable condition, and if necessary, replaced with new labels. Additionally, and because the
nature of the equipment does not always make it possible to fully prevent operator access from rotating components, maintenance or
cleaning of any nature must not be performed on the equipment without first disconnecting all power.
OPERATOR SAFETY: Buyer or user warrants and agrees that because it has sole control over the equipment, it shall be solely
responsible for safety compliance. Operator access and use of equipment, and full compliance with all provisions of the Operator Safety
section of ACRISON'S Instruction Manuals are essential and the user's responsibility, the provisions of that section being incorporated
herein expressly.
CLAIMS: Buyer or user shall defend, indemnify and hold ACRISON and/or seller harmless from all product liability claims involving the
equipment, unless such liability is proven to be due solely to negligence on the part of ACRISON.
INDEX
Symbols
"Weight-loss-Differential" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
“Weight-Loss-Differential” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6,5-5
“Weight-Loss-Differential” feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Numerics
1761 NET-ENI Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
260 Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-6,H-7,H-8,H-9
3964R Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
A
Abort Rezero Pending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
AC supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Acri-Lok Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12,6-2
Acri-Lok Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Acri-Lokë . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Acrison Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Acrison Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
advanced features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Alarm Acknowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11,10-7,F-1,F-2
Allen Bradley 1771-DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Allen Bradley DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Allen Bradley Data Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Allen Bradley DF-1 (DH or DHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Allen Bradley Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Allen Bradley PLC-5 (DF-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Allen-Bradley DA Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Allen-Bradley DH/DHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
ANALOG I/O MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Auto Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Auto Refill Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Automatic Head Effect Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Automatic Refill Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6,5-9,5-11,8-1
Automatic Rezero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
B
Batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Batch Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Batch Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Batch Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Batch Deviation Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Batch Fed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7,A-35
Batch In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Batch Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Batch mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Batch Mode parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Batch out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Batch Remain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
batch size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Batch Size Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Batch Through Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Batch Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Batching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Batching operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Batch-lok . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Batch-lok Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5,3-12
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4,2-12
Baud rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Belt Tach Hz. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-6,H-9
Binary/Integer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
blink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Board Pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Bulk Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5,5-12,6-5
Bulk Density Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Bumpless Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
C
C/BC-702 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Calibration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7,6-1
Calibration Data Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Calibration Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Calibration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1,5-2,5-6
Cancel Batch in Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Central Controller/ Host computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Chamber Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5,5-12
Chamber size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
changing product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Clear Scaling Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Color KDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Color Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
COMBO SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
COMMAND SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6,3-12,6-2
Compensation Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Compensation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Computational Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6,11-11
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Confirmation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
continuous mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
control algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Control Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Control modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
control modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Controller Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
CPK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
D
Data Link Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Data Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Data Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
DATA SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Data volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Date andTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
DB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
DB Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
DCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii-iv,3-1
Default 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Default 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Default 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Derivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5,A-5
device address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
DF1 (Full Duplex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Digital Weight Resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6,2-6
Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Direct Multi-drop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
displacement sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
DP Slave Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
Dribble Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Dribble Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Dribble Speed Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
DSP/REM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
DSP/REM” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
E
Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Empty Level Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
engineering drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii-v
Engineering Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii-v
Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3,A-35
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Ethernet cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Ethernet Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1,2-2
Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Ethernet/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5,D-1
Exit Scaling Factors Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
External Fast Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
External Fast Start mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
External Gateway Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
External Gravimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
External Gravimetric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11,6-2
External Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
External Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
External Volumetric control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
External Volumetric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
F
Fast Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11,5-6,7-3
Fast Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12,5-7
Feed Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3,A-35
Feed Rate Control Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Feed Rate Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4,5-9,5-11
Feed Rate Setpoint Universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Feed rate SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Feeder Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
FEEDER MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Feeder Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7,11-9
Feeder Status 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Feeder Status 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Feeder Status Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Feeder Status Request 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Fisher EIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Fisher EIC (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Flash Burning the Controller Program via a USB port . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Flash Burning the Display Program via a USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
Flash Burning the Flashloader Program via a USB port . . . . . . . . . E-11
Flash Burning the SBC via USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
flashes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Floating Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
FTP site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
G
Gain-in-Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
GATEWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Generic Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Graph Interval Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
GRAPH PREFS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
GRAPH SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Graph Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Gravimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1,5-2
GSD file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
H
hard default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
hardware protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1,2-8
Head Effect Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2,8-2
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Help Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Help Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13,A-3
High Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
High Level point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
High Level Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5,8-2
Honeywell APM/SI (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Honeywell PLCG/DH (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Hopper Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3,A-35
Hopper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Hopper/Tank Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5,3-1
Host Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
I
Index Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Information Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
infrared port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
In-Line Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Integral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5,7-5,A-5
interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Interfacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1,3-6
Internal Gateway Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Internal Gravimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4,5-11
Internal Gravimetric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11,6-2
Internal Gravimetric mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Internal Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Internal Volumetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Internal Volumetric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11,6-2
internal volumetric mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Interval Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
IP Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
K
Keyboard Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Klever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
L
Language Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1,A-4
latency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4,3-11
LCS 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii-v
LED D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
LED D2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Legacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Local Keyboard Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
LOG SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Loss-in-Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Low Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Low Level point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Low Level Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
LOW RATE GRAPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
M
Man Refill Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Manual Head Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Manual Refill Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6,5-9,8-1
Manual Rezero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Max Feed Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Max Scale Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Maximum Feed Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6,7-4
Maximum Motor RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
MB 984 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
MD-II 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
MD-II-MFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
message format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8,F-1,F-3
Metering Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
MicroSoft TFTP Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Mid Feed Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Mid/Max Rate Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
MODBUS /TCP PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7,11-11
Modbus 984 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4,2-13,4-1
Modbus APMSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Modbus ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Modbus PLCG/DHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Modbus RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13,3-2
Modbus RTU 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Modbus RTU/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Modbus TCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Model 203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2,1-3,1-5
Model 203B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3,1-5
Model 270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2,1-8,1-9
Model 403 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Model 407 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2,1-3
Models 402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Modem Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Motor Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3,A-35
motor controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Motor Controller Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Motor Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Motor Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3,A-35
motor serial channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Motor Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9,6-3,A-35
Motor Speed SP Volumetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
MPKDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
MTK2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Multi-Drop Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
multi-drop configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Multi-Feeder Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Multi-feeder Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
multiple feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
N
Navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Network Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2,7-8
Network Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7,11-8
No Batch Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
No-Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Normal-Refill Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
O
Op Data Entries Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Operating Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Operational Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Optional Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Overfill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Overhead Weighing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
P
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Parameter Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Parameter Index Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4,4-5,6-1
Parameter Index Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Partial-Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii-iv,3-1
PersonalKDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
personalKDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Platform Weighing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1,3-11
PLC, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii-iv
poll rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5,2-6
Preset Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Profibus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7,H-1
Profibus DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8,H-1
Profibus Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Profibus master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
Profibus Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7,11-8
Profibus-DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13,7-8
Profinet Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-10
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Proportional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12,6-5,7-5,A-4
Proportional Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4,3-1
Protocol/Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Pumpkin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Q
QRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Quick Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
R
Ratio Control Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8,3-9
Ratio Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Ratio SP EV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Ratio SP External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Ratio/Proportioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Ratiometric Computational Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Ratiometric Digital Weight Resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Ratio-Proportioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Recipe Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11,5-2
Refill Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
refill cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5,8-1
Refill Cycle, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Refill Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12,5-4,5-6,6-3,A-35
Refill Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Refill Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5,8-2
refresh rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
register address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Register Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
register addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
REM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Remap Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
remap functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Remap Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Remap Register Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3,4-4
Remapped Feeder Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
Remapped Status Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Remote Keyboard Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
REMOTE KEYBOARD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22,10-23
Remote Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3,A-35
Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Response time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Retention time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
revision letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Rezero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11,5-2,5-4
rezero cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Rezero Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12,5-4
Rezero modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Rezero Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Rotary feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
rotary pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3,A-35
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
RS-422/485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
RS-485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8,2-13
S
SAS-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10,2-7
SAS-22 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Saving and Printing a Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
SBC-2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii-iv,2-1
SBC-2000 DSP/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
SBC-2000 DSP/C Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Scale Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Scale Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Scale Empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4,6-5
Scale Factor 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Scale Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Scale Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Scale Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Scaling Factor #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Scaling Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
SCREEN CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Select "Scaling Factors" Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Select Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Select Continuous Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Select External Fast Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Select External Gravimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Select External Volumetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Select Internal Gravimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Select Internal Volumetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Serial Channel #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Serial Channel #2 Station Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Serial Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7,2-8,2-12
Serial Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7,2-8,2-12
Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
serial connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Serial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Serial Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
serial transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Series 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Series 200 Configuration 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-5
Series 200 Configuration 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-6
Series 400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Set Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1,6-2
Set points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
SET POINTS SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Set Points Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
SETTINGS SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Siemens 3964R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13,3-2
silabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Simple Control Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7,3-8
Single Beam Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Single Feeder Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
SLAVE ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Slave Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
soft default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
software interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Software protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Split Beam Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Standard Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Start a Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Start Band Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Start Band Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Start Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Start Max Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Start Rezero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Start/Stop Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Status 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Status 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4,10-5
Status Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
Status Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Stop a Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Stop Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
Supply Hopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
SW1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
SW2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
T
Termination Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Termination resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Text data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
TFTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
Third party software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
third-party software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii-v,3-1
Toggle All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Top Information Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Total Fed #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Total Throughput Set Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4,5-7,6-2
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
TT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
TTSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Typed Write (Floating Point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
U
units of measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
USB connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
USB drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
User Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Using Legacy Computational Module with SBC-2000 CM/DSP . . . . 11-11
V
Volumetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Volumetric feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
W
Weigh Auger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Weigh Auger Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Weigh Auger Weighing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Weigh Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Weigh Belt Feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Weigh Belt Weighing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Weigh feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Weigh Feeder Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1,2-5
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3,A-35
Weight in % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3,A-35
Weight-Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4,5-1
Weight-Loss-Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
writing registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Z
Zero Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

404-0037ZD (SBC - 2000 - Family - User - Manual)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

404-0037ZD (SBC - 2000 - Family - User - Manual)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

404-0037ZD (SBC - 2000 - Family - User - Manual)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cover

Preface, Table of Contents P

• Chapter 1: This chapter gives a basic overview of how an Acrison weigh

• Weigh Feeder Operating and Instruction Manual—This manual is specific to

Users requiring information on any third-party software, equipment or software

Usage Indoor use

Weight of a controller for 6 feeders is approximately 4 pounds for the

Protection Degree of protection is IP66.

Humidity Maximum relative humidity 95% relative, non-condensing.

The product or products described in this

This manual contains technical data that is

Acrison, SBC-2000, pKDU and MD-II are

The equipment this controller operates contains rotating components, and

Important The equipment this controller operates is supplied for the

Preface The SBC-2000

Chapter 1 An Overview of Feeder Concepts

Chapter 2 Connecting the SBC-2000

Chapter 4 Reading and Writing Parameter Values

Chapter 5 Understanding Weigh Feeder Functions

Chapter 6 Selecting Parameters

Chapter 7 Advanced Controller Functions

Chapter 8 Refill Mode

Chapter 9 B&W Graphics DSP Operation

Chapter 10 Color Graphics DSP Operation

Chapter 11 Configuring SBC-2000 DSP/CM Controllers

Appendix A Calibration Data Parameters

Appendix B Parameter Codes and Status Bytes

Appendix C Quick Start Guides

Appendix D Ethernet/IP to SBC-2000 Interfacing

Appendix E Updating SBC-2000 CM / DSP Firmware

Appendix F Alarms and Error Messages

Appendix G Motor Controller Settings

Appendix H Profibus DP / Profinet Settings

1. What is an Acrison weigh feeder?

2. What are the physical components of a basic weigh feeder?

Theory of Operation—Volumetric and Gravimetric Feeders

An Overview of Feeder Concepts 1-1

Platform Weighing System

Models 402 and 404 Series; A405 and 406

Weigh Belt Weighing System

Weigh Auger Weighing System

Overhead Weighing System

403 Series and Model 270

Acrison Weighing Systems

• “Platform” Weighing (Split-Beam Type) System—A “split beam” lever

An Overview of Feeder Concepts 1-3

Ratiometric Digital Weight Resolver

Basic Components of the Different Model Acrison Weigh Feeders

All Model “Weight-Loss” Weigh Feeders

Consists of: Scale

Input and Output

“Weight-Loss” weigh feeders consist of the following basic components (refer to

An Overview of Feeder Concepts 1-5

Types of Weigh Feeders

Figure 1-4 Acrison Typical “Weight-Loss-Differential” Weigh Feeder

“Weight-Loss-Differential” feeders are mostly unaffected by environmental

An Overview of Feeder Concepts 1-7

Figure 1-7 Acrison In-Line Feeder—Model 270

Digital Weight Resolver